Panasonic DMREX98VEB Operating instructions

Panasonic DMREX98VEB Operating instructions
P8 – 14
Quick Start Guide
Operating Instructions
DVD Recorder
Model No. DMR-EX98VEB
The illustrations in these Operating Instructions show images of the black model.
Dear customer
Thank you for purchasing this product.
For optimum performance and safety, please read these instructions carefully.
Before connecting, operating or adjusting this product, please read the instructions completely.
Please keep this manual for future reference.
Note: “EB” on the packaging indicates the United Kingdom.
Trademark of the DVB Digital Video Broadcasting Project (1991 to 1996)
Declaration of Conformity No. 5135, 16th November 2007
Notice for DVB functions
This DVD Recorder is for viewing and recording free to view channels only, not Pay TV or encrypted channels unless connected to an external
source capable of receiving Pay TV or encrypted channels.
This unit does not have an analogue broadcast tuner.
• This unit has the capability for DVB specifications. But future DVB services cannot be guaranteed.
Region number supported by this unit
Region numbers are allocated to DVD recorders and DVD-Video according to where they are sold.
• The region number of this unit is “2”.
• The unit will play DVDs marked with labels containing “2” or “ALL”.
Example:
2
ALL
2
3
5
Web Site: http://www.panasonic-europe.com
EB
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 1
RQT9089-B
2008/04/23 18:59:03
Features
Enjoy Digital Broadcast !
Receives digital terrestrial broadcast
using an integrated DVB tuner
• Watching Television (➔ 19)
• Register and instantly call up favourite
programmes with Edit Profiles (➔ 78)
• Digital Channel Information (➔ 52)
Convenient Functions !
Linked operations with the TV
You can enjoy linked operations with the TV and
receiver by using VIERA Link or Q Link.
• Linked operations with the TV (VIERA Link “HDAVI
ControlTM”/Q Link)(➔ 50)
VIERA
Easy to Find and Select !
You can easily find programmes you
want to watch and set them for timer
recording.
• GUIDE Plus+ (➔ 19, 22, 38)
DIGA
TV Guide: Landscape
All Types
Wed 13th
Wed 13/01/07
19:45
VIERA remote control
All Services
Emmerdale : In today’s show we will...
Time:
BBC 1
Linked timer recordings with external
equipment
BBC 2
10 Channel 4
31 Channel 5
45
70
2
Category
Prog. Type
+24 Hr
SELECT
Page
info
RETURN
Guide Change Display Mode
Page
You can set the Timer Recordings on Digital
STB/Satellite Receiver when it is connected to this
unit with SCART cable.
• EXT LINK (➔ 31)
Direct Navigator Grouped Titles screen
Two or more titles recorded in the Daily/weekly or
series timer recording mode are bundled and
displayed as one item.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
HDD
10/10
Chantal Show
Grouped Titles
VIDEO
11/10
Dolphines
PICTURE
MUSIC
OK
RETURN
OPTION
Page 02/02
Select
• Guide Link (➔ 22)
• Series recording (➔ 34)
• Split recording (➔ 22)
2
Grouped title
Previous
Freeview Playback functions
Next
Previous
Next
Pause the TV programme you are
watching
• Pause Live TV (➔ 49)
High Quality Picture
HDMI™ (V.1.3 with Deep Colour)
• Connection with HDMI terminal (➔ 12)
• Deep Colour (➔ 104)
Digital Switchover
Starting in late 2007 and ending in 2012, TV services in the UK will go completely digital, TV region by
TV region. If you are missing any channels, it may be that they are not available in your area, or that your
aerial needs upgrading.
If you have any questions, please call Digital UK on 08456 50 50 50 or visit www.digitaluk.co.uk
Digital Switchover will cover a period of several weeks. When it starts some Digital TV programmes will
be missing.
You will need to retune your DVD Recorder each time this happens to recover your digital programmes.
2
To retune your DVD Recorder ➔ “Auto-Setup Restart” in the Setup menu (➔ 79)
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 2
2008/04/23 18:59:07
Accessories
Please check and identify the supplied accessories. Use numbers indicated in parentheses when asking for replacement parts.
(Product numbers correct as of April 2008. These may be subject to change.)
1
Remote control (N2QAYB000130)
2
RF coaxial cables (black)
(K1TWACC00001)
2
Batteries for remote control
(R6 Size)
1
RF coaxial cable (grey)
(K1TWACA00001)
1
Audio/video cable (➔ 87)
(K2KA2BA00003)
Sales and Support Information
Customer Care Centre
• For customers within the UK: 0844 844 3852
• For customers within the Republic of Ireland: 01 289 8333
• Visit our website for product information
• E-mail: [email protected]
Direct Sales at Panasonic UK
• For customers: 0844 844 3856
• Order accessory and consumable items for your product with ease
and confidence by phoning our Customer Care Centre MondayThursday 9:00am-5:30pm, Friday 9:30am- 5:30pm (Excluding
public holidays).
1 AC mains lead (K2CT2YY00003)
• For use with this unit only. Do not use it with
other equipment. Also, do not use cords for
other equipment with this unit.
• Or go on line through our Internet Accessory ordering application
at www.panasonic.co.uk.
• Most major credit and debit cards accepted.
• All enquiries transactions and distribution facilities are provided
directly by Panasonic UK Ltd.
• It couldn’t be simpler!
• Also available through our Internet is direct shopping for a wide
range of finished products, take a browse on our website for
further details.
Interested in purchasing an extended guarantee?
Please call 0870 240 6284 or visit our website
www.panasonic.co.uk/guarantee.
Caution for AC Mains Lead
For your safety, please read the following text carefully.
This appliance is supplied with a moulded three pin mains plug for
your safety and convenience.
A 5-ampere fuse is fitted in this plug.
Should the fuse need to be replaced please ensure that the
replacement fuse has a rating of 5-ampere and that it is approved by
ASTA or BSI to BS1362.
Check for the ASTA mark
fuse.
or the BSI mark
on the body of the
If the plug contains a removable fuse cover you must ensure that it is
refitted when the fuse is replaced.
If you lose the fuse cover the plug must not be used until a
replacement cover is obtained.
A replacement fuse cover can be purchased from your local dealer.
CAUTION!
IF THE FITTED MOULDED PLUG IS UNSUITABLE FOR THE
SOCKET OUTLET IN YOUR HOME THEN THE FUSE SHOULD
BE REMOVED AND THE PLUG CUT OFF AND DISPOSED OF
SAFELY.
THERE IS A DANGER OF SEVERE ELECTRICAL SHOCK IF THE
CUT OFF PLUG IS INSERTED INTO ANY 13-AMPERE SOCKET.
WARNING: DO NOT CONNECT EITHER WIRE TO THE
EARTH TERMINAL WHICH IS MARKED WITH THE
LETTER E, BY THE EARTH SYMBOL
OR COLOURED GREEN
OR GREEN/YELLOW.
THIS PLUG IS NOT WATERPROOF—KEEP DRY.
Before use
Remove the connector cover.
How to replace the fuse
The location of the fuse differ according to the type of AC mains plug
(figures A and B). Confirm the AC mains plug fitted and follow the
instructions below.
Illustrations may differ from actual AC mains plug.
1. Open the fuse cover with a screwdriver.
Figure A
Figure B
Fuse cover
If a new plug is to be fitted please observe the wiring code as stated
below.
If in any doubt please consult a qualified electrician.
IMPORTANT
The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the
following code:
Blue: Neutral, Brown: Live.
As these colours may not correspond with the coloured markings
identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows:
The wire which is coloured Blue must be connected to the terminal
which is marked with the letter N or coloured Black or Blue.
The wire which is coloured Brown must be connected to the terminal
which is marked with the letter L or coloured Brown or Red.
2. Replace the fuse and close or attach the fuse cover.
Figure A
Figure B
Fuse
(5 ampere)
Fuse
(5 ampere)
3
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 3
2008/04/23 18:59:08
Safety Precautions
Placement
Set the unit up on an even surface away from direct sunlight,
high temperatures, high humidity, and excessive vibration. These
conditions can damage the cabinet and other components, thereby
shortening the unit’s service life.
Do not place heavy items on the unit.
Voltage
Do not use high voltage power sources. This can overload the unit
and cause a fire.
Do not use a DC power source. Check the source carefully when
setting the unit up on a ship or other place where DC is used.
AC mains lead protection
Ensure the AC mains lead is connected correctly and not damaged.
Poor connection and lead damage can cause fire or electric shock.
Do not pull, bend, or place heavy items on the lead.
Grasp the plug firmly when unplugging the lead. Pulling the AC
mains lead can cause electric shock.
Do not handle the plug with wet hands. This can cause electric
shock.
Foreign matter
Do not let metal objects fall inside the unit. This can cause electric
shock or malfunction.
Do not let liquids get into the unit. This can cause electric shock or
malfunction. If this occurs, immediately disconnect the unit from the
AC mains supply and contact your dealer.
Do not spray insecticides onto or into the unit. They contain
flammable gases which can ignite if sprayed into the unit.
Service
Do not attempt to repair this unit by yourself. If sound is interrupted,
indicators fail to light, smoke appears, or any other problem that is
not covered in these instructions occurs, disconnect the AC mains
lead and contact your dealer or an authorized service centre.
Electric shock or damage to the unit can occur if the unit is repaired,
disassembled or reconstructed by unqualified persons.
Extend operating life by disconnecting the unit from the AC mains if
it is not to be used for a long time.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.
“DTS” is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc. and “DTS 2.0+Digital
Out” is a trademark of DTS, Inc.
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is
protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights.
Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by
Macrovision, and is intended for home and other limited viewing
uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse
engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
• SDHC logo is a trademark.
• Portions of this product are protected under copyright law and are
provided under license by ARIS/SOLANA/4C.
Official DivX® Certified product.
Plays all versions of DivX® video (including DivX®6) with standard
playback of DivX® media files.
DivX, DivX Certified, and associated logos are trademarks of DivX,
Inc. and are used under license.
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are
trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
HDAVI Control™ is a trademark of Matsushita Electric Industrial
Co., Ltd.
4
Table of Contents
Getting Started
Features .................................................................................2
Accessories ............................................................................3
Sales and Support Information ...............................................3
Caution for AC Mains Lead.....................................................3
Safety Precautions .................................................................4
HDD (Hard disk drive) Handling Care/Disc and Card Care ....6
Remote Control Information/Unit Care ...................................7
Quick Start Guide
Location of Parts/Controls.................................... 8
Remote Control ............................................... 8
The Unit’s Display ........................................... 9
Main Unit ......................................................... 9
Rear Panel ...................................................... 9
Basic Connection ............................................... 10
Connecting to a Television only .................... 10
Adding a Satellite Receiver: Connecting to
a Television and a Satellite Receiver ............ 11
Connecting to a TV with an HDMI (High
Definition Multimedia Interface) Cable .......... 12
Setting the Channels and Clock......................... 13
HDD and Disc Handling........................................................15
Usable Discs for Recording and Playback .................................15
Play-only Discs ...........................................................................16
Discs that Cannot be Played ......................................................16
Types of disc for the type of connected TV.................................16
USB Memory and Card Handling .........................................17
DivX files, MP3s and Still Pictures (JPEG) ...........................18
Basic Operations
Watching Television ..............................................................19
Watching Satellite Programmes .................................................19
Playback ...............................................................................20
Playing Discs ..............................................................................20
Playing a Video Cassette ...........................................................20
Recording Television Programmes .......................................21
Timer Recording ...................................................................22
Copying Titles (One Touch Copy) .........................................23
Copying Titles and Playlists (HDD ➔ DVD or VHS) ...................23
Copying Titles (VHS ➔ HDD or DVD) ........................................24
Copying Titles or Playlists (DVD ➔ HDD or VHS) ......................25
Deleting Titles .......................................................................26
Delete Navigator ........................................................................26
Delete Titles During Playback ....................................................26
Advanced Features
Important Notes for Recording ............................................27
Advanced Recording ............................................................28
Recording Modes and Durations (HDD, DVD) ...........................28
Recording Modes and Durations (VHS) .....................................28
When the format confirmation screen is displayed.....................29
When removing a Recorded Disc ..............................................29
Specifying the Recording Time ..................................................29
Direct TV Recording ...................................................................29
Flexible Recording......................................................................30
Playing while you are recording .................................................30
Recording from a Satellite Receiver .....................................31
Manual Recording ......................................................................31
Linked timer recordings with external equipment
(SKY Digital STB/satellite receiver)–EXT LINK.......................31
Recording from an External Device ......................................32
Recording from a VCR, etc.........................................................32
Recording from a DV Camcorder ...............................................33
Advanced Timer Recording ..................................................34
Manual timer recordings.............................................................34
Series recording .........................................................................34
To cancel a timer recording in progress .....................................35
Check, Change, Delete Programmes, or Resolve Overlapping ......35
To deactivate timer programme
(e.g. to interrupt a daily or weekly timer programming) ...........36
Relief Recording.........................................................................36
Auto Renewal Recording............................................................36
Making timer recordings on the television ..................................37
Notes on timer recording ............................................................37
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 4
2008/04/23 18:59:09
Advanced Video Cassette Playback .....................................46
Fast-forward/Rewind ..................................................................46
Slow-motion Play........................................................................46
Cue/Review ................................................................................46
Jet Search ..................................................................................46
Jet Rewind .................................................................................46
VHS Index Search System (VISS) .............................................46
S-VHS Quasi Playback (SQPB) .................................................46
Repeat Playback ........................................................................46
Adjusting the Playback Picture ...................................................47
Changing Audio during Playback ...............................................47
On-screen Display Indicators .....................................................47
Playing music .......................................................................48
To play music CD .......................................................................48
To play music recorded on HDD.................................................48
Useful functions during music play .............................................48
Convenient Functions ...........................................................49
FUNCTION MENU Windows......................................................49
To pause the TV programme you are watching
—Pause Live TV ......................................................................49
Linked Operations with the TV
(VIERA Link “HDAVI Control™”/Q Link)........................50
Easy control only with VIERA remote control ........................51
Information Messages ..........................................................52
Entering Text .........................................................................53
Advanced Editing
Titles—Editing ......................................................................54
Accessing the Title View.............................................................54
Title Operations ..........................................................................54
Chapters—Creating, Editing .................................................56
Accessing the Chapter View ......................................................56
Chapter Operations ....................................................................56
Creating, Editing and Playing Playlists .................................57
Accessing the Playlist View ........................................................57
Creating Playlists .......................................................................57
Editing Playlists/Chapters ..........................................................57
Still Pictures and Music—Editing ..........................................59
Accessing the Album (still picture)/Picture View.........................59
Album (still picture)/Picture Operations ......................................59
Accessing the Album (CD)/Group (CD)/Track View ...................61
Album (CD)/Group (MP3)/Track (CD/MP3) Operation ...............61
Deleting still pictures and music using Delete Navigator............61
Copying titles or playlists ..................................................62
Copy ......................................................................................65
Copying using the copying list—Advanced Copy ..................66
Copying a finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW
(DVD-Video format), +R and +R DL ......................................67
Copying a video cassette.......................................................68
Copying SD Video from an SD card ......................................69
Copying SD Video from a video equipment ...........................69
Copying Still Pictures ............................................................70
Copying all the still pictures on the USB memory—Copy All Pictures ..70
Copying new still pictures on the SD card—Copy New Pictures ...70
Copying using the copying list ....................................................70
Copying music to HDD .........................................................72
P8 – 14
Quick Start Guide
Accessing the Management Menus ...........................................76
Setup Menu ..........................................................................78
Accessing the Setup Menu ........................................................78
Channel Settings ..................................................................78
Playback/Recording Settings ................................................80
Picture and Sound Settings ..................................................81
Display, Connection and VHS Settings .................................82
System Settings....................................................................84
Other Settings
Other Settings.......................................................................85
Child Lock ..................................................................................85
Using the Unit’s Remote Control to Operate the TV...................85
Basic Operations
Playing DivX video contents .......................................................42
Playing MP3 ...............................................................................43
Playing still pictures ....................................................................44
Accessing the On-Screen Display ..............................................74
HDD, DVD and Card Management .......................................76
Reference
Additional Connections .........................................................86
Adding a VCR: Connecting to a Television and a Video Cassette Recorder ...86
Using an Audio/Video Cable ......................................................87
Using an S Video Cable .............................................................87
Using Component Video Cables ................................................87
Using an Audio Cable for Better Sound .....................................88
Using an Optical Digital Audio Cable for Better Sound ..............88
Connecting with an HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) Terminal ...88
Advanced Features
Playing DivX, MP3 and Still Pictures (JPEG) .......................42
Setting On-Screen Display ...................................................74
Media (Disc/SD Card/USB Memory) and Video Cassette Handling ....89
Inserting Discs ...........................................................................89
Inserting/Removing the SD Card ...............................................89
Inserting/Removing the USB memory........................................89
Inserting a video cassette ..........................................................89
Video Cassette Information ........................................................89
Frequently Asked Questions ............................................90
Advanced Editing
Menu Screens on the TV............................................................40
Selecting Titles to Play ...............................................................40
Search ........................................................................................41
Skip ............................................................................................41
Quick View (Play x1.3) ...............................................................41
Direct Play ..................................................................................41
Slow-motion Play........................................................................41
Frame-by-Frame Viewing ...........................................................42
Time Slip ....................................................................................42
Manual Skip ...............................................................................42
Create Chapters .........................................................................42
Setup ..........................................................................................90
Discs ..........................................................................................90
Recording ...................................................................................91
GUIDE Plus+ ..............................................................................91
DVB-T.........................................................................................91
USB ............................................................................................91
Music ..........................................................................................91
Messages .............................................................................92
On the Unit’s Display ..................................................................92
On the TV ...................................................................................93
Setting Menus
Advanced HDD and Disc Playback ......................................40
Setting Menus
Troubleshooting Guide .....................................................94
When Other Panasonic Products Respond to this Remote Control .....94
To reset this unit .........................................................................94
General Issues: Power ...............................................................95
General Issues: Displays ............................................................95
General Issues: Operation .........................................................96
General Issues: GUIDE Plus+ ....................................................96
General Issues: DVB-T ...............................................................97
General Issues: VIERA Link .......................................................97
General Issues: USB ..................................................................98
Playback Issues: Picture ............................................................98
Playback Issues: Sound .............................................................99
Playback Issues: Operation ........................................................99
Playback Issues: VHS Picture ..................................................100
Playback Issues: VHS Sound ...................................................100
Playback Issues: VHS Play ......................................................100
Recording Issues: Recording/Timer Recording/Copying/External input ...100
Recording Issues: VHS Recording ...........................................102
Recording Issues: Music ..........................................................102
Editing Issues: HDD, DVD & SD ...............................................103
Editing Issues: Still Pictures .....................................................103
Glossary .............................................................................104
Specifications .....................................................................106
Index ....................................................................... Back cover
About descriptions in these operating instructions
• Pages to be referred to are indicated as “➔
”.
Other Settings
Using the GUIDE Plus+ list....................................................38
View advertisement ...............................................................38
Selecting the programme from the desired programme
type or category .....................................................................39
If the “Overlapped Timer Recording” screen appears ............39
About the Gracenote® Database ................................................72
Copying music from a music CD ................................................72
Copying music (MP3) from a USB memory or CD-R/CD-RW ....72
To update Gracenote® Database ................................................73
Reference
GUIDE Plus+ system .......................................................38
5
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 5
2008/04/23 18:59:10
HDD (Hard disk drive) Handling Care/Disc and Card Care
HDD handling care
The HDD is a high precision recording instrument and because of its long recording capability and high speed operation it is a very special
device that is easily susceptible to damage.
As a basic rule, save important content to a disc as backup.
■ The HDD is a device that is not built to withstand vibration/shock or dust
Depending on the setup environment and handling of the HDD some content may become damaged and play and recording may no longer be
possible. Especially during operation, do not subject the unit to any vibration, shock, or remove the AC mains lead from the household mains
socket. In the event of a power failure during recording or play, the content may be damaged.
■ The HDD is a temporary storage device
The HDD is not an everlasting storage device for recorded content. Use the HDD as a temporary storage place for one-off viewing, editing, or
copying. It is recommended to save the recorded content on a disc or to keep the original data or CDs that they were copied from.
■ Immediately save (backup) all content as soon as you feel there may be a problem with the HDD
If there is an irregularity within the HDD, repetitive strange sounds or problems with picture (block noise, etc.) may result. Using the HDD in this
condition may worsen the problem and in the worst case the HDD may no longer be usable. As soon as you notice this type of problem, copy all
content to disc and request service. Recorded content (data) on an HDD that has become unusable is unrecoverable.
When the unit is turned on or off, there may be an unexpected sound. This does not indicate a problem with this unit.
■ Setup precautions
Do not place in an enclosed area where the rear cooling fan
and the cooling vents on the side are covered up.
Place the unit on a surface that is flat and not subject to
vibration or impact.
Do not place on anything that generates
heat like a video cassette recorder, etc.
DO NOT
Do not place in an area often subject to
temperature changes.
Place in an area where condensation does
This unit
not occur. Condensation is a phenomenon
VCR
where moisture forms on a cold surface
when there is an extreme change in
temperature. Condensation may cause
internal damage to the unit.
Conditions where condensation may occur
– When there is an extreme change in temperature (moving from a
very hot location to a very cold location, or vice versa, or when
subjected to an air conditioner or when cooled air directly impacts
the unit). When the HDD (warms during operation) is subjected to
cold air, condensation may form on the inside of the HDD and
may cause damage to the HDD heads, etc.
– When there is high humidity or a lot of steam in the room.
– During the rainy season.
In the above situation, without turning the unit on, let the unit
adjust to the room temperature and wait 2–3 hours until
condensation is gone.
■ Cigarette smoke etc. causes malfunction or
breakdown
The unit may breakdown if cigarette smoke or bug spray/vapor, etc.
gets inside the unit.
■ While operating
Do not move the unit or subject to vibration or impact. (The HDD
may become damaged.)
Do not remove the AC mains lead from the household mains
socket, or flip the power breaker switch.
While the unit is on, the HDD is rotating at high speed. Sound or
movement due to rotation is normal.
■ When moving the unit
1 Turn the unit off. (Wait until “BYE” disappears from the display.)
2 Remove the AC mains lead from the household mains socket.
3 Move only after the unit has come to a complete stop (approx. 2
minutes) in order to avoid subjecting to vibration and shock.
(Even after turning the unit off, the HDD continues operating for a
short time.)
■ HDD recording time remaining
This unit records using a VBR (Variable bit rate) data compression system to vary recorded data segments to match video data segments which
may cause differences in the displayed amount of time and space remaining for recording.
If the remaining amount of time is insufficient, delete any unwanted titles to create enough space before you start recording. (Deleting a playlist
will not increase the amount of time.)
■ Indemnity concerning recorded content
Panasonic does not accept any responsibility for damages directly or indirectly due to any type of problems that result in loss of recording or
edited content (data), and does not guarantee any content if recording or editing does not work properly. Likewise, the above also applies in a
case where any type of repair is made to the unit (including any other non-HDD related component).
Disc and Card Care
RAM Use cartridges to protect them from scratches and dirt.
Holding a disc or card
Handle discs by the edges to avoid inadvertently scratching or getting
oil from your fingers on the disc. Do not touch the signal surface of
discs (the shiny side) or the terminal surface (the metal part) of SD
cards.
Cleaning discs or cards
Discs are not indestructible and occasionally dirt or condensation
may appear. Clean by gently wiping with a soft, dry lint-free cloth in a
straight line from the centre of the disc to the edge of the disc.
Return discs and SD cards to their cases when not in use; this helps
to protect against scratches and dirt.
6
Storing discs and cards
• Do not place or store discs and cards in the following locations:
– Direct sunlight
– Very dusty or humid areas
– Near a heat source
– Places that undergo extreme shifts in temperature (condensation
can occur)
– Where static electricity or electromagnetic waves occur
• Keep the Memory Card out of reach of children to prevent swallowing.
Discs to avoid
• Discs that are not perfectly circular in shape
• Warped discs, which may not balance properly in your unit, causing
improper operation or damage to the unit
• Cracked discs
• Discs with exposed adhesive (from removed stickers or labels, such
as may occur with rental discs or improperly cared-for discs that
were previously labeled or re-labeled)
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 6
2008/04/23 18:59:10
Remote Control Information/Unit Care
Remote Control Information
About batteries
• Insert so the poles (4 and 3) match those in the remote control.
• Do not use rechargeable type batteries.
Using the remote control
Aim at the sensor, avoiding obstacles, up to a maximum range of 7 m
directly in front of the unit.
Remote control signal sensor
20
R6/LR6, AA
•
•
•
•
Do not mix old and new batteries.
Do not use different types at the same time.
Do not heat or expose to flame.
Do not leave the batteries in an automobile exposed to direct
sunlight for a long period of time with doors and windows closed.
• Do not take apart or short circuit.
• Do not attempt to recharge alkaline or manganese batteries.
• Do not use batteries if the covering has been peeled off.
30
20
30
Mishandling of batteries can cause electrolyte leakage which can
damage items the fluid contacts and may cause a fire.
Remove if the remote control is not going to be used for a long period
of time. Store in a cool, dark place.
Unit Care
The precision parts in this unit are readily affected by the
environment, especially temperature, humidity, and dust.
Cigarette smoke also can cause malfunction or breakdown.
• Do not place the unit on amplifiers
DO NOT
or equipment that may become hot.
The heat can damage the unit.
• The unit should not be installed
or operated near large magnets
or electromagnetic devices. Such
devices can damage pre-recorded
VHS recordings.
• Do not place any heavy objects on top of the unit.
• The unit should not be mounted in a vertical position. It’s designed
to operate in the horizontal position.
• Before moving the unit, ensure the disc tray and cassette
compartment are empty.
Failure to do so will risk severely damaging the disc and the unit.
Select a position with good ventilation when installing the unit. Do
not block the cooling fan on the rear of the unit.
Cautions about condensation
Condensation can cause unreliable playback of VHS recordings.
Condensation may form in the following cases,
Maintenance
To clean this unit
Wipe with a soft, dry cloth.
• Never use alcohol, paint thinner or benzine to clean this unit.
• Before using chemically treated cloth, carefully read the instructions
that came with the cloth.
To clean the DVD lens
Dust and dirt may adhere to the unit’s lens over time, making it
impossible to record or play discs.
Use the DVD lens cleaner about once every year, depending on
frequency of use and the operating environment. Carefully read the
lens cleaner’s instructions before use.
DVD lens cleaner: RP-CL720E
To clean the video heads
Dirt on the video heads can cause poor recording and play.
If the picture does not improve, use an optional head-cleaning cassette.
If the problem persists, seek advice from a qualified service person.
Head-cleaning cassette: NV-TCL30PT
Some optional accessories may not be available in some countries.
• The unit is brought from cold surroundings into a well-heated room.
• The unit is suddenly brought from cool surroundings, such as an
air-conditioned room or car, to a place which is hot and humid.
• During rainy seasons.
In any of the above-mentioned conditions, do not operate the unit for
at least 2 hours. The unit is not equipped with a moisture sensor.
The manufacturer accepts no responsibility and offers no compensation for loss of recorded or edited
material due to a problem with the unit or recordable media, and accepts no responsibility and offers no
compensation for any subsequent damage caused by such loss.
Examples of causes of such losses are
• A disc recorded and edited with this unit is played in a DVD Recorder or computer disc drive manufactured by another company.
• A disc used as described above and then played again in this unit.
• A disc recorded and edited with a DVD Recorder or computer disc drive manufactured by another company is played in this unit.
7
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 7
2008/04/23 18:59:11
Location of Parts/Controls
Remote Control
bn
1
bo
bk
bl
Recording function
4
5
6
2
bp
3
4
Turn the unit on or off.............................................. (➔ 13)
Select drive [HDD, DVD, SD or VHS].......... (➔ 20, 21, 44)
Select channels and title numbers etc./
Enter numbers ........................................................ (➔ 13)
To delete unwanted recorded titles, still pictures
or music/Reset the tape counter ................. (➔ 26, 47, 61)
Basic operations for recording and play
Show the digital channel information/
Programme information within GUIDE Plus+ screen/
Show status messages...................(➔ 38, 45, 47, 52, 53)
DIRECT NAVIGATOR....................................... (➔ 40, 42)
Selection/OK, Frame-by-frame ......................... (➔ 13, 42)
Show OPTION menu ............................ (➔ 40, 45, 54, 56)
This menu is used when playing or editing titles and still
pictures, etc.
Use Colour buttons according to on-screen instructions.
1
2
3
bq
br
bs
7
8
9
5
6
bt
ck
7
cl
bm
cm
bn
bo
bp
8
9
bk
bl
bm
cn
co
cp
bq
br
bs
bt
ck
cl
cm
cn
co
cp
– for switching the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen
– for switching Video/Playlists
– for GUIDE Plus+ operations
– disactivating timer programme
– for selecting programme category
– for editing profiles
[ REC]: Start recording ............................................................... (➔ 21)
[REC MODE]: Change recording mode ........................................ (➔ 21)
[EXT LINK]: Linked timer recordings with external equipment ..... (➔ 31)
[ DIRECT TV REC]: Direct TV recording .................................... (➔ 29)
DVB function
[TEXT
[STTL
]: Show Digital TEXT (MHEG) service ........................... (➔ 52)
]: Show subtitles ............................................................. (➔ 52)
Transmission window
TV operations ......................................................... (➔ 85)
Channel select/Change pages in the
GUIDE Plus+ list/TRACKING/V-LOCK....... (➔ 21, 38, 47)
Show timer recording list ........................................ (➔ 34)
Input select (Tuner, AV1, AV2, AV3, DV) .... (➔ 19, 31, 32)
Skip approx. 1 minute forward ................................ (➔ 42)
Exit the menu screen
Show the GUIDE Plus+ screen .................. (➔ 19, 22, 38)
Show FUNCTION MENU window .......................... (➔ 49)
By using the FUNCTION MENU window you may
access the main functions (Playback, Recording, etc.)
quickly and easily.
Return to previous screen
Create chapters ...................................................... (➔ 42)
Skip the specified time/Jet rewind button
(JET REW)........................................................ (➔ 42, 46)
Show menu for disc playback etc./
Change DVB multi audio ...................................................(➔ 74)
8
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 8
2008/04/23 18:59:11
The Unit’s Display
3
4 5
7 8 (for VHS)
1
2
3
4
6 1 (for HDD/DVD)
Quick Start Guide STEP 1
(for VHS) 2
1
8(for HDD/DVD) 9 bk
Timer recording indicator (z) ................... (➔ 22)
Digital broadcast indicator
5
On:
When a timer recording programme is registered and a
recordable disc or video cassette is inserted.
Flashes:
When the unit cannot record a timer recording programme (e.g.,
there is no disc or video cassette, etc.).
Lights when the unit is receiving digital broadcast or GUIDE
Plus+ data.
Linked timer recordings with external
equipment indicator .................................. (➔ 31)
Tape indicator
Operation status
Disc indicator
SD card slot indicator
6
7
8
9
bk
Recording mode indicator ........................ (➔ 21)
Main display
Copying indicator
Main Unit
Remote control
signal sensor
1
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
7
Cassette
compartment
2
3 4 5
HDD
DVD
SD
VHS
8
The unit’s display
Disc tray
Opening the front panel
Press down on the
part
with your finger.
9
bk bl bm
Cassette eject button ....................................(➔ 89)
Disc tray open/close button ....................(➔ 20, 89)
Start recording button ...................................(➔ 21)
Stop button .............................................(➔ 20, 21)
Play/✕1.3 button ...........................................(➔ 20)
Standby/on switch (^/I) .............................(➔ 13)
Press to switch the unit from on to standby mode
or vice versa. In standby mode, the unit is still
consuming a small amount of power.
AV3 input terminals.......................................(➔ 32)
bn
bo
8
HDD/DVD/SD/VHS drive indicator ...............(➔ 20)
9
DRIVE SELECT button ................... (➔ 20, 21, 44)
bk
bl
Channel Select button ..................................(➔ 21)
DV IN terminal
(for a digital video camcorder) .....................(➔ 33)
SD card slot ..................................................(➔ 89)
USB port .......................................................(➔ 89)
One Touch Copying operation button ...(➔ 23 to 25)
bm
bn
bo
• Lights when the HDD, DVD, SD or VHS drive is selected.
• Drive changes each time you press [DRIVE SELECT].
Rear Panel
DMR-EX98VEBK
SER NO.
PR 0 0 0 0 01010
AV OUT
Y
RF
IN
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
PB
PR
S VIDEO
RF
OUT
OPTICAL
AC IN
1
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
2
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
OUT
AV 2 (EXT)
3 4 5 6 7 89
1
AC IN~ = Power supply
2
3
Cooling fan
HDMI AV OUT terminal .....................(➔ 12, 88)
4
5
Digital audio output terminal ....................(➔ 88)
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT (PROGRESSIVE/
INTERLACE) terminals ...........................(➔ 87)
Connection for the AC mains lead
Digital audio and video output terminal
Y = Luminance signal (brightness), PB = Chrominance signal
(colour difference), PR = Chrominance signal (colour difference)
For information about the 21-pin Scart terminal (➔ 10)
AV 1 (TV)
bk
bl
bm bn
6
7
8
9
bk
AUDIO output terminals ....................(➔ 87, 88)
VIDEO output terminal ............................(➔ 87)
S VIDEO output terminal .........................(➔ 87)
Serial number
AV2 (EXT) 21-pin Scart terminal .......(➔ 11, 86)
bl
AV1 (TV) 21-pin Scart terminal ...(➔ 10, 11, 86)
bm
bn
Aerial output terminal ..................(➔ 10, 11, 86)
Aerial input terminal ....................(➔ 10, 11, 86)
Connection of an external unit
TV set connection
9
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 9
2008/04/23 18:59:12
Basic Connection
Use of the RF coaxial cable
To prevent interference patterns from appearing on your TV, use only the supplied RF coaxial cables when you
connect this unit to your TV and aerial outlet or aerial cable.
• Keep the RF coaxial cables as far away as possible from other cables.
• Do not roll up the RF coaxial cables.
Before connection, turn off the mains for all connected equipment and read the appropriate operating instructions.
Be sure to read the Caution for AC Mains Lead on page 3.
Connecting to a Television only
To household
mains socket
AV
RF IN
Rear of TV
Step
Step
4
Step
3
To household
mains socket
2
DMR-EZ98VEBK
DMR-EX98VEBK
PR 0 0 0 0 01010
SER NO.
AV OUT
The RF coaxial cable cannot
be used for showing pictures
from the unit. The unit must
be connected using another
method, e.g. 21-pin Scart
cable to show pictures from
the unit on the television set.
RF
IN
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
Y
PB
PR
S VIDEO
RF
OUT
OPTICAL
AC IN
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
Step
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
OUT
AV 1 (TV)
AV 2 (EXT)
Rear of this unit
4
Use one of the RF coaxial cable (black or grey) to connect this unit’s RF IN terminal to your aerial socket or
aerial cable.
RF coaxial cable (supplied, grey)
To the aerial
To this unit
Step
1
or
RF coaxial cable (supplied, black)
RF
IN
Step
1
Connections other than the 21-pin Scart cable
87–88
RF coaxial cable (supplied) from the aerial socket or aerial cable to the “RF IN” on the unit.
RF coaxial cable (supplied, black) from the “RF OUT” on the unit to the “RF IN” on the TV.
21-pin Scart cable (not supplied) from the “AV1 (TV)” on the unit to the “AV” on the TV.
AC mains lead (supplied) from the “AC IN~” on the unit and the TV to a household mains socket.
After completing the above connections, proceed to the TV Tuning (➔ 13).
21-pin Scart terminal
The 21-pin Scart terminal transmits both input
and output signals for picture and sound.
TVs equipped with the same type of terminal
can be connected here.
This type of terminal is also called Peritel,
Euro Connector and Euro AV.
• When the unit is connected to a
Q Link-compatible TV with a fully wired 21-pin
Scart cable, you can use convenient functions
of Q Link.
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19
21
2
4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
10
V1 Scart terminal (TV)
AV1
1 Audio output CH2 (R)
2 Audio input CH2 (R)
3 Audio output CH1 (L)
4 Audio ground
5 Blue ground
6 Audio input CH1 (L)
7 Blue output
8 Switching voltage output
9 Green ground
10 Q Link control signal
11 Green output
12 Reserved
13 Red ground
14 Blanking ground
15 Red output / chrominance output
16 Blanking output
17 Video output ground
18 Video input ground
19 Video output / luminance output
20 Video input
21 Ground
AV2
V2 Scart terminal (EXT)
1 Audio output CH2 (R)
2 Audio input CH2 (R)
3 Audio output CH1 (L)
4 Audio ground
5 Blue ground
6 Audio input CH1 (L)
7 Blue input
8 Switching voltage input
9 Green ground
10 Reserved
11 Green input
12 Reserved
13 Red ground
14 Blanking ground
15 Red input / chrominance input
16 Blanking input
17 Video output ground
18 Video input ground
19 Video output
20 Video input / luminance input
21 Ground
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 10
2008/04/23 18:59:13
Using a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable
Quick Start Guide STEP 2
– You can use a variety of Q Link functions by connecting the unit to a Q Link compatible television (➔ 50).
– You can enjoy high-quality viewing by connecting the unit to an RGB compatible television.
“AV1 Output” in the Setup menu is set to “RGB 1 (without component)” or “RGB 2 (without component)” (➔ 83).
– “AV2 Input” settings in the Setup menu (➔ 83)
Before connection, turn off the mains for all connected equipment and read the appropriate operating
instructions.
Be sure to read the Caution for AC Mains Lead on page 3.
Adding a Satellite Receiver: Connecting to a Television and a Satellite Receiver
The RF coaxial cable
cannot be used for showing
pictures from the unit. The
unit must be connected
using another method, e.g.
21-pin Scart cable to show
pictures from the unit on
the television set.
To household
mains socket
AV
RF IN
Rear of TV
Step
Step
5
Step
3
To household
mains socket
2
To the aerial
DMR-EZ98VEBK
DMR-EX98VEBK
PR 0 0 0 0 01010
SER NO.
AV OUT
Step
Y
RF
IN
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
PB
PR
1
S VIDEO
RF
OUT
OPTICAL
AC IN
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
Step
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
OUT
AV 1 (TV)
AV 2 (EXT)
Use one of the RF
coaxial cables (black or
grey) to connect this
unit’s RF IN terminal
to your aerial socket or
aerial cable ( 10).
Rear of this unit
5
Step
4
To household
mains socket
AV
Satellite antenna
Step
Rear of satellite receiver
5
Connections other than the 21-pin Scart cable
87–88
RF coaxial cable (supplied) from the aerial socket or aerial cable to the “RF IN” on the unit.
RF coaxial cable (supplied, black) from the “RF OUT” on the unit to the “RF IN” on the TV.
21-pin Scart cable (not supplied) from the “AV1 (TV)” on the unit to the “AV” on the TV.
21-pin Scart cable (not supplied) from the “AV” on the satellite receiver to the “AV2 (EXT)”
on the unit.
AC mains lead (supplied) from the “AC IN~” on the unit, the TV and the satellite receiver to a
household mains socket.
After completing the above connections, proceed to the TV Tuning (➔ 13).
To view satellite programmes
Refer to “Watching Satellite Programmes” (➔ 19).
To record satellite programmes
Refer to “Recording from a Satellite Receiver” (➔ 31).
11
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 11
2008/04/23 18:59:15
Basic Connection
You can enjoy high-quality picture and audio by adding the HDMI cable connection to the 21-pin Scart cable
connection between the unit and your TV on page 10, 11.
Connecting to a TV with an HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) Cable
When connected to an HDMI compatible unit, an uncompressed digital audio and video signal is transmitted,
enabling you to enjoy high quality, digital video and audio with just one cable. When connecting to an HDMIcompatible HDTV (High Definition Television), the output can be switched to 1080p, 1080i or 720p HD video.
• This unit incorporates HDMI™ (V.1.3 with Deep Colour) technology that can reproduce greater colour
gradation (4096 steps) when connected to a compatible TV.
A lower colour gradation (256 steps), without deep colour, will be reproduced if connected to a TV which does not
support deep colour.
The unit will automatically set appropriate output to suit the connected TV.
• Video sources converted to 1920 × 1080 resolution, while of high quality, will exhibit somewhat lower subjective
image resolution than true, native 1080p full-HD sources. See dealer for details.
• Please use High Speed HDMI Cables that have the HDMI logo (as shown on the cover).
• When outputting 1080p signal, please use the HDMI cables 5.0 meters or less.
Regarding VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM” function
When connecting with a Panasonic TV (VIERA) or a receiver equipped with the “HDAVI Control” function, linked
operations would be possible. [➔ 50, Linked Operations with the TV (VIERA Link “HDAVI Control™”/Q Link)]
• This unit incorporates HDMI™ (V.1.3 with Deep Colour) technology.
• It is recommended that you use Panasonic’s HDMI cable.
Recommended part number: RP-CDHG10 (1.0 m), RP-CDHG15 (1.5 m), RP-CDHG20 (2.0 m), RP-CDHG30
(3.0 m), RP-CDHG50 (5.0 m), etc.
• Non-HDMI-compliant cables cannot be utilized.
Connecting with a Panasonic TV
(VIERA)
AV
HDMI IN
If the 21-pin Scart cable is connected,
the following functions are available.
• Direct TV Recording (➔ 29)
• Watching pictures from satellite
receiver (➔ 19)
(In this case, make sure to switch
the television input to “AV”.)
Rear of TV
HDMI cable
(not supplied)
DMR-EZ98VEBK
DMR-EX98VEBK
SER NO.
AV OUT
Y
PR 0 0 0 0 01010
RF
IN
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
PB
PR
S VIDEO
RF
OUT
OPTICAL
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
OUT
AV 1 (TV)
AV 2 (EXT)
Rear of this unit
21-pin Scart cable
(not supplied)
AV
Rear of satellite receiver
• Set “Digital Audio Output” to “HDMI and Optical” (➔ 83). (The default setting is “HDMI and Optical”.)
To enjoy High Quality Video up-converted to 1080p, you need to connect the unit to 1080p compatible HDTV and
set “HDMI Video Format” in the Setup menu to “1080p” (➔ 83).
Notes
12
• If connecting to equipment that is only compatible with 2 channel audio output, audio with 3 channels or more will be downmixed (➔ 104) and output as 2 channels, even if connecting with an HDMI cable (some discs cannot be down-mixed).
• For display units compatible with HDCP (High-Band width Digital Content Protection) that are equipped with a
digital DVI input terminal (PC monitors, etc.):
Depending on the unit, picture may not display properly or at all when connecting with a DVI/HDMI switching cable
(audio cannot be output).
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 12
2008/04/23 18:59:16
Setting the Channels and Clock
Quick Start Guide STEP 3
Preparation:
• Turn on the mains for the television (and connected
equipment) and select the appropriate
AV input to suit the connections to this unit.
• These are the first settings you make upon buying the
unit. You don’t need to make these settings again.
TV’s remote control
DVB Auto-Setup
to turn the unit on.
DVB Auto-Setup starts. The unit will
search for the digital terrestrial channels.
This takes about 5 minutes.
Please wait !
68
Ch 21
Prog. Channel Service Name Net ID TS ID Quality
1
23
BBC ONE
12302 12289 9
2
23
BBC
12302 12289 9
RETURN : to cancel
RETURN
Power Save Function:
e, r to select “On” or “Off”,
then
On
Off
On : Minimise standby power
consumption, without
Quick Start function and
AV2 Loop-through in standby.
Off : With Quick Start
function and AV2 Loop-through
in standby.
SELECT
OK
—
—
– Set to “On” to reduce power
consumption in standby mode.
Power Save
RETURN
– Refer to the following chart for the
Power Save function features when the unit is turned off.
Power Save
Power consumption
Watching the picture from the
satellite receiver connected to
the AV2 input terminal
Startup time
Front display
On
Off
Approx. 2 W
Approx. 22 W
Can not do
Can do
Not quick
Turns off
(The clock display
disappeared.)
Quick
Stays lighted
e.g., Guide Plus+ list is displayed within 1 second after [GUIDE] is pressed while the unit is off.
When setup has completed, the confirmation screen appears.
9
Tips
To cancel Auto-Setup
Press [RETURN].
• If the unit displays “No stations found !”
Press [q] to select “No” and press [OK].
Go to step 2. After you have performed
steps 2-bl, turn off the unit and confirm
the cable or aerial input is connected
to the RF IN terminal. Restart the AutoSetup again (➔ 79).
• If the clock setting menu appears or the
clock is not correct, set the clock manually
(➔ 14).
Restarting the Auto-Setup (➔ 79)
To correct the PIN number
1. Press [w, q] to select the digit.
2. Press the numbered buttons to enter the
digit.
The Owner ID settings screen appears.
q and press the numbered
buttons to enter your choice
of a 4-digit PIN number.
Make a note of the PIN number (don’t
forget), as it is not possible to return to
the factory preset.
Owner ID
PIN number
Name
House No.
RETURN
Postcode
• When this unit is not operated for
approximately 5 minutes while the screen
is being displayed, the screen saver may
be displayed.
You can turn this function off (➔ 82,
“Screen Saver”).
RETURN : leave
to store the PIN number.
(Continued on the next page)
13
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 13
2008/04/23 18:59:17
Setting the Channels and Clock
w to select “Yes”, then
e, r to select “To Others”, then
The cursor moves to “Name”.
e, r to select “Setup”, then
q to enter the name.
e, r to select “Others”, then q.
8 e, r to select a letter, then q to
move to next character.
e, r to select “Clock”, then
Repeat this to enter the name.
to store the name.
9
e, r to select “Off” of “Automatic”,
then
Clock
r and q and then repeat steps
8, 9 to enter and store “House
No.” and “Postcode”.
Automatic Off
Time
Date
15 : 45 : 39
1 /
8 / 2008
Number
0
9
CHANGE
SELECT
Please set clock manually.
OK : store RETURN : leave
OK
RETURN
w, q to select the item you want
to change.
The Owner ID settings screen disappears.
The items change as follows:
• Auto setup for your unit is complete. You can now make your
favourite channels and store them in the required order in the
profiles (➔ 78).
Tips
To correct the character
1. Press [w, q] to select the character.
2. Press [e, r] to correct the character.
To display the Owner ID information on TV
Press and hold [g] on the main unit for more than 5 seconds.
The PIN number is not displayed.
After 30 seconds this menu automatically disappears.
Clock Setting
This unit usually obtains time and date information from
digital broadcasts and automatically corrects the time
several times a day.
However, if the clock is not set correctly, adjust the
clock.
• In the case of a power failure, the clock setting
remains in memory for approximately 60 minutes.
With the unit stopped
Hour
Minute
Second
Day
Month
Year
8 e, r to change the setting.
You can also use the numbered buttons for setting.
to confirm new date and
9
time and to initiate the clock.
Tips
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
Notes
If a TV station transmits a time setting signal, and when “Automatic”
in the Clock setting menu is set to “On”, the automatic time correction
function checks the time and if necessary it is adjusted several times
every day.
14
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 14
2008/04/23 18:59:20
HDD and Disc Handling
Disc type
Logo
Hard disk
drive (HDD)
—
Data that can
be recorded
and played
Video
Still picture
Music
Rewritable
Play on other
players 1
Recording 16:9
aspect picture 2
Copy-once recording
(CPRM) (➔ 27)
—
HDD
Video
Still picture
DVD-R
Video
—
—
-R before finalisation
DVD-V after finalisation
DVD-R DL
Video
—
—
-R DL before finalisation
DVD-V after finalisation
DVD-RW
Video
—
-RW(V) before finalisation
DVD-V after finalisation
[CPRM (➔ 104)
compatible discs
only.]
•
•
•
RAM
+R
—
Video
—
— (4:3 aspect)
—
+R before finalisation
DVD-V after finalisation
+R DL
—
Video
—
— (4:3 aspect)
—
+R DL before finalisation
DVD-V after finalisation
+RW
—
Video
— (4:3 aspect)
—
+RW
• The explanations concerning discs are indicated by DVD , and those concerning video cassettes are indicated by VHS .
•
Standard symbol
DVD-RAM
1 -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL
Finalisation needed for playback on other equipment (➔ 77).
RAM can be played back on Panasonic DVD recorders and DVDRAM compatible DVD players.
-R DL , +R DL or +RW can be played back only on equipment
compatible with these discs.
2 For further information (➔ 27, Important Notes for Recording).
RAM -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW To use a new disc, formatting is
necessary (➔ 76).
+RW If the disc failed to play on other equipment, we recommend
you create top menu (➔ 77).
Use of Panasonic discs is recommended.
For available recording times for different discs under different
recording modes, see “Recording Modes and Durations (HDD, DVD)”
on page 28.
Formatting and/or recording/initializing constraints may prevent you
from playing or recording certain discs.
Quick Start Guide STEP 3
Usable Discs for Recording and Playback
: Can do, −: Cannot do
• Please see specifications (➔ 106) for compatible disc versions and
recording speeds.
Notes
• HDD RAM will show an increase in available space whenever a title
has been erased.
• -RW(V) and +RW discs will only show an increase in available
space when their last title has been erased.
• -R -R DL +R +R DL The discs will show no increase in available
space after deleting titles.
• You may not be able to record depending on the condition of the
discs and you may not be able to play them due to the condition of
the recording.
You cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL and +R DL disc on this unit.
Record to the HDD and then copy to the disc.
When playing DVD-R DL (Dual Layer, single-sided) and +R DL (Double Layer, single-sided)
DVD-R DL (Dual Layer, single-sided) and +R DL
(Double Layer, single-sided) discs have two writable
When switching layers:
layers on one side. If there is not enough space on the
Video and audio may momentarily cut
first layer to record a programme, the remainder is
recorded on the second layer. When playing a title
Second recordable layer
recorded on both layers, the unit automatically
The available
switches between layers and plays the title
(Inner
(Outer
space
in the same way as a normal programme.
section of
section of
First recordable layer
However, video and audio may momentarily
the disc)
the disc)
cut out when the unit is switching layers.
DVD-R DL
Title 1
Title 2
+R DL
Playback direction
g Recording modes and approximate recording times (➔ 28)
15
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 15
2008/04/23 18:59:29
HDD and Disc Handling
Play-only Discs
Disc type
Logo
DVD-Video
Standard
symbol
DVD-V
DVD-RW
(DVD Video
Recording
format)
-RW(VR)
DVD-R
DivX, MP3,
JPEG
DVD-R DL
CD
CD
–
DivX, MP3,
JPEG
Video CD
VCD
SVCD
Uses
High quality movie and music discs
DVD-RW video recorded on another DVD recorder
• You can play programmes that allow “One time only recording” if they
have been recorded onto a CPRM compatible disc.
• By formatting (➔ 76) the disc, you can record onto it in DVD-Video
format.
• It may be necessary to finalise the disc on the equipment used for
recording.
• DVD-R and DVD-R DL with video recorded in DivX (➔ 18)
• DVD-R and DVD-R DL with music recorded in MP3 (➔ 18)
• DVD-R and DVD-R DL with still pictures recorded in JPEG (➔ 18)
• Recorded audio and music (including CD-R/RW )
You can record tracks to this unit’s HDD.
• CD-R and CD-RW with video recorded in DivX (➔ 18)
• CD-R and CD-RW with music recorded in MP3 (➔ 18)
• CD-R and CD-RW with still pictures recorded in JPEG (➔ 18)
• Recorded music and video
(including CD-R/RW )
• Capable of playing discs that conform to IEC62107 only.
Play may be impossible on some DVD-RW (DVD Video Recording format), DVD-R, DVD-R DL, CD-R or CD-RW discs due to the condition of
the recording.
• You can play still pictures (JPEG) and MP3 format data recorded on DVD-R, DVD-R DL or CD-R/RW. You can also play CD-DA, Video CD and
SVCD (conforming to IEC62107) format data recorded on CD-R/RW. Close the session or finalise the disc after recording.
• The producer of the disc can control how discs are played. So you may not always be able to control play as described in these operating
instructions. Read the disc’s instructions carefully.
Discs that Cannot be Played
• 2.6/5.2 GB DVD-RAM, 12 cm
• 3.95/4.7 GB DVD-R for Authoring
• DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL recorded
on another unit and not finalised (➔ 104)
• Discs recorded with AVCHD format
• DVD-Video with a region number other than “2” or
“ALL”
• Blu-ray, HD DVD
• DVD-Audio
• DVD-ROM, +R 8 cm, CD-ROM, CDV, CD-G, Photo
CD, CVD, SACD, MV-Disc, PD
Types of disc for the type of
connected TV
When you use the discs recorded either PAL or NTSC, or playback a
title recorded on HDD using PAL or NTSC, refer to this table.
( : Possible to view, −: Impossible to view)
TV type
Multi-system TV
PAL TV
NTSC TV
Disc/Titles
recorded on HDD
PAL
NTSC
PAL
NTSC
PAL
NTSC
Yes/No
1
(PAL60)
−
2
1
If your television is not equipped to handle PAL 525/60 signals the
picture will not be shown correctly.
2 Select “NTSC” in “TV System” (➔ 82).
• When playing back a title recorded on the HDD, ensure that you
match the “TV System” setting to the title (PAL or NTSC) (➔ 82).
16
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 16
2008/04/23 18:59:30
USB Memory and Card Handling
USB memories you can use on this unit
Compatible USB memories
USB memories which are defined as USB mass storage class, and digital cameras that use PTP
protocol:
– USB memories that support USB 1.0/1.1 and USB 2.0 Full Speed/High Speed.
• USB memories of up to 128 GB can be used.
• USB memories that support bulk only transfer.
CBI (Control/Bulk/Interrupt) is not supported.
• Digital Cameras which require additional programme installation when connected to a PC are not
supported.
• MTP (Media Transport Protocol) device is not supported.
• A multi-port USB card reader is not supported.
FAT16 and FAT32 file systems are supported.
• UDF/NTFS/exFAT file system is not supported.
• Depending on the sector size, some files may not work.
• Only the first partition on USB memories with multi-partition is supported.
Format
Standard symbol
USB
Data that can be recorded and played
File format
(
DivX
MP3
: Possible, —: Impossible)
Still pictures (JPEG)
Playing
Copying to HDD
Instructions
—
You can play DivX files recorded
with a computer onto the USB
memory (➔ 42).
You can play and copy to HDD
MP3 files recorded with a
computer onto the USB memory
(➔ 43, 72).
You can play and copy to HDD or
DVD-RAM still pictures recorded
with a computer onto the USB
memory (➔ 44, 70).
• Despite meeting the conditions mentioned above, there may be USB memories that cannot be used for this unit.
• If a Panasonic digital video camera with HDD is connected to this unit’s USB port, you can copy the SD Video shot with the camera to this
unit’s HDD or DVD-RAM.
• This unit’s USB port does not support bus-powered USB device.
Cards Usable on this Unit
Type
Standard symbol
Data that can be
recorded and played
Instructions
• SD Memory Card, (from 8 MB to 2 GB)
• SDHC Memory Card (from 4 GB to 16 GB)
• MultiMediaCard
Including miniSD Card and microSD Card
The card types mentioned above will be referred to as “SD card” in these operating instructions.
SD
Still pictures
Video (SD Video)
You can insert directly into the SD card slot.
A miniSD Card and a microSD Card must be used with the adaptor that comes with the card.
• You can play and copy still pictures taken on a digital camera, etc. (➔ 44, 70)
• SD Video shot with a Panasonic SD Video camera, etc. can be copied to the HDD or DVD-RAM (➔ 69).
• SD Video cannot be played directly from the SD card.
Suitable SD cards
• When using SD cards 4 GB or larger, only SD cards that display the SDHC logo
can be used.
• Usable memory is slightly less than the card capacity.
• Please confirm the latest information on the following website.
http://panasonic.co.jp/pavc/global/cs (This site is in English only.)
• If the SD card is formatted on other equipment, the time necessary for recording
may be longer. Also, if the SD card is formatted on a PC, you may not be able to
use it on this unit. In these cases, format the card on this unit (➔ 76, 104).
• This unit is compatible with SD Memory Cards that meet SD Card Specifications
FAT12 and FAT16 formats, as well as SDHC Memory Cards in FAT32 format.
• SDHC Memory Cards used for recording with this unit can only be used with other
SDHC Memory Card-compatible equipment. SDHC Memory Cards cannot be used
with equipment that is only compatible with SD Memory Cards.
• This unit cannot play AVCHD format motion pictures on an SD card.
• We recommend using a Panasonic SD card.
• Keep the Memory Card out of reach of children to prevent swallowing.
Structure of folders
: Numbers
XXX: Letters
Card
DCIM
XXXXX
(Picture folder)
XXXX.JPG
001
Any folder with JPEG files
P0000001.JPG
These folders
are shown
earlier in the
Album View
screen than
other still picture
folders.
SD_VIDEO
PRG
(MPEG2 folder)
MOV.MOD
MOV.MOI
PRG.PGI
MGR_INFO
(MPEG2 information folder)
17
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 17
2008/04/23 19:10:30
DivX files, MP3s and Still Pictures (JPEG)
DivX File Information
Playable media
File format
-R -R DL CD USB
DivX
Files must have the extension
“.DIVX”, “.divx”, “.AVI” or “.avi”.
Number of folders Maximum number of folders recognizable: 300
folders (including the root folder)
Number of files
Maximum number of files recognizable 1 : 200
files
Support version Plays all versions of DivX video (including DivX
6) with standard playback of DivX media files.
Certified to the DivX Home Theater Profile.
Video
– Number of stream: Up to 1
– Codec: DIV3, DIV4, DIVX, DV50
– Picture size: 32 x 32 to 720 x 576
– FPS (Frame Per Second): Up to 30 fps
Audio
– Number of stream: Up to 8
– Format: MP3, MPEG, AC3
– Multi channel: AC3 is possible. MPEG multi is
2 ch conversion.
MP3 File Information
Playable media
File format
Notes
HDD RAM SD
• Compatible formats: DCF compliant (Content recorded on a
digital camera, etc.)
Design rule for Camera File system: unified standard established
by Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries
Association (JEITA)
-R -R DL CD
• Compatible formats: ISO9660 level 1 or 2 (except for extended
formats) and Joliet
• This unit is compatible with multi-session; however, reading or
play of the disc may take time if there are a lot of sessions.
• Operation may take time to complete when there are many files
(tracks) and/or folders (groups); some files (tracks) may not
display or be playable.
• Images recorded at a very high resolution may take a long time to
display.
• English alphabetical characters and Arabic numerals are
displayed correctly. Other characters may not display correctly.
• The display order on this unit may differ from how the order is
displayed on a computer.
• Depending on how you create the disc (writing software), files
(tracks) and folders (groups) may not play in the order you number
them.
• This unit is not compatible with packet-write format.
• Depending on the recording conditions, the disc may not play.
HDD -R -R DL CD USB
MP3
Files must have the extension “.mp3” or “.MP3”.
Number of folders Maximum number of folders (groups)
(groups)
recognizable:
300 folders (groups) (including the root folder)
Number of files
Maximum number of files (tracks)
(tracks)
recognizable 1:
3000 files (tracks)
Bit rates
32 kbps to 320 kbps
Sampling
16 kHz/22.05 kHz/24 kHz/
frequency
32 kHz/44.1 kHz/48 kHz
ID3 tags
compatible ( HDD USB )
Tips
You can play MP3s and still pictures (JPEG) on this unit by making
folders as shown below. However depending on the method of
writing data (writing software), play may not be in the order you
number the folders.
Structure of MP3 folders
Root
-R -R DL CD USB
001
Prefix with 3-digit numbers in the
order you want to play them.
001 Group
001track.mp3
002track.mp3
003track.mp3
Order of play
002 Group
003 Group
• If there is a large amount of still picture data etc. within an MP3
file, play may not be possible.
001track.mp3
002track.mp3
003track.mp3
004track.mp3
001track.mp3
002track.mp3
003track.mp3
Still Picture (JPEG 2) Information
Playable media
File format
HDD RAM -R -R DL CD USB SD
JPEG
Files must have the extension “.jpg” or “.JPG”.
Number of pixels Between 34×34 and 6144×4096
(Sub sampling is 4:2:2 or 4:2:0)
-R -R DL CD USB Maximum number of
Number of
folders recognizable: 300 folders
folders 3
HDD RAM SD This unit can handle a
maximum of 300 folders.
Number of files 3 -R -R DL CD USB Maximum number of files
recognizable 1: 3000 files
HDD RAM SD This unit can handle a
maximum of 3000 files.
MOTION JPEG
not compatible
• If there is a large amount of still picture data etc. within an MP3
file, play may not be possible.
1 Total number of recognizable file including DivX, JPEG, MP3 and
other type of files is 4000.
2 It may take a few moments for still pictures to display.
3 When there are many files and/or folders, some files may not
display or be playable.
Structure of still pictures (folders)
-R -R DL CD USB
Files inside a folder are displayed
in the order they were updated or
taken.
Order of play
Root
P0000001.jpg
P0000002.jpg
001
002 Folder
P0000003.jpg
P0000004.jpg
P0000005.jpg
003 Folder
004 Folder
P0000006.jpg
P0000007.jpg
P0000008.jpg
P0000009.jpg
P0000010.jpg
P0000011.jpg
P0000012.jpg
RAM
The following
can be displayed on this unit.
: Numbers
XXX: Letters Root
1 Still pictures on the root folder
XXXX.JPG 1
JPEG
can also be displayed.
DCIM
2 Folders can be created on other
XXXXX
equipment. However, these
folders cannot be selected as a
XXXX.JPG
copying destination.
• If a folder name or file name has
been input using other equipment,
DCIM
the name may not be displayed
XXXXX
properly or you may not be able to
play or edit the data.
XXXX.JPG
2
18
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 18
2008/04/23 18:59:32
Watching Television
Refer to “GUIDE Plus+ system” (➔ 38) for detail information.
Preparation:
Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit the
connections to this unit.
This DVD recorder has a tuner which allows it to directly receive and record
digital terrestrial channels.
Important:
This unit does not have an analogue broadcast tuner.
to turn the unit on.
TV Guide: Landscape
Wed 13/01/07
19:45
All Types
Wed 13th
All Services
Emmerdale : In today’s show we will...
Basic Operations
Time:
BBC 1
– The GUIDE Plus+ list
appears.
BBC 2
10 Channel 4
31 Channel 5
45
70
2
Prog. Type
+24 Hr
SELECT
RETURN
Category
Page
info
Guide Change Display Mode
Page
e, r to select the current programme, then
e, r to select “View”, then
Selecting a Channel without TV Guide
To select desired channel
Press [1, 2 CH].
To directly enter Channels
You can also select channels with the numbered buttons.
e. g., “5”:
[0] ➔ [0] ➔ [5] or [5] ➔ [OK]
“15”:
[0] ➔ [1] ➔ [5] or [1] ➔ [5] ➔ [OK]
Watching Satellite Programmes
Preparation:
• Connect a satellite receiver to this unit’s input terminals (➔ 11).
• Turn on the satellite receiver.
• Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit the
connections to this unit.
Tips
To select Digital TEXT (MHEG) and
subtitles (➔ 52)
To select change DVB Multi Audio
(➔ 75, DVB Multi Audio)
Notes
The GUIDE Plus+ list is not displayed
immediately after initial tuning is done.
Tips
When “Power Save” is set to “Off” (➔ 84),
you can watch the satellite programme
without turning the unit on.
Notes
You cannot watch satellite programmes
during timer recording.
to turn the unit on.
to select “AV2”.
19
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 19
2008/04/23 18:59:37
Playback
Preparation:
Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit the
connections to this unit.
Playing Discs
Refer to “Advanced HDD and Disc Playback” (➔ 40 to 42) for detailed
information on playback of discs.
HDD RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW DVD-V -RW(VR) CD VCD
to turn the unit on.
e.g.
to select the HDD or DVD
drive.
– The HDD or DVD indicator lights up on the unit.
HDD
DVD
SD
VHS
to open the tray (Button located on front of the unit).
– Insert a disc and press [; OPEN/CLOSE] again to close the tray. (➔ 89)
Tips
To return to the menu screen
DVD-V
Stopping Play
Pausing Play
Press [g STOP].
– The stopped position is memorized.
(Resume play function)
– The stopped position is cleared
when you press [g STOP]
several times.
Press [h PAUSE].
– Press again to restart play.
1. Press [OPTION].
2. Press [e, r] to select “Top Menu” or
“Menu” and press [OK].
VCD
Press [RETURN].
Notes
• HDD RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL
+RW -RW(VR)
Playback starts from the most recent
title.
Playing a Video Cassette
Refer to “Advanced Video Cassette Playback” (➔ 46 to 47) for detailed
information on playback of video cassette.
VHS
to turn the unit on.
to select the VHS drive.
– The VHS indicator lights up on the unit.
HDD
DVD
SD
VHS
Insert a cassette (➔ 89).
– Play starts automatically if you insert a cassette with the accidental
erasure tab removed.
Stopping Play
Pausing Play
Press [g STOP].
Press [h PAUSE].
– Press again to restart play.
• DVD-V VCD
Playback starts from the point specified
by the disc.
• CD
Playback starts from the beginning of
the disc.
• Depending on the disc type, playing
may automatically start without pressing
[q PLAY].
• The unit takes some time to read the
disc before play starts.
• Discs continue to rotate while menus are
displayed. Press [g STOP] when you
finish to preserve the unit’s motor and
your television screen.
• If “5” appears on the TV, the operation is
prohibited by the unit or disc.
Notes
• Tapes are automatically rewound once
they reach the end (except during Timer
recording, fast forwarding, etc.).
• You may have to adjust the tracking for
tapes recorded on other VCRs (➔ 47).
In some cases, the picture quality may
still be inferior; this is due to format
constraints.
20
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 20
2008/04/23 18:59:39
Recording Television Programmes
Refer to “Important Notes for Recording” (➔ 27) and “Advanced Recording” (➔ 28 to 30) for detail information on
recording.
HDD RAM -R -RW(V) +R +RW VHS
Preparation:
• Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit the
connections to this unit.
• RAM If the disc is protected, release protection (➔ 76).
• VHS Ensure accidental erasure tab is intact.
to turn the unit on.
to select the drive (HDD, DVD or VHS).
If you selected the DVD or VHS drive
Basic Operations
Insert a disc or video cassette.
– Insert a disc or video cassette with enough remaining blank space
(➔ 89).
– When the format confirmation screen is displayed (➔ 29).
to select desired channel.
REC
– To select with the numbered buttons (➔ 19)
– When no channel setting is performed on the unit and broadcast is
recorded directly from the satellite receiver, select a channel on the
connected equipment and press [INPUT SELECT] to select “AV2”.
to select the recording mode.
REC
Tips
Recording mode (➔ 28)
Remaining time
to start recording.
• RAM -RW(V) +R +RW
To use a new disc, formatting is
necessary (➔ 29).
Notes
REC
Elapsed recording time
Pausing Recording
Stopping Recording
Press [h PAUSE].
– Press again to restart recording.
(The title is not divided.)
Press [g STOP].
• -R -RW(V) +R +RW
It takes about 30 seconds for the unit
to complete recording management
information after recording finishes.
• You cannot change the channel or
recording mode during recording.
• This unit cannot record NTSC signals
to discs that already have PAL signal
recordings. (However, both types of
programmes can be recorded onto the
HDD.)
• VHS
– Even if the video cassette is labelled
“S-VHS”, it is not possible to record in
the S-VHS system with this unit.
This unit records in the normal VHS
system.
– When recording is paused for 5 minutes
or more, the unit returns to stop.
21
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 21
2008/04/23 18:59:41
Timer Recording
What is Freeview Playback?
Freeview Playback is the functions that enable timer recordings be controlled by the signal sent
from the broadcaster. “Guide Link”, “Series recording” (➔ 34), and “Split Programme” are available.
“Guide Link” — If you set a timer recording from the TV Guide, the recording’s start and
stop times can be controlled by the broadcaster, e.g. delayed start.
This is indicated by “Guide Link” in the Timer Recording screen in step 2 (➔ below).
“Split Programme” — If a programme is separated into 2 or more parts by some other
programmes e.g. news, this unit pauses recording during the gap.
This is indicated by “Split” in the Timer Recording screen in step 2 (➔ below).
When setting timer from the 1st split programme, other parts of the programme will be automatically
set and indicated by the timer icon on the TV Guide, but not shown on the timer recording list.
If you set a timer recording from the TV Guide, the recording’s start and stop times are
controlled by the signal sent from the broadcaster. If the signal is not sent correctly,
the recording may lack the beginning or the ending part of the programmes.
In order to make the timer recording work successfully, we recommend you set the
start time earlier and the end time later by some minutes, up to a maximum of 10
minutes for Guide Link to function.
e.g. When you set the timer recording for a programme that will start at 10:00 and end
at 11:00, set “9:58” and “11:05” in step 3 (➔ below).
HDD RAM -R -RW(V) +R +RW VHS
Preparation:
• Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit the
connections to this unit.
• Turn on this unit.
• If recording to DVD or VHS, insert a disc or video cassette that you use
for recording (➔ 89).
• RAM If the disc is protected, release protection (➔ 76).
• VHS Ensure accidental erasure tab is intact.
• Confirm that the clock on the unit’s display is set to the correct time.
– The GUIDE Plus+ list appears.
e, r, w, q to select the future programme, then
TV Guide: Landscape
Fri 10/10/08
19:45
All Types
Fri 10th
All Services
Timer
Recording
Remain
HDD
VHS
Tips
DVD 1:58 SP
30:24 SP
01:59 SP
FRI 10/10/08 12:54:00
Emmerdale : In today’s show we will...
Time:
BBC 1
Name
-24 Hr
+24 Hr
Prog. Type
Stop
Drive Mode
STTL
21:40
HDD
OFF
SP
Category
OK
Page
info
20:30
Programme Name
Press OK to store the programme.
2
SELECT
RETURN
Start
All Services : BBC 2
Holiday Programme
(Guide Link) (Split)
10 Channel 4
31 Channel 5
45
70
Date
2 BBC 2 10/10 FRI
BBC 2
Guide Change Display Mode
DELETE
0
--
9
Number
RETURN
Page
“Guide Link” and “Split” are displayed here.
– If “Selection Screen” appears, press [e, r] to select “Single Timer Rec.”, then press [OK].
Refer to “Series recording” (➔ 34) for “Series Timer Rec.”.
Confirm the programme (start and end time) by
TV magazine, etc. and correct if necessary
using
y
e, r, w, q, then
Timer icon
–
–
–
–
–
22
The settings are stored and the timer programme is on.
The timer icon is displayed.
“z” lights on the unit’s display to indicate timer recording standby has been activated.
Repeat steps 2-3 to programme other recordings.
Press [^ DVD/VHS] to turn the unit off.
“Guide Link” will not be displayed and will not function under the following conditions.
– Timer programmes set manually (➔ 34).
– Timer programmes set from the TV Guide are modified or start/stop time changed by more
than 10 minutes from original time.
(Series): Series recording (➔ 34) is set.
(Split): The programme is split in two or more parts by other programmes. This unit pauses
recording during the gap between the parts of the programme.
• RAM -RW(V) +R +RW
To use a new disc, formatting is necessary.
To check programmes (➔ 35)
To cancel a timer recording
programming
1. Press [e, r, w, q] to select the
programme (the timer icon is displayed)
and press [OK].
2. While “Delete” is selected, press [OK].
3. Press [w, q] to select “Yes” and press
[OK].
– The timer icon disappears.
Notes
• The GUIDE Plus+ list is not displayed
immediately after initial tuning is done.
• The GUIDE Plus+ system will not work
if the clock is not set correctly.
• If “NTSC” has been selected for “TV
System” (➔ 82), the GUIDE Plus+
system cannot be used.
• “FR” recording mode is not available
when the timer programme is controlled
by “Guide Link”.
• If you set a timer recording that will
overlap with other timer recordings, the
“Overlapped Timer Recording” screen
appears to help you resolve the
overlapping.
Follow the on-screen instructions.
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 22
2008/04/23 18:59:43
Copying Titles (One Touch Copy)
Refer to “Copying titles or playlists” (➔ 62 to 69) for detail information on
copying.
Copying Titles and Playlists (HDD ➔ DVD or VHS)
Programmes are automatically copied onto the disc or tape from the location
of playback at the time when the copying of the HDD starts.
HDD ➔ RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW VHS
Preparation:
• Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit the
connections to this unit.
• RAM If the disc protected, release protection (➔ 76).
• VHS Ensure accidental erasure tab is intact.
• Insert a disc or a video cassette with enough space for recording.
• Select the DVD or VHS drive (➔ 20).
• Select the DVD or VHS recording mode (➔ 28).
• VHS Stop the tape at the point where you want to start copying to.
COPYING indicator
Basic Operations
On the main unit
While both HDD and DVD or VHS are stopped
When copying from
HDD to DVD
Press and hold for about
3 seconds.
2b
When copying from
HDD to VHS
-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL
2a
to copy and automatically finalise
when done (see page 77 for more information on finalising).
− If you press [ g STOP], you can cancel copying.
2a
– or –
2b
to copy without finalising.
− If you press [ g STOP], you can cancel copying.
− Check if copying starts properly (“COPY” lights on the unit’s display).
− Copying is automatically completed when the tape reaches its end or the
disc becomes full.
Tips
Notes
• -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL If copying
doesn’t complete due to shortage of
remaining time, disc space, or other
reasons, finalising won’t start.
• When copying doesn’t start, the
“COPYING” indicator on the main unit
blinks for about 7 seconds. Check if the
unit is properly prepared.
• To cancel copying in the middle
Press [ g STOP].
− You can also press and hold [RETURN] for about 3 or more seconds to cancel copying in the middle.
However, you cannot stop finalising after it has started.
23
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 23
2008/04/23 18:59:44
Copying Titles (One Touch Copy)
Refer to “Copying titles or playlists” (➔ 62 to 69) for detail information on
copying.
Copying Titles (VHS ➔ HDD or DVD)
Programmes are automatically copied onto the HDD or disc from the location
of playback at the time when the copying of the tape starts.
VHS ➔ HDD RAM -R -RW(V) +R +RW
Preparation:
• Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit the
connections to this unit.
• RAM If the disc is protected, release protection (➔ 76).
• Insert a disc with enough space for recording.
• Select the HDD or DVD drive (➔ 20).
• Select the HDD or DVD recording mode (➔ 28).
• Insert the video cassette containing the programme to be copied.
• Press [q PLAY] to play the video cassette and then press and hold [STTL ]
for about 5 or more seconds to select the audio type you wish to record.
• Stop the tape at the point where you want to start copying from.
COPYING indicator
On the main unit
While both HDD or DVD and VHS are stopped
When copying from
VHS to HDD
Press and hold for about
3 seconds.
2b
When copying from
VHS to DVD
-R -RW(V) +R
2a
to copy and automatically finalise
when done (see page 77 for more information on finalising).
2a
− If you press [ g STOP], you can cancel copying.
Notes
– or –
2b
to copy without finalising.
− If you press [ g STOP], you can cancel copying.
− Check if copying starts properly (“COPY” lights on the unit’s display).
− Copying is automatically completed when the tape reaches its end or the
disc becomes full.
• -R -RW(V) +R If copying doesn’t
complete due to shortage of remaining
time, disc space, or other reasons,
finalising won’t start.
• When copying doesn’t start, the
“COPYING” indicator on the main unit
blinks for about 7 seconds. Check if the
unit is properly prepared.
Tips
• Dividing a title to be copied
When copying from VHS to HDD or DVD, titles on the HDD or DVD are divided according to
index signals detected on the tape.
− Titles that are too short may not be divided correctly.
− The recording time may become longer than the original title depending on the number of
index signals.
24
• To cancel copying in the middle
Press [ g STOP].
− You can also press and hold [RETURN] for about 3 or more seconds to cancel copying in the middle.
However, you cannot stop finalising after it has started.
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 24
2008/04/23 18:59:46
Copying Titles or Playlists (DVD ➔ HDD or VHS)
All titles on the disc are automatically copied onto the HDD or tape.
RAM -RW(VR) +RW ➔ HDD
RAM -RW(VR) -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW ➔ VHS
On the main unit
When copying from
DVD to HDD
Press and hold for about
3 seconds.
When copying from
DVD to VHS
COPYING indicator
Notes
• If you start copying when the resume
function is activated, the DVD is copied
from the beginning of the title you
stopped play at.
To copy a whole disc, press [ g STOP]
to deactivate it before copying (➔ 20).
• When copying doesn’t start, the
“COPYING” indicator on the main unit
blinks for about 7 seconds. Check if the
unit is properly prepared.
• -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL
You cannot copy the content of a
finalised disc.
To copy from a finalised disc
(➔ 67, Copying a finalised DVD-R,
DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video
format), +R and +R DL)
Basic Operations
Preparation:
• Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit the
connections to this unit.
• VHS Ensure accidental erasure tab is intact.
• Insert a video cassette with enough space for recording. Stop the tape
at the point where you want to start copying to.
• Select the HDD or VHS drive (➔ 20).
• Select the HDD or VHS recording mode (➔ 28).
• Insert the disc containing the programme to be copied.
• RAM -RW(VR) Press and hold [STTL ] for about 5 or more seconds to
select the audio you wish to record.
− Check if copying starts properly (“COPY” lights on the unit’s display).
− Copying automatically stops when playback of the disc finishes or the tape
reaches its end.
Tips
• When you start copying from the selected title
1. Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
2. Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
3. Press [e, r, w, q] to select the title you want to start recording, then press [OK].
4. Go to the operation shown above.
• Index signals are automatically recorded on the tape according to the division of titles on the
DVD [➔ 46, VHS Index Search System (VISS)].
• To cancel copying in the middle
Press [ g STOP].
− You can also press and hold [RETURN] for about 3 or more seconds to cancel copying in the
middle.
25
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 25
2008/04/23 18:59:47
Deleting Titles
Preparation:
• Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit the
connections to this unit.
• RAM If the disc is protected, release protection (➔ 76).
• Press [; OPEN/CLOSE] and insert a disc. Press [; OPEN/CLOSE]
again to close the tray.
Important:
Once deleted, contents cannot be recovered.
Delete Navigator
HDD RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW
to select the HDD or DVD drive.
FUNCTION MENU
With the unit stopped
Remain 30:00 SP
HDD
Playback
Recording
Delete
Copy
To Others
OK
RETURN
e, r to select “Delete”, then
FUNCTION MENU
Remain 30:00 SP
HDD
DELETE Navigator
HDD
Grouped Titles
VIDEO
PICTURE
MUSIC
Playback
Recording
10.10.
Chantal Show
Delete
11.10.
Dolphines
2
Copy
To Others
OK
RETURN
Previous
OK
RETURN
Page 02/02
OPTION
Select
Next
Previous
Next
HDD RAM When “VIDEO” is not selected, press the “Red” button to select “VIDEO”.
e, r, w, q to select the title, then
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all necessary items.
• Press [ h PAUSE] again to cancel.
Notes
w to select “Delete”, then
Tips
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To view other pages
Press [e, r, w, q] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press [OK].
• You can also press [u, i] to view other pages.
Delete Titles During Playback
HDD RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW
During playback
• You cannot delete while recording or
copying.
• +R +R DL +RW Even if you have set
protection on other equipment, such
titles are deleted.
Tips
• HDD RAM Deleting an item increases
the available disc space by the amount
of space taken by the item deleted.
• -R -R DL +R +R DL Available disc space
does not increase after deletion.
• -RW(V) +RW Available disc space
increases when you delete the last title
(If you format the disc, all of the disc
space will be available. (➔ 76)).
w to select “Delete”, then
26
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 26
2008/04/23 18:59:48
Important Notes for Recording
Selecting
audio for
recording
About the
aspect when
recording a
programme
Broadcast in multi-channel sound:
You can select audio language when received
audio in multi-channel broadcast (“Multi Audio”
appears at the bottom of digital channel
information display).
However, audio cannot be switched after
recording.
Hello
Hola
Hallo
Select the audio that you
want to record in “DVB Multi
Audio” in the on-screen
display (➔ 75).
HDD RAM (When “Recording Format” is set to “Video format”)
-R -RW(V) VHS
HDD RAM (When “Recording Format” is set to
“VR format”)
The programme will be recorded in the original aspect.
The original aspect used for the source programme will also be
used with the recording.
However, in the following cases, Programme will be recorded
in 4:3.
+R +RW
The programme will be recorded in 4:3 aspect.
-R -RW(V)
Programme recorded using “EP” or “FR” (recordings 5 hours or
longer) recording modes will be recorded in 4:3 aspect.
-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW
Set “Recording Format” to “Video format” before recording to the HDD.
(The default setting is “Video format”. ➔ 80)
You can copy titles in high speed mode (max. speed is 75X ); however, the audio and aspect settings (➔ above) are
necessary before recording to the HDD.
Depending on the disc, max. speed may vary.
High speed copy to DVD-R, etc.
Record to HDD
Basic Operations
When you
want to
copy titles in
high speed
mode from
the HDD to
DVD-R, etc.
HDD
Copy-once
recording
Advanced Features
In the following cases, high speed mode does not work.
• +R +R DL +RW Titles recorded in “EP” mode and “FR” (recordings 5 hours or longer) mode
• +R +R DL +RW Titles recorded in 16:9 aspect
• -R -R DL -RW(V) Titles recorded in 16:9 aspect using “EP” mode or “FR” (recordings 5 hours or longer) mode
It is not possible to record digital broadcasts that allow “One time only recording” onto DVD-R, DVD-RW, +R, +RW or
8 cm DVD-RAM discs. Use the CPRM (➔ 104) compatible DVD-RAM.
RAM CPRM compatible discs only
-R -RW(V) +R +RW
12cm
—
HDD
( : Can do, −: Cannot do)
• “One time only recording” titles can only be transferred from the HDD to CPRM compatible DVD-RAM (They are
deleted from the HDD). They cannot be copied.
• Even when copying to videotape the title may not be copied correctly because of the copy guard.
• You cannot copy a playlist created from “One time only recording” titles.
Playing the
disc on other
DVD players
-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL
The disc must be finalised after recording (➔ 77).
It is necessary to finalise DVD-R, etc. on this unit after recording. You can then play them in the same way as a
commercially sold DVD-Video. However, the discs become play-only and you can no longer record.
You can record and copy again if you format DVD-RW.
Play on other DVD equipments
Record onto DVD-R, etc.
Finalise
CHG
DISC
1
2
3
4
5
SEARCH
ENTER
VOL
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
RETURN
MENU
ON
OFF
DC
IN
9V
OPEN
UND
A.SURRO
REPEAT
MODE
MONITOR
MODE
PICTURE
+RW
If the disc failed to play on other equipment, we recommend you create top menu (➔ 77).
Recording
to DVD-R DL
and +R DL
You cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL and +R DL disc on this unit.
Record to the HDD and then copy to the disc.
• It is not possible to record to HDD (Hard Disk Drive), DVD or VHS drive while recording to the other drive.
27
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 27
2008/04/23 18:59:50
Advanced Recording
Recording Modes and Durations (HDD, DVD)
DVD-RAM
Single-sided Double-sided
(9.4 GB)
(4.7 GB)
DVD-R,
DVD-RW, +R,
+RW (4.7 GB)
Recording
Mode
HDD
(250 GB)
XP
(High quality)
SP
(Standard play)
LP
(Long play)
55 hours
1 hour
2 hours
1 hour
110 hours
2 hours
4 hours
2 hours
221 hours
4 hours
8 hours
4 hours
EP
(Extra long
play) 4
441 hours
(331 hours 2)
8 (6 2) hours
16 (12 2) hours
8 (6 2) hours
FR
(Flexible
Recording)
441 hours
maximum
8 hours
maximum
8 hours
maximum for
one side
8 hours
maximum
4
1 It is not possible to record or play continuously from one side of a
double sided disc to the other.
2 When “Recording time in EP mode” has been set to “EP”
(6Hours) in the Setup menu (➔ 80).
The sound quality is better when using “EP (6Hours)” than when
using “EP (8Hours)”.
3 You cannot record directly to DVD-R DL and +R DL discs with
this unit. The table shows the recording time when copying.
+R DL You cannot copy in “EP” or “FR” (recordings 5 hours or
longer) mode.
4 When recording to the HDD in “EP” or “FR” (recordings 5 hours
or longer) mode, you cannot perform high-speed copy to +R, +R
DL or +RW discs.
1
DVD-R DL
(8.5 GB)
3
1 hour
45 minutes
3 hour
35 minutes
7 hours
10 minutes
14 hours
20 minutes
(10 hours
45 minutes 2)
14 hours
20 minutes
+R DL 3
(8.5 GB)
1 hour
45 minutes
3 hour
35 minutes
7 hours
10 minutes
Approximately 9
hours with video
quality equivalent
to LP mode.
Tips
• Maximum number of titles to a disc
HDD 499 titles on HDD
RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) 99 titles on a disc
+R +R DL +RW 49 titles on a disc
• FR (Flexible recording mode)
Using “Flexible Recording” is convenient in these kinds of situations:
RAM -R -RW(V) +R +RW
– When the amount of free space on the disc makes selecting an
appropriate recording mode difficult
– When you want to record a long programme with the best picture
quality possible
HDD
– When you want to record a title to HDD so that it can then be
copied to fit one 4.7 GB disc perfectly
You do not need to edit the recorded title, or change the recording
mode when copying, to fit the disc space.
e.g., Recording a 90 minutes programme to 4.7 GB DVD-RAM disc:
– If you select XP mode, the programme will not fit on one disc.
Picture quality
XP
SP
LP
EP (6Hours)2
4.7 GB
DVD-RAM
EP (8Hours)
4.7 GB
DVD-RAM
A second disc is necessary for
30 minutes of the programme.
– If you select SP mode, the programme will fit on one disc.
Recording time
Notes
• This unit uses variable bit rate (VBR) recording which varies the
amount of data recorded to suit the picture quality, so actual recording
times and remaining recording times shown by the unit will be
different. ( -R DL +R DL The difference will be especially noticeable.)
Use a disc enough remaining blank space.
• When recording to DVD-RAM using EP (8Hours) mode, play may
not be possible on DVD players, even if they are compatible with
DVD-RAM. In this case use EP (6Hours) mode.
4.7 GB
DVD-RAM
However there will be 30 minutes remaining disc space.
– If you select “Flexible Recording” the programme will fit on one disc perfectly.
4.7 GB
DVD-RAM
You can set FR mode when programming timer recordings (➔ 34)
and flexible recording (➔ 30).
Recording Modes and Durations (VHS)
Recording Mode
SP
LP
EP
AUTO
28
Durations
You can record the length shown on
the tape.
2 times the length of SP mode.
• LP cannot be selected when
recording NTSC signals.
3 times the length of SP mode.
Automatically switches the recording
mode to LP (NTSC to EP) mode during a
timer recording if there is not enough tape
left to record the programme in SP mode.
Tips
• To prevent recording errors:
Set a timer recording period slightly longer than the actual
programme (to make sure the programme is recorded in full).
• If the image quality is important to you or if you wish to store the
tape for a long period, select “SP”.
• The unit can play tapes recorded in LP mode on other equipment.
• AUTO Mode
Timer recording
1st programme
2nd programme (45 min)
(30 min)
Video tape
(e.g.: 60-minute cassette)
– The tape length must be set correctly (➔ 83).
– Picture distortion may occur when the recording mode switches.
– This may not work correctly with some video cassettes.
– It may not work correctly when “NTSC” is set as the “TV System” (➔ 82).
30 min at SP
15 min 30 min
at SP at LP
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 28
2008/04/23 18:59:51
When the format confirmation screen is
displayed
Formatting is the process of making media such as
DVD-RAM recordable on recording equipment.
Important:
Formatting permanently deletes all disc contents
(including the contents that have been recorded on a
PC), regardless of protection status of disc.
Format
This disc is not formatted properly.
Do you want to format the disc now?
No
Yes
SELECT
Only format the disc if you
intend to use it for recording.
OK
During recording
On the main unit
repeatedly until the desired
– The recording time and the unit’s display change
as follows:
Counter (Cancel)
w to select “Yes”, then
OFF 0:30
OFF 4:00
OFF 3:00
RETURN
Do not format if you intend to view pre-recorded
titles or contents from the disc.
OFF 1:00
OFF 1:30
OFF 2:00
Notes
• This function does not work during timer recording or Flexible
Recording.
• Recording stops and the set time is cleared if you press [g STOP].
• The unit turns off automatically after recording finished.
Advanced Features
Direct TV Recording
HDD
Tips
Refer to “Formatting Discs or Cards” (➔ 76) for more detail of formatting.
When removing a Recorded Disc
-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL
After recording, if you
press [; OPEN/CLOSE] to
eject the disc, the following
screen may appear.
HDD RAM -R -RW(V) +R +RW VHS
This function allows specifying the length of recording
time up to 4 hours.
time is reached.
RAM -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW
The following screen may
appear when inserting a
new disc or a disc that has
been recorded on other
equipment.
Specifying the Recording Time
This function allows you to immediately start recording
the programme that you are viewing on the TV without
having to change the channels on this unit.
You can use the function when you connect the unit to
a Q Link compatible TV using the 21-pin Scart cable.
Finalise
Finalise the disc so that it can be played
on other DVD players.
Note : Recording or Editing is not possible
after finalising. This may take up to 9 min.
Press the REC button to start finalise.
Press the OPEN/CLOSE button to exit.
This disc cannot be played on other
DVD players without finalising.
Finalising
DVD-R, etc. recorded or copied on this unit cannot be
played on other players immediately after recording.
Using the Finalise feature allows you to play these
discs on other players. Once the disc is finalised you
will no longer be able to record onto the disc.
[However if you format the DVD-RW, you can record
onto the disc again. (➔ 76)]
to start finalising.
or
Press and hold for about 1
second.
Tips
To stop recording
Press [g STOP].
Notes
• When Digital TEXT (MHEG) (➔ 52) is displayed, Direct TV
recording is unavailable.
• When the unit is connected to a Panasonic TV, if you switch TV
channels while using Direct TV recording, the Direct TV recording
stops.
• When “EXT-L” lights on the unit’s display (➔ 31), Direct TV recording
is unavailable.
to eject the disc without
finalising.
Notes
You cannot stop finalising once you have started it.
Tips
• If you want to provide the disc with a name or set play menu select,
select “Disc Name” (➔ 76) or “Auto-Play Select” (➔ 77) in “DVD
Management” before finalising.
• Refer to “Finalising” (➔ 77) for more detail of finalising.
29
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 29
2008/04/23 18:59:53
Advanced Recording
Flexible Recording
Playing while you are recording
HDD RAM -R -RW(V) +R +RW
The unit sets the best possible picture quality that fits
the programme within the remaining disc space.
The recording mode becomes FR mode. Refer to “FR
(Flexible recording mode)” (➔ 28).
Preparation:
• Select the channel or the external input to record.
• Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.
• You can play HDD, DVD or VHS while recording to
the other drive. The recording will not be affected.
− HDD/DVD playback (➔ 20, 40–42)
− VHS playback (➔ 20, 46, 47)
Notes
You cannot watch images on a tape from the HDD/DVD priority out
terminals or HDMI AV OUT terminal while recording on HDD or a
disc (➔ 86).
Chasing Playback
With the unit stopped
HDD RAM
Allows playback from the beginning of the title you are
recording.
During recording
e, r to select “To Others”, then
Tips
To stop play
Press [g STOP] once.
e, r to select
“Flexible Rec”,
then
Flexible Rec
Record in FR mode.
Maximum rec. time
8 Hour 00 Min.
Set rec. time
8 Hour 00 Min.
Start
To stop recording
2 seconds after play stops, press [g STOP].
Simultaneous Record and Playback
Cancel
HDD RAM
SELECT
RETURN
w, q to select “Hour” and “Min.”
and e, r to set the recording time.
– You can set “Hour” and “Min.” using the
numbered buttons.
Allows playback of a previous title, while recording
something else.
• You can also change the drive and play while
recording. Press [DRIVE SELECT].
During recording
When you want to start recording
e, r, w, q to select “Start”, then
– Recording starts.
Tips
Notes
You cannot record more than 8 hours.
Tips
To stop recording partway
Press [g STOP].
To show the remaining recording time
Press [STATUS ] to show the remaining recording time.
30
To stop play
Press [g STOP].
To exit the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
HDD
REC 0:59
1 DVB
BBC ONE Wales
e, r, w, q to select the title to
play, then
Remaining time
To stop recording
After play stops
1. Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] to exit the screen.
2. If the recording is on the other drive
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the recording drive.
3. Press [g STOP].
Notes
During playing while you are recording, you cannot edit or delete titles.
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 30
2008/04/23 18:59:55
Recording from a Satellite Receiver
Manual Recording
This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that
already have PAL signal recordings. (However, both
types of programmes can be recorded onto the HDD.)
Preparation:
• RAM If the disc is protected, release protection
(➔ 76).
• VHS Ensure accidental erasure tab is intact.
• Connect a satellite receiver to this unit’s input
terminals (➔ 11).
• When the output signal from the external
equipment is NTSC, change the “TV System” to
“NTSC” in the Setup menu (➔ 82).
This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that
already have PAL signal recordings. (However, both
types of programmes can be recorded onto the HDD.)
With the unit stopped
Linked timer recordings with
external equipment (SKY Digital
STB/satellite receiver)–EXT LINK
To record programmes from a SKY Digital STB/satellite
receiver using timer programming
Preparation:
• RAM If the disc is protected, release protection
(➔ 76).
• VHS Ensure accidental erasure tab is intact.
• Make sure you connect the AV2 input terminal of this
unit to “VCR Scart Terminal” of a SKY Digital STB/
satellite receiver with a 21-pin scart cable (➔ 11).
• Set the “AV2 Input” and “Ext Link” to match the
connected equipment in the Setup menu (➔ 83).
Make timer programming on SKY
Digital STB/satellite receiver.
– Refer to the equipment’s operating instructions.
to select “AV2” for the
satellite receiver you have
connected.
to select the HDD, DVD or
VHS drive.
–If you selected the DVD or VHS drive, insert a
disc or video cassette with enough remaining
blank space (➔ 89).
Advanced Features
HDD RAM -R -RW(V) +R +RW VHS
to select the HDD, DVD or
VHS drive.
–If you selected the DVD or VHS drive, insert a
disc or video cassette with enough remaining
blank space (➔ 89).
to select the recording
mode.
Select the channel on the satellite
receiver.
to start recording.
Tips
To skip unwanted parts
Press [h PAUSE] to pause recording. (Press again to restart
recording.)
To stop recording
Press [g STOP].
– The unit turns off and “EXT-L” lights on the
unit’s display to indicate timer recording
standby has been activated.
– While the unit is in EXT LINK standby mode
or recording, most operations on this unit are
prohibited ([; OPEN/CLOSE], [8] etc.).
When you operate, press [EXT LINK] to
cancel EXT LINK standby mode or recording
(The unit turns on and “EXT-L” disappears.).
Tips
To cancel the external control
Press [EXT LINK] to stop recording or to cancel linked timer
recording standby (The unit turns on and “EXT-L” disappears.).
Manual timer recordings (➔ 34)
Notes
• In order to prevent accidental operation, press [EXT LINK] to cancel
the setting after recording is finished.
• This function does not work when “TV System” is set to “NTSC” in
the Setup menu (➔ 82).
• This function does not work with some equipment. Refer to the
equipment’s operating instructions.
• The beginnings of recordings may not be recorded correctly in
some cases.
• When “Ext Link” is set to “Ext Link 2”, this function does not work if
the input signal is NTSC system.
• Programmes are recorded as one title on this unit when the end
time of the earlier timer recording and the start time of the later
timer recording are close to each other.
HDD RAM To divide the titles, go to “Divide Title” (➔ 55).
• While the unit is in EXT LINK standby mode or recording, AV1
output terminal outputs the signal which is input from the AV2 input
terminal irrespective of “AV1 Output” setting (➔ 83).
31
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 31
2008/04/23 18:59:57
Recording from an External Device
Recording from a VCR, etc.
Recording to HDD or DVD
Connect cables while both the unit and the external
device are turned off.
HDD RAM -R -RW(V) +R +RW
Perform steps
Front of the unit
−
(➔ left).
Start play on the external device.
You can get a
sharper, clearer
picture by
connecting with
an S Video
cable instead of
the yellow video
cable.
HDD
DVD
SD
VHS
at the point you want to
start recording to the disc.
Recording to VHS
VHS
Perform steps
Yellow White Red
S Video cable
• If the audio output of the external device is monaural, connect to
L/MONO on the AV3 input terminals at the front.
to select the HDD, DVD or
VHS drive.
–If you selected the DVD or VHS drive, insert a
disc or video cassette with enough remaining
blank space (➔ 89).
to select the recording
mode (➔ 28).
to select the input where
your external device is connected.
– Front panel inputs are AV3.
(➔ left).
to bring the tape to the
point at which you want to start
recording from.
Audio/Video
cable
Preparation:
• Turn on the unit.
• RAM If the disc is protected, release protection
(➔ 76).
• VHS Ensure accidental erasure tab is intact.
• When the output signal from the external device is
NTSC, change the “TV System” to “NTSC” in the
Setup menu (➔ 82).
This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that
already have PAL signal recordings. (However, both
types of programmes can be recorded onto the HDD.)
• To reduce noise in input from a video cassette
recorder, set “Copy NR” to “On” in the on-screen
display (➔ 75).
−
when you reach that point.
to put the unit in recording
standby.
Start play on the external device.
to start recording at the
8
point you desire.
Tips
• You can also connect to the AV2 on the rear.
HDD RAM -R -RW(V) +R +RW
• Using Flexible Recording (➔ 30), you can record the content of a
video cassette (approx. 1–8 hours) to a 4.7 GB disc with the best
possible quality of recording without wasting disc space.
To skip unwanted parts
Press [ h PAUSE] to pause recording. (Press again to restart
recording.)
To stop recording
Press [ g STOP].
The confirmation screen appears. Press [OK].
Notes
• When timer recording starts while recording from an external
device, timer recording takes priority and recording from the
external device stops.
• If video is copied from another piece of equipment to this unit, then
the video quality will be degraded.
• Almost all videos and DVD-Video on sale have been treated to
prevent illegal copying. Any software that has been so treated
cannot be recorded using this unit.
32
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 32
2008/04/23 18:59:59
Recording from a DV Camcorder
Connect the cable while both the unit and the external
device are turned off.
w, q to select “Rec to HDD” or
“Rec to DVD”, then
Front of the unit
HDD
DVD
SD
VHS
to select the recording
mode (➔ 28).
w to select “Rec”, then
Notes
HDD RAM -R -RW(V) +R +RW
Preparation:
• Turn on the main unit.
• If you record to DVD, insert a disc (➔ 89).
• RAM If the disc is protected, release protection (➔ 76).
• When the output signal from the external device is
NTSC, change the “TV System” to “NTSC” in the
Setup menu (➔ 82).
This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that
already have PAL signal recordings. (However, both
types of programmes can be recorded onto the HDD.)
• When recording bilingual programmes (➔ 81,
Bilingual Audio Selection).
Turn on the DV equipment and
pause play at the point you want
to start recording.
“DV Auto Rec” screen may appear.
DV Auto Rec
DV unit is connected.
Record from the DV unit?
Rec to HDD
Rec to DVD
Advanced Features
4-pin DV Cable
• Only one piece of DV equipment (e.g., digital video camcorder) can
be connected to the unit via the DV input terminal.
• When timer recording starts while recording from an external
device, timer recording takes priority and recording from the
external device stops.
• If the desired audio is not recorded, select the kind of audio for
“Audio Mode for DV Input” in the Setup menu (➔ 81).
• HDD RAM Programmes are recorded as a single item; breaks in
the images create chapters and playlists are created automatically.
• Depending on the DV equipment, the images or audio may not be
input properly.
• The DV input on this unit is for use with DV equipment only.
(It cannot be connected to a computer, etc.)
• If you use video camcorders from other manufacturers, these are
not guaranteed to work.
• It is not possible to operate the unit from the connected DV
equipment.
• The DV equipment name may not be shown correctly.
• Date and time information is not recorded, even if displayed on the
camcorder.
• You cannot record and play simultaneously.
Tips
When recording finishes
The confirmation screen appears.
Press [OK] to finish DV camcorder recording.
To stop recording
Press [■ STOP].
The confirmation screen appears. Press [OK].
If the DV camcorder recording function does not work properly, check
the connections and DV equipment settings, and turn the unit off and
back on. If that does not work, follow the instructions on page 32.
Cancel
SELECT
OK
RETURN
When “DV Auto Rec” screen does not appear
Perform step
(➔ above).
1. With the unit stopped
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.
2. Press [FUNCTION MENU].
3. Press [e, r] to select “To Others”, then press [OK].
4. Press [e, r] to select “DV Auto Rec”, then press [OK].
You can proceed to step
(➔ right).
33
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 33
2008/04/23 19:00:00
Advanced Timer Recording
Manual timer recordings
Preparation:
• Turn on the television and select the appropriate
video input to suit the connections to this unit.
• RAM If the disc is protected, release protection (➔ 76).
• VHS Ensure accidental erasure tab is intact.
• Insert a disc or a video cassette with enough
remaining blank space (➔ 89).
• Confirm that the clock on the unit’s display is set to
the correct time.
• If connected via a satellite receiver, set channel
there before timer recording starts.
Timer
Recording
Remain
No. Name
HDD
Date
Start
30:24 SP
DVD 1:58 SP
1:59 SP FRI 10/10/08 12:54:00
Drive
Stop Drive Mode STTL space
New Timer Programme
e, r to select “New Timer
Programme”, then
w, q to move through the items
and e, r to set the items.
Timer
Recording
Name
Remain
HDD
VHS
30:24 SP
DVD 1:58 SP
1:59 SP FRI 10/10/08 12:54:00
Date
Start
Stop
-- / -- --- -- : -- -- : --
Drive Mode STTL
---
SP
---
All Services : ----Programme Name
Please set Channel.
Name:
Date:
– TV Station Name/External Input
• When recording satellite
programmes, select “AV2”.
• You can press the “Blue” button to
change the category.
[e.g., Free Services, Radio, Registered
Profiles (➔ 78, Edit Profiles)]
– You can set a daily or weekly
programme (➔ right, Tips).
Start (start time) / Stop (end time):
– Hold button to change in 30-minute
increments or decrements.
Drive:
– HDD, DVD or VHS
When the recording drive is “DVD” and
there is not enough remaining space,
recording automatically switches to the
“HDD” (➔ 36, Relief Recording).
Mode:
– Recording mode (➔ 28)
STTL [Subtitles (➔ 52)]:
– ON/OFF
RENEW
– Auto Renewal Recording (➔ 36)
( HDD )
ON/OFF
Programme Name:
Press [OK]. (➔ 53, Entering Text)
– The timer icon is displayed in left column.
g
No. Name
01 BBC1 7/
7/
– “z” lights on the unit’s display to indicate
timer recording standby has been activated.
– Repeat steps 2−4 to programme other
recordings.
– Press [^ DVD/VHS] to turn the unit off.
Notes
• “z” on the unit’s display flashes when the unit cannot go to timer
recording standby. (e.g., a recordable disc is not in the disc tray).
• If two timer recording times overlap, the first recording always has
priority. The second recording will start only after the first recording
has finished.
• Recorded subtitles cannot be deleted later.
• Timer Recording does not start while a disc is being formatted,
deleted or finalised. The recording begins afterwards.
• When “Name” is set in AV1, AV2 or AV3, STTL setting is
unavailable.
Tips
To exit the timer recording list
Press [PROG/CHECK].
• “Date” Setting
Each press of [e] changes items in the order below.
(Each press of [r] changes items in the reverse order.)
Current date --- One month later
minus one day
SAT
SUN-SAT
---
HDD RAM -R -RW(V) +R +RW VHS
MON-SAT
SUN
MON-FRI
Weekly timer
Daily timer
Titles recorded using the same daily or weekly timer are bundled
and displayed as a “group” in the Direct Navigator screen (➔ 40)
except when using Auto Renewal Recording
• You can also use the numbered buttons to enter “Name”, “Date”,
“Start” and “Stop”.
• You can also press [DRIVE SELECT] to switch the drive,
] to switch
[REC MODE] to switch “Mode” and press [STTL
“STTL”.
Series recording
HDD RAM -R -RW(V) +R +RW
You can record all the episodes of a series by setting
just one timer recording using the GUIDE Plus+ system.
After performing steps − (➔ 22)
e, r to select “Series Timer
Rec.”, then
Selection Screen
Timer
Recording
Remain
HDD
VHS
30:24 SP
DVD 1:58 SP
1:59 SP FRI 10/10/08 12:54:00
Date
Start
Stop
Drive
Mode
STTL
21:40
HDD
SP
OFF
FRI 10/10/08 12:54:00
Holiday Programme
View
Single Timer Rec.
BBC 2
News & Factual
FRI 10/10/08
20:30࡯21:30
Name
2 BBC 2 10/10 FRI
20:30
Series Timer Rec.
Delete
All Services : BBC 2
Holiday Programme
(Guide Link)
Programme Name
Press OK to store the programme.
Series Info
OK
RETURN
OK
DELETE
0
--
9
Number
RETURN
34
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 34
2008/04/23 19:00:01
– You cannot change Name, Date and Start/Stop.
– This unit automatically records the
programmes that are identified to be of the
same series by the GUIDE Plus+ data.
– Titles recorded using series recording are
bundled and displayed as a “group” in the
Direct Navigator screen (➔ 40) except when
using Auto Renewal Recording.
Check, Change, Delete Programmes, or
Resolve Overlapping
HDD RAM -R -RW(V) +R +RW VHS
The timer recording list can be viewed even when the
unit is off.
, then e, r to select the
programme.
Timer
Recording
=5?
Series recording icon
No. Name
A
DVD 1:58 SP
HDD 30:24 SP
VHS 1:59 SP
Remain
Date
Start
FRI 10/10/08 12:54:00
Drive
Stop Drive Mode STTL space
New Timer Programme
B
Tips
To check the schedule of the series
Press the “blue” button after performing steps 1–2 (➔ 22).
C
Press OK to store new programme.
OK
Series Information
RETURN
Contents
S BBC2
Wed 12/05
21:30-22:30
Decameron 1
S BBC2
Wed 12/12
21:30-22:30
Decameron 2
S BBC2
Wed 12/19
21:30-22:30
Decameron 3
S BBC2
Wed 12/26
21:30-22:30
Decameron 4
BBC2
Wed 1/2
21:30-22:30
Decameron 1
S
R
R
: The episode to be recorded
: Repeat programme
Notes
• If the unit cannot record the first run, the unit will record the repeat
programme if it is available. However, this unit will not record the
repeat programme, if any part of the first run is recorded.
• The series recording will be cancelled if there has been no episode
of the series for 13 weeks.
To cancel a timer recording in progress
HDD RAM -R -RW(V) +R +RW VHS
While the unit is on
– Confirmation screen appears.
A Timer Recording screen icons
z : Timer programme is active.
* : Currently recording
: Programmes are overlapped. Recording of the programme
with the later start time starts when the earlier programme
finishes recording.
Q : You stopped a weekly or daily timer recording. The icon
disappears when the next timer recording starts.
: The disc was full. (not enough space)
: The TV programme may not be recorded due to copy-protect.
X : Recording stopped (Dirty disc, etc.)
: Timer programmes set to Auto Renewal Recording
(➔ 36).
: Titles that have been rerouted to the HDD
(Displayed while recording.)
Drive Recording drive is set to HDD, DVD or VHS
B Drive space
OK:
Recordable HDD DVD
➔ (Date): For recordings made daily or weekly, the display will show
until when recordings can be made (up to one month
ahead from the present time) based on the time remaining
on the disc. HDD DVD
!:
It may not be possible to record because:
– The disc is write-protected. DVD
– There is no more space left. HDD DVD
– The number of possible titles has reached its maximum.
Advanced Features
Fri 10/10/08 10:35
Name
Date
HDD DVD
– –:
Relief:
– The new timer recording will completely or partially
record over this timer recording.
When the drive is set to VHS, “––” is displayed.
Timer programmes that will be relief recorded to the HDD.
DVD
w to select “Stop Recording”,
then
C Channel name, programme name and other information are
displayed.
(Continued on the next page)
Notes
Recording stops and the timer programme is deleted. (Daily and
weekly timer programmes remain and timer recording will start from
the next time the timer recording is set.)
35
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 35
2008/04/23 19:00:03
Advanced Timer Recording
Relief Recording
to delete.
2a
– You cannot delete programmes that are
currently recording.
to modify the programme.
2b
e, r, w, q to make changes,
then
2c When a programme with
is selected
then follow the on-screen
instructions to resolve overlapping.
– If the programme was set from the TV Guide,
the available repeat programmes are displayed.
Press [e, r] to select, then press [OK].
Tips
• You can enter up to 32 programmes a month in advance.
You can also delete a programme with the following steps
1. Press [e, r] to select the programme and press [OPTION].
2. Press [e, r] to select “Delete” and press [OK].
RAM -R -RW(V) +R +RW
When the recording drive is “DVD” and there is not
enough remaining blank space, recording automatically
switches to the “HDD”. If there is no disc in the tray or
the disc cannot be recorded on or when timer recording
starts while copying, the recording drive will be altered
to the HDD.
• The Direct Navigator shows which programmes were
relief-recorded (“ ” is displayed.) (➔ 35).
• If the time remaining on the HDD is insufficient, as
much of the programme as possible will be recorded
onto the HDD.
Auto Renewal Recording
HDD
If you record a programme onto HDD repeatedly
everyday or every week using timer recording, the unit
will record the new programme over the old one.
This function can be used only when weekly
recording or daily recording is selected.
To exit the timer recording list
Press [PROG/CHECK].
Notes
• Recording may fail if there are changes to the station’s programming.
• “z” disappears from the unit’s display when no timer programme is
set or when all timer programmes are deactivated.
• “-------” is displayed on a series recording item if there will be no
episode of the series for the next 8 days. We recommend you
delete the “-------” item after you confirm the last episode of the
series is recorded.
• The “Guide Link” function may not work if you manually change the
start/end time by over 10 minutes.
• Programmes that failed to record are deleted from the timer
recording list at 4 a.m. two days later.
To deactivate timer programme
(e.g. to interrupt a daily or weekly timer
programming)
e, r to select the programme,
then
w, q to select “RENEW” column.
e, r to select “ON”, then
Timer
Remain HDD
Recording
VHS
Name
1 BBC 1
30:24 SP
1:59 SP
DVD 1:58 SP
FRI 10/10/08 12:54:00
Date
Start
Stop Drive Mode STTL RENEW
SUN
22:00
22:30 HDD
SP
OFF
ON
All Services : BBC 1
Programme Name
HDD RAM -R -RW(V) +R +RW VHS
After performing step
(➔ 35, right column)
Notes
(Red)
– “z” (➔ 35) disappears from the timer
recording list.
– Press the “Red” button again to activate timer
programme.
Tips
You can deactivate the timer programme in the following
procedure as well.
Perform step
(➔ 35, right column).
1. Press [OPTION].
2. Press [e, r] to select “Timer Off”, then press [OK].
• If a programme set for Auto Renewal Recording is protected
or while playback is taking place from the HDD, or while
copying, the programme will not be overwritten. Instead the
programme set for recording will be saved as a separate
programme, and this programme will be the one to be
overwritten when the next Auto Renewal Recording takes
place.
• Playlists made from programmes that were set for Auto
Renewal Recording are deleted along with auto renewal.
• When there is not enough space on the HDD, the
programme may not be recorded completely.
36
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 36
2008/04/23 19:00:05
Making timer recordings on the television
HDD
To make a timer recording with your television, connect
to a television with a Q Link function (➔ 50) that you
can use for setting timer recordings using a fully wired
21-pin Scart cable (➔ 10, 11).
Make timer programming on the
TV.
to turn the unit off.
– The start and end of recording is controlled
by TV.
– The titles are recorded to the HDD.
Tips
To stop recording
Press [g STOP].
Advanced Features
Notes
• When this unit is in EXT LINK standby (“EXT-L” on the unit’s
display lights), recording from TV does not start.
• Programmes are recorded as one title on this unit when the
end time of the earlier timer recording and the start time of
the later timer recording are close to each other.
To divide the titles, go to “Divide Title” (➔ 55).
Notes on timer recording
• When a timer recording is set, DVDs that were recorded
using a different TV system cannot be played unless the TV
system is changed in the Setup menu (➔ 82) or the timer
recording has completed or has been cancelled.
• Timer recordings are activated regardless of whether the
unit is turned on/off.
• Timer recordings begin when the set time is reached even
when playing.
• Timer recordings do not begin while editing or copying in
normal speed mode.
• If the unit is turned on when timer recording begins, it
remains turned on after recording finishes. It does not
turn off automatically. You can turn the unit off during timer
recording.
• If the unit is not put in the timer recording standby mode at
the last 10 minutes before the programmed timer recording
starting time, “z” flashes on the unit’s display.
• When you programme successive timer recordings to start
immediately one after the other, the unit cannot record the
part at the beginning of the later programmes.
Programme
Programme
Not recorded
Recorded
Recorded
• The “Overlapped Timer Recording” screen may be displayed
immediately after you turn on this unit, if new overlapping
occurred. Refer to “Check, Change, Delete Programmes, or
Resolve Overlapping” (➔ 35).
37
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 37
2008/04/23 19:00:07
GUIDE Plus+ system
What is the GUIDE Plus+ system?
The GUIDE Plus+ system gives you an overview of digital television and radio programmes up to 7 days in
advance. For many of these programmes, you can select additional information provided by the stations. You can
search the programme preview according to various topics such as sport, films etc., according to categories such
as TV or radio. You can easily find the desired programmes and set Timer recording.
Landscape view
Broadcast date
Broadcast time
RadioTimes
TV Guide: Landscape
Wed 13/01/07
19:45
All Types
Wed 13th
All Services
Emmerdale : In today’s show we will...
Time:
BBC 1
Advertisement
BBC 2
10 Channel 4
31 Channel 5
Timer icon
( 22)
45
70
Prog. Type
SELECT
RETURN
• The Gemstar branding
partner will supply the
rating information in the
programme information and
the recommended group in
the Prog.Type list.
Category
GUIDE
Page
info
Guide Change Display Mode
RadioTimes
TV Guide: Portrait
current
programme
: future
programme
13 Channel 4+1
Channel 4
More 4
GUIDE
19:30
20:00
20:55
21:00
22:00
23:00
+24 Hr
20:00
20:55
21:00
22:00
23:00
00:05
ITV 4
E4
Hollyoaks
Channel 4 News
3 Minute Wonder
How to Look Good Naked
The Secret Millionaire
Love Trap
Category
Prog. Type
SELECT
RETURN
All Services
All Types
Wed 13th
Wed 13/01/07
19:45
Page
info
Using the GUIDE Plus+ list
To change channels
Landscape view
Press [e, r] to select a channel.
Portrait view
Press [w, q] to select a channel.
The GUIDE Plus+ list appears for this channel.
To view a
programme list for
another day
• Jump ahead 24 hours
Press the “Green” button to jump ahead
by one day.
• Jump back 24 hours
Press the “Red” button.
You can only jump back to the current
date. Past information cannot be viewed.
To change the page
of the GUIDE Plus+
list
Press [1, 2 CH].
To see programme
Press [STATUS ].
information
TV Guide
Wed 13th
(programme name,
Spending Other People's Money
programme duration, BBC ONE Wales, Lifestyle
19:30-20:00, 30min.
broadcast time,
A flashy car salesman loses his cool when his stingy friend
takes over his wallet. He's forced to sell his possessions
description)
at a car boot sale to pay for food. [S]
(Programmes with the
symbol)
• Press [e] and [r] to scroll up and down.
To show other pages
Press [1 CH] (Previous) or [2 CH] (Next).
To return to the GUIDE Plus+ list
Press [STATUS ].
To exit the screen
To switch between Landscape view and
Portrait view
Press [GUIDE].
Page
Selected
programme
:
Press [RETURN].
Guide Change Display Mode
Portrait view
Page
View advertisement
Enter your postcode when using this function for the first time (➔ 84,
Post Code) and leave the unit in standby over night to capture the
information.
If you have already entered your postcode in Owner ID (➔ 13), you
do not have to enter again.
If you enter an incorrect postcode for your area, or no postcodes are
entered, advertisement may not be displayed correctly.
To display advertisement information
Press [OPTION].
• To display the latest advertisement, you will need to update the
information.
• To update the information continuously, this unit must be left in
standby mode over night.
To change advertisements
Press [e, r].
To return to the GUIDE Plus+ list
Press [RETURN].
Notes
• Some advertisements are for future programmes and you can set
the timer recording of the programmes using the advertisement
screen. Follow the on-screen instructions.
• The information from the GUIDE Plus+ system will not be lost even
if the unit is turned off at the mains outlet.
Tips
When the unit displays “No Data” or the empty GUIDE Plus+ list:
TV Guide: Landscape
Press [EXIT].
Wed 13/01/07
19:45
• The receipt of the GUIDE Plus+ system data is only possible via
the aerial input of this unit. The receipt of the GUIDE Plus+ data
via externally connected satellite receivers is not possible.
• The GUIDE Plus+ system setup will not work if the clock is not
set correctly or the wrong postcode is selected.
All Types
Wed 13th
All Services
Time:
BBC 1
Notes
38
Portrait view:
This is convenient to narrow down channels
to search for the programme you want to
watch.
2
+24 Hr
To return to the
previous screen
Landscape view:
The GUIDE Plus+ system offers detailed
information as if you see a TV programme
magazine. This is convenient to check the
status of Timer recording.
Logo of the Gemstar branding partner
BBC 2
The “empty” field
10 Channel 4
31 Channel 5
45
2
• Some digital broadcast may not send programme information.
• Set the timer recording manually (➔ 34, Manual timer recordings).
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 38
2008/04/23 19:00:08
Selecting the programme from the
desired programme type or category
This function lets you display a GUIDE Plus+ list sorted
by programme type (e.g. Movie, Sport) or category
(e.g. Free Services, Radio).
to display the
list of programme
type.
1a
(Yellow)
1b
(Blue)
to display the
list of categories.
All Types
All Services
All Types
Movie
News & Fact...
Entertainment
Sport
Children’s
Education
Lifestyle
Drama
All Services
Free Services
Radio
Data
Profile 1
Profile 2
Profile 3
Profile 4
• The programme list data are continuously downloaded in the
background when the unit is turned on. That means that the
programme list can sometimes change while you are looking at it.
If the “Overlapped Timer Recording”
screen appears
If you set a timer recording that will overlap with other
timer recordings using the GUIDE Plus+ system, the
“Overlapped Timer Recording” screen appears to help
you eliminate the overlapping.
Follow the on-screen instructions.
e, r to select the desired item.
Advanced Features
– A list appears with all programmes of the
selected item.
– When you select the landscape view, the
programmes that belong to the selected
programme type are highlighted.
e.g., Programme
type, “News &
Fact...” is selected
in step of
Landscape view.
TV Guide: Landscape
Wed 13/01/07
19:45
News & Fact...
Wed 13th
All Services
Emmerdale : In today’s show we will...
Time:
BBC 1
BBC 2
10 Channel 4
31 Channel 5
45
70
2
Prog. Type
+24 Hr
SELECT
RETURN
Category
Page
info
Guide Change Display Mode
Page
e, r, w, q to select the
programme.
Notes
The broadcasters allocate individual programmes to topic areas.
This function does not work properly unless the information which
distinguishes the programme type and categories sent from
broadcast stations is correct.
Tips
To return to the previous GUIDE Plus+ list before you have
selected the programme type or categories
Select “All Types” of the programme type and “All Services” of the
categories in step 2 above.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
Notes
• If the unit is disconnected from the AC mains, all programme data
are lost.
• The programme list is available immediately if this unit has found
a digital station and loaded the information in the memory. This
process can take a while depending on the particular station.
39
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 39
2008/04/23 19:00:09
Advanced HDD and Disc Playback
To view other pages
Menu Screens on the TV
DVD-V VCD
Generally, menu screens that appear on the TV may be
navigated as follows:
e. g.,
DVD TOP MENU
Press [e, r, w, q] to select “Previous” or “Next”, then press [OK].
(Thumbnail Display only)
– You can also press [u, i] to view other pages.
To exit the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen icons
Protected.
Play
Chapter List
Audio Tracks
Subtitles
Trailer
Not recorded due to recording protection (Digital
broadcasts, etc.)
×
*
DVD-V
“One time only recording” restriction (➔ 104, CPRM)
You can sometimes use the numbered buttons to
select an item.
Groups of titles ( HDD only)
Title that was recorded but has not yet been
played ( HDD only)
(NTSC) Title recorded using a different encoding system
(PAL) from that of the TV system currently selected on
the unit.
Alter the “TV System” setting on this unit to suit
(➔ 82).
VCD
Press the numbered buttons to select an item.
0
5
5
1
“15”:
Tips
To return to the menu screen
DVD-V Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
Press [RETURN].
VCD
Switching the Direct Navigator appearance
Notes
If “5” appears on the TV, the operation is prohibited by the
unit or disc.
Selecting Titles to Play
You can easily select and play recorded programmes
by using DIRECT NAVIGATOR.
HDD RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW -RW(VR)
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
All Titles
HDD
007
VIDEO
PICTURE
MUSIC
---
008
BBC 1 10/10 FRI
BBC 1 11/10 SAT
---
---
---
“Grouped Titles”/“All Titles” HDD
“Table Display”/“Thumbnail Display”
While the Direct Navigator screen is displayed
Press [OPTION].
Press [e, r] to select the item and press [OK].
e. g.,
HDD RAM
OK
RETURN
OPTION
Page 02/02
Select
All Titles
PICTURE/MUSIC
All Titles screen
Grouped Titles screen
Two or more titles recorded in Displays all titles.
the Daily/weekly or series timer (in Thumbnail Display)
recording mode are bundled
and displayed as one item.
(in Thumbnail Display)
Grouped Titles
VIDEO
PICTURE
MUSIC
Previous
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
HDD
007
Next
All Titles
008
VIDEO
PICTURE
MUSIC
009
Next
When “VIDEO” is not selected, press the “Red”
button to select “VIDEO”.
e, r, w, q to select the title you
want to watch, then
Tips
To select the title with the numbered buttons
RAM -R -R DL -RW(V)
e.g., HDD
-RW(VR) +R +R DL +RW
5:
[0] ➔ [0] ➔ [5] 5:
[0] ➔ [5]
15:
[0] ➔ [1] ➔ [5] 15: [1] ➔ [5]
115: [1] ➔ [1] ➔ [5]
40
“Table Display” or “Thumbnail Display”
“Grouped Titles” or “All Titles” HDD
Table Display
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
HDD
Previous
Currently recording.
Titles that have been rerouted to the HDD
(➔ 36, Relief Recording)
e, r, w, q to select an item, then
e. g., “5”:
It cannot be played because data is damaged, etc.
10.10.
Chantal Show
11.10.
Dolphines
2
ARD 10.10. FRI
ARD 11.10. SAT
ARD 18.10. SAT
---
---
---
Select the item marked with
and press [OK] to display
the bundled titles.
To sort the titles for easy searching
HDD (All Titles screen in Table Display only)
This function is convenient when searching for one title to
playback from many titles.
Press [OPTION].
Press [e, r] to select “Sort” and press [OK].
Press [e, r] to select the item and press [OK].
If you select an item other than “No.”
• The Direct Navigator screen will reappear after
playback of the selected title has finished. (You
cannot play titles continuously.)
• Skip and Time Slip will only function with the title
currently being played back.
• If you exit the Direct Navigator screen, or switch to
another Direct Navigator screen, the sort will be
cancelled.
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 40
2008/04/23 19:00:11
To play grouped titles HDD
Search
Press [e, r, w, q] to select the title and press
[OK].
To edit the group of titles HDD
HDD (Grouped Titles screen only)
Press [e, r, w, q] to select a title or a group and
press [h PAUSE].
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you
select all necessary titles.
• Press [h PAUSE] to cancel.
Press [OPTION].
or
During playback
– There are 5 search speeds. Each press increases the
search speed. ( +R +R DL +RW Up to 3 speeds)
– Press [q PLAY] to restart normal playback.
Tips
Depending on the disc, search may not be possible.
Skip
You can skip to the beginning (or the end) of Title/
Chapter. Skip is operated for each chapter.
Press [e, r] to select the option and press [OK].
Create Grouping:
Press [w, q] to select “Create Grouping” and press [OK].
Selected titles are bundled to form a group.
Release Grouping:
Press [w, q] to select “Release Grouping” and press [OK].
• When a group of titles has been selected, all the titles in
the group are released.
• When a title in a group has been selected, the title is
released from the group.
Regarding the group name
The name of the first title in the group is used as the group
name.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
HDD
10.10.
Chantal Show
Grouped Titles
11.10.
Dolphines
VIDEO
2
PICTURE
MUSIC
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
HDD
ARD 11.10. SAT
Dolphines
Grouped Titles
VIDEO
ARD 18.10. SAT
Dolphines
To change the group name
1 Press [e, r, w, q] to select the group and press
[OPTION].
2 Press [e, r] to select “Edit” and press [OK].
3 Press [e, r] to select “Enter Name” and press [OK].
4 Enter the name. (➔ 53, Entering Text)
• Even if the group name is changed, the title names in the
group will not be changed.
During playback or while paused
or
– Each press increases the number of skips.
– DivX: Press [u] to return to the beginning of the
title currently playing.
Quick View (Play x1.3)
HDD RAM
Allows you to increase the play speed slightly without
distorting the audio.
Advanced Features
Press [e, r, w, q] to select the group and press
[OK].
(Press and hold.)
During playback
– Press again to return to normal speed.
Direct Play
During playback, you can access specific titles or
scenes through direct entry of the numbered buttons.
• HDD
e.g.,
5:
[0] ➔ [0] ➔ [5]
15:
[0] ➔ [1] ➔ [5]
• MP3 and JPEG
e.g.,
5:
[0] ➔ [0] ➔ [0] ➔ [5]
15:
[0] ➔ [0] ➔ [1] ➔ [5]
• Other discs
Input a 2-digit number
e.g.,
5:
[0] ➔ [5]
15:
[1] ➔ [5]
Slow-motion Play
HDD RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW
DVD-V -RW(VR) VCD
While paused
or
– There are 5 slow-motion speeds. Each press
increases the speed.
– Press [q PLAY] to restart normal playback.
Notes
• If continued for approx. 5 minutes, slow-motion play pauses
automatically (except DVD-V VCD ).
• VCD allows slow-motion in the forward direction only.
41
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 41
2008/04/23 19:00:12
Advanced HDD and Disc Playback
Frame-by-Frame Viewing
HDD RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW
DVD-V -RW(VR) VCD
While paused
OK
– Each press shows the next or previous frame.
– Press and hold to advance or reverse frame-byframe in succession.
– Press [q PLAY] to restart normal playback.
Notes
• VCD allows Frame-by-Frame in the forward direction only.
Playing DivX, MP3 and Still Pictures (JPEG)
Showing the menu screen
-R -R DL CD
e.g. CD
Disc
Insert the disc.
If the disc contains
Play Video (DivX)
Play Pictures (JPEG)
different file types
Play Music (MP3)
Press [e, r] to select the
Copy Music (MP3)
item and press [OK].
Otherwise,
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
USB SD
Insert the USB memory or the SD card.
USB device
Play Video (DivX)
Play Pictures (JPEG)
Copy Pictures (JPEG)
Play Music (MP3)
Copy Music (MP3)
Update CD database on HDD
Time Slip
HDD RAM
-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL (This function does not
work with finalised discs.)
+RW -RW(VR)
Use to skip in 1-minute or 10-minute increments.
SD Card
Play Pictures (JPEG)
Copy Pictures (JPEG)
SELECT
OK
RETURN
SELECT
OK
RETURN
Press [e, r] to select the item and press [OK].
Changing the file type to play
FUNCTION MENU
-R -R DL CD USB
Play Mode : DivX
CD(DivX/JPEG/MP3)
Playback
Press [RETURN]
Recording
several times to exit
the menu.
Copy
Press [FUNCTION
MENU].
To Others
During playback
e, r to select the time, then
– Each time you press [e, r], the time
increases [e] or decreases [r] by 1 minute
intervals.
– Press and hold for 10-minute intervals.
Manual Skip
HDD RAM
-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL (This function does not
work with finalised discs.)
+RW -RW(VR)
OK
RETURN
-R -R DL CD
Press [e, r] to select “Playback” and press [OK].
USB
1 Press [e, r] to select “To Others” and press [OK].
2 Press [e, r] to select “USB device” and press [OK].
Press [e, r] to select the item and press [OK].
Playing DivX video contents
-R -R DL CD USB
You can play DivX video contents recorded with a computer
onto DVD-R, DVD-R DL, CD-R/CD-RW and USB memory.
Show DivX Menu screen.
(➔ above, Showing the menu screen)
Folder1 : 00025
DivX Menu
CD (DivX)
Name of Title
No.
001
Tree
ABC.avi
Skips approx. 1 minute forward with each press.
During playback
e, r to select the title, then
Play starts on the selected title.
Create Chapters
HDD RAM
When creating chapters in your favourite scenes, you
can easily reach the head of scene using [u, i]
(SKIP) or play on Chapter View (➔ 56).
During playback
• You can also select the title with the numbered buttons.
e.g., 5: [0] ➔ [0] ➔ [5]
15: [0] ➔ [1] ➔ [5]
Tips
To stop playing
Press [g STOP].
To show other pages
Press [u, i].
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
Notes
Tips
• Chapters cannot be created during EXT LINK standby (➔ 31).
42
• Picture sizes set at the recording time may prevent the unit from
showing pictures in the adequate aspect. You may be able to adjust
the aspect through the TV.
• Successive play is not possible.
• Playback is not possible if recording is performed on the HDD drive
or the DVD drive.
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 42
2008/04/23 19:00:14
Using the tree screen to find a folder
While the file list is displayed
Press [q] while a title is highlighted to display the
tree screen.
F: Selected folder no./Total folder no. including DivX title.
DivX Menu
CD (DivX)
Folder
Playing MP3
-R -R DL CD USB
You can play MP3 files recorded with a computer onto
a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, CD-R/CD-RW and USB memory.
• You cannot play MP3 files on the USB memory while
recording or copying.
F 1/21
Show MP3 Menu screen.
12.02.2004
Image001
Image002
Image003
Image004
Image005
Image006
Image007
Image008
Image009
Image010
DATA1
DATA2
(➔ 42, Showing the menu screen)
You cannot select
folders that contain no
compatible files.
OK
RETURN
Selected group
No.
Group
1 : My favourite
Total
Track
001-Both Ends Freezing
1
002-Lady Starfish
2
003-Life on Jupiter
3
004-Metal Glue
4
005-Paint It Yellow
5
006-Pyjamamama
6
007-Shrimps from Mars
7
008-Starry Blue
8
009-Velvet Cuppermine
9
010-Ziggy Starfish
10
MP3 Menu
CD
G
1
T
3
TOTAL
3/111
Press [e, r] to select a folder and press [OK].
The file list for the folder appears.
Tips
Number
0 – 9
Prev.
Next
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
ENTER
: Group No.
: Track No. in the
group
: Track No./Total
tracks in all
groups
Tree
Page 001/024
Regarding DivX VOD content
Display the unit’s registration code.
( 84, “DivX Registration” in “Others” tab)
Setup
Tuning
Disc
Picture
Sound
Display
Connection
VHS
Others
DivX Registration
8 alphanumeric characters
To learn more visit www.divx.com/vod
OK
RETURN
• After playing DivX VOD content for the first time, another
registration code is then displayed in “DivX Registration”. Do not
use this registration code to purchase DivX VOD content. If you use
this code to purchase DivX VOD content, and then play the content
on this unit, you will no longer be able to play any content that you
purchased using the previous code.
• If you purchase DivX VOD content using a registration code
different from this unit’s code, you will not be able to play this
content. (“Authorisation Error.” is displayed.)
Regarding DivX content that can only be played a set number of
times
Some DivX VOD content can only be played a set number of times.
When you play this content, the remaining number of plays is
displayed. You cannot play this content when the number of
remaining plays is zero. (“Rental Expired.” is displayed.)
When playing this content
• The number of remaining plays is reduced by one if
– you press [^ DVD/VHS].
– you press [g STOP].
– you press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
– you press [u] or [t, y] etc. and arrive at another content or
the start of the content being played.
– timer recording starts on the HDD.
– you press [DRIVE SELECT] to change the drive.
• Resume functions do not work.
Tips
•“
” indicates the track currently playing.
To stop playing
Press [g STOP].
To exit the menu screens
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
DivX (R) Video On Demand
Your registration code is : XXXXXXXX
e, r to select a track, then
to play.
Advanced Features
DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) content is encrypted for copyright
protection. In order to play DivX VOD content on this unit, you first
need to register the unit.
Follow the on line instructions for purchasing DivX VOD content
to enter the unit’s registration code and register the unit. For more
information about DivX VOD, visit www.divx.com/vod
To view other pages
Press [u, i].
To select the track with the numbered buttons
e.g.,
“5”:
[0] ➔ [0] ➔ [0] ➔ [5]
“15”:
[0] ➔ [0] ➔ [1] ➔ [5]
Using the Tree Screen to Find a Group
From the track list
q while a track is highlighted to
display the tree screen.
MP3 Menu
CD
G
1
T
1
TOTAL
1/49
Number
0 – 9
Tree
G
1/7
CD-RW for Check
111
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
A: Selected Group No./Total Group No.
If the group has no compatible track, “--” is
displayed as the group number.
B: You cannot select a group that contains no
compatible track.
e, r to select a group, then
– The track list for the selected group appears.
Tips
To return to the track list
Press [RETURN].
43
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 43
2008/04/23 19:00:17
Playing DivX, MP3 and Still Pictures (JPEG)
Playing still pictures
Notes
HDD RAM -R -R DL CD USB SD
• You can play still pictures recorded with a computer
onto a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, CD-R/CD-RW and USB
memory.
Show Album View screen.
-R -R DL CD USB SD
• You can use 8 MB to 2 GB SD memory cards, 4 GB to 16 GB
SDHC memory cards (➔ 17). For inserting and removing SD cards
(➔ 89).
• Still pictures cannot be played during recording or copying.
Tips
DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen icons
Picture and folder protected.
(➔ 42, Showing the menu screen)
Album that has not yet been viewed ( HDD RAM )
HDD RAM
While stopped
1 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive.
2 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
When “PICTURE” is not selected, press the
“Green” button to select “PICTURE”.
001
VIDEO
Total 5
Date: 1. 1.2006
MUSIC
Regarding Album
View screen
right
Total 3
Date: 1. 2.2006
---
---
---
Page 01/01
Previous
OK
PICTURE
---
002
OPTION
RETURN
Next
Press OK to show
pictures.
Slide Show
e, r, w, q to select the album,
then
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Picture (JPEG) View
HDD
PICTURE
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
----
----
----
Previous
OK
RETURN
e.g., HDD
103__DVD
Album Name
0001
Page 001/001
OPTION
To return to the Album View screen or Picture (JPEG) View
screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the menu screens
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
Album View screen
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Album View
HDD
To stop viewing a picture
Press [g STOP].
Next
To view other pages
Press [e, r, w, q] to select “Previous” or “Next”, then press [OK].
– You can also press [u, i] to view other pages.
To select the still picture or album with the numbered buttons
Album
e.g.,
“5”:
[0] ➔ [0] ➔ [5]
“15”:
[0] ➔ [1] ➔ [5]
“115”:
[1] ➔ [1] ➔ [5]
Still picture
e.g.,
“5”:
[0] ➔ [0] ➔ [0] ➔ [5]
“15”:
[0] ➔ [0] ➔ [1] ➔ [5]
“115”:
[0] ➔ [1] ➔ [1] ➔ [5]
“1115”: [1] ➔ [1] ➔ [1] ➔ [5]
Regarding Album View screen
Still pictures copied from USB memories and SD cards are grouped
by the shooting date in the HDD or DVD-RAM.
You can arrange these still pictures and create an album (➔ 59).
HDD RAM
Slide Show
Grouped by date
002
e, r, w, q to select the still
picture, then
Total 68
Date: 10.10. 2007
Number of pictures/Shooting date
HDD RAM -R -R DL CD USB SD
Album
002
10.10. 07
Total 24
Zoological park
Shooting date/Number of pictures/Album name
• Depending on the digital camera, the editing software on the PC
etc., the information about the recording date may not be displayed.
In this case, the date will appear as [--.--.--].
44
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 44
2008/04/23 19:00:18
Slide Show
Zoom
You can display still pictures one by one with regular
interval.
While playing a picture
From the Album View screen
e, r, w, q to select an album, then
To zoom in:
Tips
To stop the Slide Show
Press [g STOP].
To change the rate at which pictures are displayed
1 In step 2 above, press [e, r] to select “Slide Show Setting”, then
press [OK].
2 Press [e, r] to select “Display interval”.
3 Press [w, q] to select desired interval (0 to 30 seconds), then
press [OK].
To repeat play
1 In step 2 above, press [e, r] to select “Slide Show Setting”, then
press [OK].
2 Press [e, r] to select “Repeat Play”.
3 Press [w, q] to select “On”, then press [OK].
FUNCTION MENU
e, r to select “Zoom
in”, then
Rotate RIGHT
Rotate LEFT
Zoom in
OK
Notes
To return to the picture to its original size
Press [e, r] to select “Zoom out” in step
and press [OK].
• When zooming in, the still picture may be cut off.
• “Zoom in” information is not stored.
• “Zoom in” and “Zoom out” do not work with images that have a
resolution larger than 640 x 480 pixels.
Picture Properties
Picture information is shown (e.g., shooting date).
Advanced Features
You can also start Slide Show with the following
steps.
1From the Album View screen
Press [e, r, w, q] to select the desired album,
then press [OPTION].
Press
[e, r] to select “Start Slide Show”, then
2
press [OK].
While playing a picture
twice to display picture properties.
18:53:50 11/10.
Folder - Picture No. 103 - 0006
Date
1/ 1/ 2005
No.
3/9
Shooting Date
Rotate Pictures
again to exit.
While playing a picture
Notes
• Depending on the camera or editing software; shooting dates may
not be displayed correctly.
e, r to select “Rotate
RIGHT” or “Rotate
LEFT”, then
FUNCTION MENU
Rotate RIGHT
Rotate LEFT
Zoom in
OK
Notes
To return to the picture to its original position
Press [e, r] to select the opposite rotation in step
and press
[OK].
• Rotation information will not be stored.
– -R -R DL CD USB Still pictures
– When disc or album is protected
– When played on other equipment
– When copying pictures
– When changing date
• If you remove the SD card while the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen
is displayed, picture rotation information may not be properly stored.
Remove the SD card after you exit the DIRECT NAVIGATOR
screen.
45
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 45
2008/04/23 19:00:20
Advanced Video Cassette Playback
Fast-forward/Rewind
With the unit stopped
Jet Rewind
Video tapes will rewind to the beginning of the tape at
higher-speed.
to fast-forward the tape.
to rewind the tape.
Slow-motion Play
During playback
Press and hold for about
2 seconds.
– Press [q PLAY] to restart normal playback.
Notes
Slow-motion Play is automatically cancelled after 10 minutes.
Cue/Review
You can quickly review a portion of the video just
played or cue to later portions of the tape.
During playback
to cue to later portions of the
tape.
to review a portion just played.
– Press [q PLAY] to restart normal playback.
Notes
• Depending on the tape or an operating condition, the rewind speed
may change somewhat.
• The tape counter is reset to “0:00.00” when the tape is rewound to
the beginning.
• Depending on the tape, this function may not work.
VHS Index Search System (VISS)
The unit automatically records special index signals on
a tape every time a recording is started (via [* REC],
or a timer recording). The index search function
makes use of these index signals to help you find the
beginning of a desired programme quickly and easily.
While stopped or during normal play
or
– The unit automatically starts playback after the
index signal is found.
– Each press increases the number of skips.
– Press [g STOP] to cancel the search.
Notes
• Up to 20 index signals can be searched in either direction.
• If you overshoot in either direction, press the opposite button to
correct.
• For correct operation, make recordings of at least 5 minutes to
ensure that index signals are not spaced too closely together.
S-VHS Quasi Playback (SQPB)
Notes
Cue/review is automatically cancelled after 10 minutes.
Tips
For quicker operation
• Hold [t, y] to start cue/review and release the button to restart
normal playback.
Jet Search
You can high speed search a video in the forward or
the reverse direction.
During playback
twice to Jet Search forward.
twice to Jet Search in reverse.
– Press [q PLAY] to restart normal playback.
Notes
46
• Depending on your TV, the picture may not be in colour or may
be distorted.
• Jet Search is automatically cancelled after 10 minutes.
This unit can play tapes recorded in S-VHS.
• Some picture noise may occur depending on the type
of tape used.
• It is not possible to fully obtain the high resolution
S-VHS is capable of.
• This unit cannot record in S-VHS.
Repeat Playback
When the tape reaches the end of the programme, it will
automatically rewind to the beginning and play again.
During playback or while stopped
Press and hold for about 5 or
more seconds.
– Repeat Playback goes on indefinitely until you
cancel it.
– The “R o” indication appears on screen.
– Press [g STOP] to stop play.
Notes
Only works if there is at least 5 seconds blank space at the end of
the programme.
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 46
2008/04/23 19:00:21
Adjusting the Playback Picture
Manual Tracking
The unit usually makes tracking adjustments
automatically, but you may need to do it manually if
noise appears on a tape recorded on other equipment.
During playback
Changing Audio during Playback
Press and hold for about 5 or
more seconds.
The audio changes as follows.
L R (Stereo)
L
R
No display (Normal audio track)
On-screen Display Indicators
or
Press and hold until the picture noise
disappears.
to display on-screen indicators.
To return to auto tracking:
VHS
LR SP
(simultaneously).
Notes
Advanced Features
Tips
To remove the noise from a paused picture:
Start slow-motion (➔ 46), then adjust the tracking.
0:00.22
VHS drive indicator
• This function may not work with some tapes.
• You can also adjust the tracking with [CH 1, 2] on the main unit.
Vertical Locking Adjustment
Adjust the vertical synchronisation to stop the picture
from shaking while paused.
While paused
or
Press and hold until the shaking
stops.
To return to the standard position:
(simultaneously).
Notes
L and R indicators
The Left (L) and Right (R) indicators show which sound mode
is selected as follows:
L R (Stereo): Hi-Fi stereo audio
L –:
Mono L audio of the Hi-Fi stereo audio
– R:
Mono R audio of the Hi-Fi stereo audio
– – (Normal): Normal audio
Recording mode (➔ 28)
Operation status
Shows the tape counter and remaining tape time
Pressing [STATUS ] to cycle the display as follows:
No display
Tape counter
Remaining tape time
• Press [ DELETE] to reset the tape counter (elapsed time)
to “0:00.00”. The tape counter is automatically reset when
inserting a video cassette.
Tips
To exit on-screen indicators
Press [STATUS ] several times.
Notes
Remaining tape time display
• The displayed time is approximate.
• The displayed time will be incorrect if you set the wrong tape length
in “Tape Length” in the Setup menu (➔ 83) and if the tape is of poor
quality.
• This function may not work with some tapes.
• You can also adjust vertical synchronisation with [CH 1, 2] on the
main unit.
47
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 47
2008/04/23 19:00:23
Playing music
To play music CD
e, r to select the track, then
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
• You can also select the track with the numbered buttons.
CD
e.g., “5”: [0] ➔ [5], “15”: [1] ➔ [5]
Insert a music CD.
MP3
e.g.,
The menu is automatically displayed.
“5”:
“15”:
“115”:
“1115”:
CD
Play Music
[0] ➔ [0] ➔ [0] ➔ [5]
[0] ➔ [0] ➔ [1] ➔ [5]
[0] ➔ [1] ➔ [1] ➔ [5]
[1] ➔ [1] ➔ [1] ➔ [5]
Copy Music
Tips
SELECT
OK
RETURN
e, r to select “Play Music”, then
The unit starts accessing the Gracenote® Database
(➔ 72) and searches for the title information.
If search results indicate that multiple titles were found
Press [e, r] to select the appropriate title and
press [OK].
e, r to select the track, then
• You can also select the track with the numbered buttons.
e.g., “5”: [0] ➔ [5], “15”: [1] ➔ [5]
Tips
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
Notes
• You cannot play music tracks on HDD while recording or copying.
• When this unit is not operated for approximately 5 minutes while the
screen is being displayed, the screen saver is displayed if “Screen
Saver” is set to “On” in the Setup menu. To return to the previous
screen, press [OK].
Useful functions during music play
Operations during play
Stop
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
Playback continues.
To play music recorded on HDD
• If [g STOP] is pressed several times, the position
is cleared.
Pause
Copying music to HDD ➔ 72
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD drive.
Search
Skip
When “MUSIC” is not selected, press the
“Yellow” button to select “MUSIC”.
e, r to select “Play CD on HDD”
or “Play MP3 on HDD”, then
e, r to select the album (CD)/
group (MP3), then
• You can also select the album (CD)/group (MP3) with the
numbered buttons.
e.g.,
“5”:
[0] ➔ [0] ➔ [5]
“15”:
[0] ➔ [1] ➔ [5]
“115”:
[1] ➔ [1] ➔ [5]
48
Press [g STOP].
The stopped position is memorized. Press
[q PLAY] to restart from this position.
• The position is cleared if the unit is turned off.
Press [h PAUSE].
Press [h PAUSE] again or [q PLAY] to restart
play.
Press [t] or [y].
The speed increases up to 5 steps.
Press [q PLAY] to restart play.
During play or while paused, press [u]
or [i].
Skip to the track you want to play. Each press
increases the number of skips.
Repeat Play You can select the item which you want to
repeat.
HDD
While playing
1 Press [OPTION].
2 Press [e, r] to select “Repeat Play
Setting” and press [OK].
3 Press [e, r] to select the item and press [OK].
• Select “Off” to cancel repeat play.
You can change the order of the Album View
Sort
(CD)/Group View (MP3) alphabetically.
HDD
While Album View (CD) screen or Group View
(MP3) screen is displayed
1 Press [OPTION].
2 Press [e, r] to select “Sort” and press [OK].
3 Press [e, r] to select “Album Name” or
“Group Name” and press [OK].
To cancel the sorted screen
Press [e, r] to select “No.” and press [OK].
Properties
While Track View (CD/MP3) screen is displayed
1 Press [OPTION].
HDD CD
2 Press [e, r] to select “Properties” and
press [OK].
To exit the Properties screen, press [OK].
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 48
2008/04/23 19:00:25
Convenient Functions
USB device
By using the FUNCTION MENU window you may
access the main functions quickly and easily.
With the unit stopped
FUNCTION MENU
Remain 30:00 SP
HDD
Playback
Recording
FUNCTION MENU
Remain 30:00 SP
HDD
Delete
Copy
To Others
OK
RETURN
Playback
TV Guide
Recording
Advanced Copy
Delete
Playlists
Flexible Rec
Copy
DV Auto Rec
To Others
OK
Setup
HDD Management
RETURN
e, r to select a menu item, then
– If you select “To Others”, press [e, r] to
select a menu item and press [OK].
Playback
40
You can select and play recorded programmes,
change the Play Mode ( DivX , JPEG , MP3 ) etc.
Recording
34
You can make timer recording settings.
Delete
26
You can delete recorded titles using Delete Navigator.
Copy
65
You can copy recorded titles using Copy Navigator.
TV Guide
19, 22
You can easily find programmes you want to watch
and set them for timer recording.
Advanced Copy
66
You can make a copying list and then copy.
Copy New Pictures
70
You can copy the new still pictures on an SD card.
Playlists
57
You can create playlists by grouping your favourite chapters.
42
This unit displays the menu to help you start USB operations.
• “USB device” appears when a compatible USB device is connected.
To pause the TV programme you are
watching—Pause Live TV
You can pause the TV programme you are watching using
this unit’s tuner and resume later by temporarily saving it
on the HDD. This is useful when you have to briefly stop
watching TV to run an errand.
If you stop Pause Live TV function, then the TV
programme temporarily saved on the HDD will be deleted.
Turn on the television and select the appropriate AV
input to suit the connections to this unit.
Turn on this unit and press [1, 2 CH] to select the
channel.
When you want to pause the TV programme
Press [h PAUSE]
HDD
ARD
LR
This icon indicates that
the Pause Live TV is
working.
Pause Live TV
When you want to resume
Press [q PLAY].
– The programme is saved on the HDD in SP recording
mode (➔ 28) regardless of the recording mode and the
drive selected before starting saving.
– At least 1 hour up to 8 hours of TV programmes can
be temporarily saved on the HDD. (This may vary
depending on the HDD free space.)
Advanced Features
FUNCTION MENU Windows
Operations during Pause Live TV
Search
Pause
Press [t, y]
Press [h PAUSE].
• Press [q PLAY] to restart.
Quick View Press and hold [q PLAY].
(PLAY ×1.3) • Press again to return to the normal speed.
Slow-motion While paused, press [t] or [y].
The speed increases up to 5 steps.
• Press [q PLAY] to restart play.
Stop Pause 1 Press [g STOP].
Live TV
2 Press [w, q] to select “Yes” and press
[OK].
Flexible Rec
30
The unit sets the best possible picture quality that
fits the recording within the remaining disc space.
DV Auto Rec
33
DV automatic recording function
Setup
78
You can change the unit’s settings using Setup menu.
HDD/DVD Management, Card Management
76
You can manage the HDD, discs or cards through
formatting, finalising and other operations.
Copy Music CD
72
You can start copying music CD to the HDD.
Notes
• The Pause Live TV function automatically stops when a timer
recording starts.
• The Pause Live TV function does not work if the clock is not set.
• The Pause Live TV function does not work
– while recording
– while timer recording
– while EXT LINK recording, etc.
• You cannot change audio or subtitle during resume play.
• The first 30 minutes is deleted every 30 minutes after the HDD is
full or the saving lasts 8 hours.
• The Pause Live TV function stops automatically 24 hours after
started.
49
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 49
2008/04/23 19:00:26
Linked Operations with the TV (VIERA Link “HDAVI Control™”/Q Link)
You can enjoy linked operations with the TV and receiver by using VIERA Link or Q Link.
What is VIERA Link “HDAVI Control” ?
VIERA Link
VIERA Link “HDAVI Control” is a convenient function that
offers linked operations of this unit, and a Panasonic TV
(VIERA) or receiver under “HDAVI Control”. You can use this
function by connecting the equipment with the HDMI cable.
See the operating instructions for connected equipment for
operational details.
• VIERA Link “HDAVI Control”, based on the control functions
provided by HDMI which is an industry standard known as HDMI
CEC (Consumer Electronics Control), is a unique function that
we have developed and added. As such, its operation with other
manufacturers’ equipment that supports HDMI CEC cannot be
guaranteed.
• This unit supports “HDAVI Control 3” function.
“HDAVI Control 3” is the newest standard (current as of
December, 2007) for Panasonic’s HDAVI Control compatible
equipment.
This standard is compatible with Panasonic’s conventional
HDAVI equipment.
• Please refer to individual manuals for other manufacturers’
equipment supporting VIERA Link function.
Preparation:
What is Q Link?
Q Link
Q Link is a convenient function that offers linked operations of
this unit and a Panasonic TV. You can use this function by
connecting the equipment with a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable.
Preparation:
Connect this unit to your TV with a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable
(➔ 10, 11).
Notes
The following systems from other manufacturers have similar function
to Q Link from Panasonic.
For details, refer to your television’s operating instructions or consult
your dealer.
• Q Link (registered trademark of Panasonic)
• DATA LOGIC (registered trademark of Metz)
• Easy Link (registered trademark of Philips)
• Megalogic (registered trademark of Grundig)
• SMARTLINK (registered trademark of Sony)
1. Connect this unit to your TV using an HDMI cable and a fully
wired 21-pin Scart cable (➔ 12), or to your receiver using an
HDMI cable (➔ 88).
2. Set “VIERA Link” to “On” (➔ 83). (The default setting is “On”.)
3. Set the “HDAVI Control” operations on the connected
equipment (e.g., TV).
• When using HDMI2 terminal of VIERA as “HDAVI Control”,
set the input channel to HDMI2 on VIERA.
4. Turn on all “HDAVI Control” compatible equipment and select
this unit’s input channel on the connected TV so that the
“HDAVI Control” function works properly.
Also when the connection or settings are changed, repeat
this procedure.
(When the TV is on)
Easy playback
VIERA Link
Q Link
(When the TV is off)
Power on link
VIERA Link
Q Link
Power off link
VIERA Link
Q Link
When the TV is off and the following operations are performed, the TV will
automatically turn on and display the corresponding action.
(Picture or sound may not be available for the first few seconds.)
Press [FUNCTION MENU] 1, [q PLAY] 2, [DIRECT NAVIGATOR], [GUIDE],
[PROG/CHECK] etc.
When you turn the TV off, the unit is also automatically turned off. The unit is automatically
turned off even if the FUNCTION MENU screen, the status message or the on-screen
display is displayed, during playback or when the unit is set to a timer recording.
Even if the TV is turned off, the unit will not be turned off at the same time when recording, copying,
finalising, etc.
• When this unit is connected to an “HDAVI Control” compatible Panasonic receiver with an HDMI cable,
the receiver will also turn off.
Direct TV Recording
VIERA Link
Q Link
When the TV is on and the following operations are performed, the TV’s input will
automatically switch to HDMI input mode ( VIERA Link ) or AV input mode ( Q Link )
and the TV displays the corresponding action.
(Picture or sound may not be available for the first few seconds.)
Press [FUNCTION MENU] 1, [q PLAY] 2, [DIRECT NAVIGATOR], [GUIDE],
[PROG/CHECK] etc.
3
This function allows you to immediately start recording the programme that you are
viewing on the TV (➔ 29).
• The titles are recorded to the HDD.
To stop recording
Press [ g STOP].
1 This button is available only when this unit is on.
2 When this button is pressed, the playback image is not immediately displayed on the screen and it may not be possible to watch the contents
from where playback started.
In this case, press [u] or [t] to go back to where playback started.
3 This function is available with the TV which has “HDAVI Control 3” function.
50
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 50
2008/04/23 19:00:28
Easy control only with VIERA remote control
If you connect this unit to the TV that has “HDAVI Control 2” or “HDAVI Control 3” function with an HDMI cable, you can enjoy
using more convenient functions.
You can operate this unit using the following buttons on the TV remote control.
[e, r, w, q], [OK], [RETURN], [EXIT], [OPTION], and the coloured buttons.
Use the remote control for this unit to operate any other buttons (numbered buttons, etc.) that are not listed above.
• The operation of this unit may be interrupted when you press buttons on the TV remote control other than those listed above.
• The TV displays the TV tuner’s picture when the linked operation is finished.
• Refer to TV operating instructions for operating the TV.
Using the FUNCTION MENU window to operate this unit
VIERA Link
This function is available with the TV which has “HDAVI Control 2” or “HDAVI Control 3” function.
1 Display this unit’s “FUNCTION MENU” window using the TV remote control.
• If this unit is turned off, this unit will turn on automatically.
2 Select the item you want to operate with the TV remote control, and press [OK].
Pause live TV programme
VIERA Link
This function is available with the TV which has “HDAVI Control 3” function.
Refer to “Notes” on page 49, “To pause the TV programme you are watching—Pause Live TV”.
Using the OPTION menu window to operate this unit
Advanced Features
You can pause the TV programme you are watching and resume later by temporarily saving it on the HDD. This is useful when
you have to briefly stop watching TV to run an errand.
If you stop the Pause Live TV function, then the TV programme temporarily saved on the HDD will be deleted.
1 When you want to pause the TV programme
Turn on the “Pause Live TV” function using the TV remote control.
• This unit turns on automatically.
Tips
2 When you want to resume
Display the Control Panel (➔ below) and press [OK].
To stop Pause Live TV
• The TV programme resumes.
Press [r] while the Control Panel
is displayed.
VIERA Link
This function is available with the TV which has “HDAVI Control 2” or “HDAVI Control 3” function.
By using the TV remote control, you can play discs using the “Control Panel” (➔ below) and display the Top Menu for DVD-Video.
1 Press [OPTION].
Control Panel
FUNCTION MENU
Top Menu
Menu
Drive Select
OK
RETURN
Control Panel
Control Panel is displayed
(➔ below).
FUNCTION
MENU
FUNCTION MENU window is
displayed (➔ above).
Top Menu
DVD-V
Top Menu is displayed
(➔ 40).
Menu
DVD-V
Menu is displayed (➔ 40).
Drive Select
Select the HDD, DVD or SD
drive.
Rotate RIGHT/
Rotate LEFT
(JPEG)
Rotate the still pictures
(➔ 45).
Zoom in /Zoom
out (JPEG)
Enlarge or shrink the still
picture (➔ 45).
• You cannot use the OPTION menu while the Top Menu for DVD-Video is displayed and while DVD-Video is copied.
2 Select an item then press [OK].
Using the Control Panel
Using the “Control Panel”, you can operate search backward, search forward, stop, etc, with the TV remote control.
Perform steps 1 and 2 of “Using the OPTION menu window to operate this unit” (➔ above).
The Control Panel is displayed (➔ right).
Control Panel
• While playing a title or DVD-Video, etc.
Pause
Exit
– [e]: Pause, [r]: Stop, [w]: Search backward, [q]: Search forward, [OK]: Play, [EXIT]: Exit the screen.
• While playing still pictures
Search
Search
– [r]: Stop, [w]: View previous picture, [q]: View next picture, [EXIT]: Exit the screen.
Play
Stop
Notes
• These functions may not work normally depending on the equipment condition.
• About “HDAVI Control” function, read the manual of the connected equipment (e.g., TV) too.
When you want to leave the TV on and set only this unit to standby mode
Press [^ DVD/VHS] on this unit’s remote control and set to standby mode.
When not using “HDAVI Control”
Set “VIERA Link” in the Setup menu to “Off” (➔ 83).
51
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 51
2008/04/23 19:00:29
Information Messages
Digital Channel Information
Notes
You can display the information about programmes
(programme name, broadcast time, etc.).
With the unit stopped
to show the screen information.
When the digital channel information is being
displayed,
– Press [STATUS ] again and detailed information
will be displayed (only when “info ” is displayed).
Status message ( 53)
• Everytime you change the channel, digital channel information
appears automatically. They disappear again after a short time.
• If you record a digital radio broadcast or a digital broadcast that
is not being received correctly, digital channel information is also
recorded and will remain visible during playback.
Showing the Digital TEXT (MHEG)
When “TXT” appears in digital channel information
to show the Digital TEXT.
– Press again to hide.
HDD
1: 07 SP
1 DVB
BBC ONE Wales
“info
1 BBC ONE Wales
Wales today
17:00 – 17:15
STATUS
17:11 All Services
Change Category
info
NOW
Multi Audio
TXT
Subtitle
STATUS
Notes
”
Tips
1 BBC ONE Wales
Wales today
17:00 - 17:15
17:11 All Services
Exit info
NOW
In the 1970’s, John Belshi, working with National Lampoon, mol with Dan
Aykuoyd, then a host of a children’s tv program, and owner of a
speakeasy called the “505 Club”. Dan from Toronto, put on a record
called Straight Up. by the Downchild Blues Band.
Multi Audio
Digital channel information
• During recording the Digital TEXT function is not possible.
• The Digital TEXT function depends on respective stations.
• When subtitle is on or the digital channel information is displayed,
the Digital TEXT function does not work.
TXT
Subtitle
Detailed information
• You can also use the numbered buttons to select another page.
Quickly access to certain topic areas and navigation
Use colour buttons according to on-screen instructions.
Showing Subtitles
Programme name and Broadcast time
Channel and Signal Quality ( 53)
Station Name
To view another page of Digital TEXT (MHEG)
Press [e, r] to select another page and press [OK].
Category
1 BBC ONE Wales No Signal 19:03 All Services
Change Category
BBC News
19:00 - 19:30
info
NOW
Encrypted
Multi Audio
TXT
Subtitle
When “Subtitle” appears in digital channel
information
to show subtitles.
– Press again to hide.
Encrypted
Multi Audio
TXT
Subtitle
During scrambled broadcasting
(You cannot watch the broadcast).
Programme is broadcast in multi-channel
sound ( 75, DVB Multi Audio).
Digital TEXT is possible.
Subtitle can be displayed.
Notes
• Programmes are recorded with subtitles when you record them with
the subtitles on.
• You cannot switch subtitles during timer recording.
Tips
Tips
To switch information of the current programme and the next
programme
Press [w, q].
• NOW: current programme
• NEXT: next programme
To select the information of another channel
Press [e, r].
To select subtitle language (➔ 82, DVB Preferred Subtitles)
Changing the Category
You can select one of your favourite channels by
changing the category [such as Free Services, Radio
and Registered Profiles (➔ 78)].
When digital channel information is displayed
• Press [OK] to watch the selected channel.
To change the length of time digital channel information is
displayed for
(➔ 82, On-Screen Messages)
(Blue)
to change the category.
– Press [e, r] to select the channel.
52
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 52
2008/04/23 19:00:30
Entering Text
You can give names to recorded titles, etc.
Signal Quality
No Signal
The digital broadcast signal is not being
received.
Bad Signal Due to poor signal conditions, etc., the digital
broadcast signal has been interrupted.
No Service No broadcasts are currently available.
When viewing the Enter Name screen.
Enter Name
_
Top Menu Preview
1 1
2
3
5
6
7
2 A
B
C
a
b
c
E
3 D
4
8
9
0
F
d
e
f
/
4 G
H
I
g
h
i
#
Delete
5 J
K
L
j
l
If “No Signal” or “Bad Signal” is displayed, check the following;
Set
6 M N
O
k
m n
o
[
]
_
• Check that the aerial is correctly positioned.
• Check that the current digital broadcast channel is correctly broadcasting.
7 P
Q
R
p
q
r
s
(
8 T
U
V
t
u
v
{
}
)
-
0
9 W X
0 . ,
Y
Z
w
x
?
!
"
'
y
:
z
;
\
`
9
SELECT
Status Messages
During playback and/or recording
Keep pressing to cycle through
available displays.
HDD
REC
1 DVB
BBC ONE Wales
Current media
Shows current recording or play status.
DVD REC
Status of the other drive
Remain
T2
13:50 XP
0:00.10 XP
RETERN
Press [e, r, w, q] to select a character, then press
[OK].
– Repeat this step to enter other characters.
Press [ g STOP] when you’ve finished entering
text.
Tips
Using the numbered buttons to enter characters
e.g.: entering the letter “R”
HDD
REC
1 DVB
BBC ONE Wales
Advanced Features
The current date and time
0:05.14 XP
|
1. Press [7] to move to the 7th row.
2. Press [7] twice to highlight “R”.
3. Press [OK].
Channel information
Remaining recording time and recording mode
(e.g.: “13:50 XP” indicates 13 hours and 50 minutes in XP mode)
• Disc remaining time may slightly differ between
different models.
T1
&
@
Space
OK
The following messages and displays appear to let you
know what operations are being performed and the
status of the unit.
18:53:50 11/10
S
%
$
To enter a space
Press [ DELETE], then press [OK].
To delete a character
Press [h PAUSE] on a character in the name field.
To cancel in the middle
Press [RETURN].
Characters will not be saved.
DVD REC
Elapsed recording
time and recording mode
Elapsed play time
and recording mode
• When using Pause Live TV
The time when the picture currently displayed was broadcast
Play
15:05:13
Live
15:10:46
Current time
No Display
Notes
If you enter a long name, only part of it is shown in the
Top Menu after finalisation (➔ 77). When entering a title
name, the name that will appear in the Top Menu can be
previewed in “Top Menu Preview” window.
Enter Name
_
Chapter
1_
Top Menu Preview
1 1
Chapter 1
2 A
2
3
B
C
3 D
E
F
4 G
H
I
4
5
6
7
a
b
c
8
d
e
f
/
g
h
i
#
9
0
*
%
$
&
New Service Message
When a new DVB channel is added this unit will be informed
automatically. Then the confirmation message appears.
If you select “Yes” on the display, Auto-Setup starts (All
channel settings and all created profiles are deleted. The
timer recording programmes are also cancelled.).
New Service
A new DVB Service has been found.
Start DVB Auto-Setup?
Selecting DVB Auto-Setup will delete
current Profile settings and all Timer Programmes.
Yes
No
OK
RETURN
Tips
The display/hide setting can be changed (➔ 82).
53
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 53
2008/04/23 19:00:31
Titles−Editing
HDD RAM
-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL (You can not edit finalised discs.)
+RW -RW(VR)
You can edit titles on the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen:
deleting unwanted parts of titles such as commercials,
changing Thumbnail, dividing and deleting titles, etc.
Title Operations
Delete
HDD RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW
Use to delete unneeded titles.
Important: Once deleted, contents cannot be recovered.
Tips
Perform steps
Maximum numbers of items on a disc
Titles
HDD
RAM -R -R DL -RW(V)
+R +R DL +RW
499
99
49
Notes
Preparation:
• RAM Release protection (disc, cartridge ➔ 76, Setting Protection).
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive.
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
HDD RAM When “VIDEO” is not selected, press
the “Red” button to select “VIDEO”.
Press [e, r, w, q] to select a title.
– Multiple editing (➔ below, Tips)
Press [OPTION] to display the menu list.
• To view more options
– Press [e, r] to select “Edit”, then press [OK].
• Items that cannot be selected are grey.
Enter Name
Set up Protection
Delete
Partial Delete
Properties
Change Thumbnail
Edit
Divide Title
Create Group
Release Grouping
Chapter View
Table Display
All Titles
of “Accessing the Title View” (➔ left).
Press [w] to select “Delete”, then press [OK] to
confirm.
Accessing the Title View
Cancel Protection
−
Press [e, r] to select “Delete”, then press [OK].
•
HDD RAM Deleting an item increases the available
disc space by the amount of space taken by the item
deleted.
• -R -R DL +R +R DL Available disc space does not
increase after deletion.
• -RW(V) +RW Available disc space increases when you
delete the last title (the recording space may increase
slightly when other titles are deleted).
• Available disc space may not increase after erasing a
short title.
Properties
HDD RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW -RW(VR)
Title information is shown (e.g., date, time).
Perform steps
Refer to “Title
Operations”
( right).
To edit the group of titles HDD
( 41)
Switching the Direct Navigator
appearance ( 40)
PICTURE/MUSIC
If you select “Chapter View” ( 56)
−
of “Accessing the Title View” (➔ left).
Press [e, r] to select “Properties”, then press
[OK].
Delete
Properties
Properties
Football
Edit
Create Group
Release Grouping
No.
Date
Name
001
Time
12/11/2006 SUN Rec time
T5
18:07
2:15(SP)
Chapter View
OK
RETURN
Table Display
All Titles
Notes
• You cannot edit during recording or copying, etc.
• +R +R DL Management information is recorded in unused
sections when you edit discs. The available space on these
discs decreases each time you edit their contents.
We recommend that you edit on the HDD and then copy to disc.
Tips
To exit the menu screens
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
Enter Name
HDD RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW
You can give a name for the title.
Perform steps
−
of “Accessing the Title View” (➔ left).
Press [e, r] to select “Enter Name”, then press
[OK].
Entering Text (➔ 53)
– HDD Even if the group name is changed, the title
names in the group will not be changed.
To view other pages
Press [e, r, w, q] to select “Previous” or “Next” and
press [OK].
– You can also press [u, i] to view other pages.
Multiple editing
(Only Delete, Set up Protection/Cancel Protection)
Select with [e, r, w, q] and press [h PAUSE]. (Repeat.)
– A check mark appears. Press [h PAUSE] again to cancel.
54
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 54
2008/04/23 19:00:33
Press [q PLAY] to start play.
Set up Protection/Cancel Protection
Press [OK] at the point you want to use as the
thumbnail.
– For quicker editing (➔ below, Tips)
– To change the thumbnail:
Restart play and press [e, r] to select “Change”,
then press [OK] at the point you want to use as the
thumbnail.
HDD RAM +R +R DL +RW
Use to prevent accidental erasure of titles.
−
of “Accessing the Title View” (➔ 54).
Press [e, r] to select “Set up Protection” or
“Cancel Protection”, then press [OK].
Press [w] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
HDD
The lock symbol
appears when the title
is protected.
All Titles
007
008
BBC 0 27/10 MON
BBC 0 27/10
--
--
8
Press [e, r] to select “Finish”, then press [OK].
Divide Title
HDD RAM
You can divide a title into two.
Once divided, titles cannot be recombined.
Perform steps
Partial Delete
−
of “Accessing the Title View” (➔ 54).
Press [e, r] to select “Divide Title”, then press
[OK].
HDD RAM
Use to remove unwanted parts of titles, such as commercials.
Enter Name
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Divide Title
HDD
VIDEO
Important: Once deleted, the parts cannot be recovered.
Set up Protection
Perform steps
Cancel Protection
Divide
Partial Delete
Finish
−
Preview
of “Accessing the Title View” (➔ 54).
Press [e, r] to select “Partial Delete”, then press
[OK].
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Partial Delete
HDD
Enter Name
Set up Protection
PLAY
008
Change Thumbnail
OK
VIDEO
RETURN
Start
Press [OK] at the point you want to divide.
– For quicker editing (➔ below, Tips)
– Selecting “Preview” then pressing [OK] plays the
title from 10 seconds prior, to 10 seconds after the
division point.
– To change the point to divide at:
Press [e, r] to select “Divide” then press [q PLAY]
to bring to the point where you want to divide, then
press [OK].
Next
Partial Delete
Finish
0:43.21
Change Thumbnail
Divide Title
Start
End
- -:- -.- -
- -:- -.- -
OK
RETURN
Press [OK] to set the “Start” point and then press
[OK] again to set the “End” point of the section
you want to erase.
– For quicker editing (➔ right, Tips)
– To delete multiple sections:
Press [e, r] to select “Next”, and repeat this step.
Press [e, r] to select “Finish”, then press [OK].
8
Press [w] to select “Delete”, then press [OK] to
confirm.
Notes
• You may not be able to specify start and end points
within 3 seconds of each other.
• Available disc space may not increase after erasing
short parts of titles.
Change Thumbnail
−
of “Accessing the Title View” (➔ 54).
Press [e, r] to select “Change Thumbnail”, then
press [OK].
Enter Name
Press [e, r] to select “Finish”, then press [OK].
8
Press [w] to select “Divide”, then press [OK].
– The title is divided at that point.
Notes
• Divided titles retain the name of the original.
• A short amount of video and audio just before and after
the division point get cut out.
• You cannot divide a title when the resulting parts are too
short.
• HDD Divided titles form a group of titles.
Tips
HDD RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW
Changes the thumbnail picture shown in the Title View
screen.
Perform steps
0:00.01
Divide
- -:- -.- -
Divide Title
End
Cancel Protection
PLAY
008
Advanced Editing
Perform steps
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Change Thumbnail
HDD
Set up Protection
For quicker editing
• Use Search (➔ 41) or Time Slip (➔ 42) to find the
desired point.
• To skip to the start or end of a title, press [u] (start) or
[i] (end).
• For better precision, use Slow-motion (➔ 41) and
Frame-by-Frame (➔ 42).
VIDEO
008
Change
Cancel Protection
Partial Delete
Finish
Change Thumbnail
0:00.01
Change
- -:- -.- -
Divide Title
OK
RETURN
Start play and select the image
of a thumbnail.
55
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 55
2008/04/23 19:00:35
Chapters−Creating, Editing
HDD RAM
When creating chapters in your favourite scenes, you can
easily reach the head of scene using [u, i] (SKIP) or
play on Chapter View.
To exit the menu screens
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
To view other pages
Press [e, r, w, q] to select “Previous” or “Next” and
press [OK].
– You can also press [u, i] to view other pages.
Tips
• Title/Chapter
Normally, programmes are recorded as a single item
consisting of one chapter.
Multiple editing
(Only Delete Chapter)
Select with [e, r, w, q] and press [h PAUSE]. (Repeat.)
– A check mark appears. Press [h PAUSE] again to
cancel.
Title
Chapter
Start
Tips
End
HDD RAM : You
can divide a title into multiple chapters.
Chapter Operations
Title
Chapter
–
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
HDD RAM : You
can change the order of chapters
and create a playlist (➔ 57).
– After finalising, titles are divided into chapters of
the following lengths.
-R -R DL -RW(V) : Chapters are approx. 5 minutes long.
+R +R DL : Chapters are approx. 8 minutes long.
Create Chapter
You can divide a title into multiple chapters.
Perform steps − 7b of “Accessing the Chapter View” (➔ left).
8
Press [e, r] to select “Create Chapter”, then
press [OK].
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Create Chapter
HDD
008
VIDEO
PLAY
Delete Chapter
Create
Create Chapter
Finish
• Maximum numbers of chapters on a disc
Combine Chapters
HDD
RAM -R -R DL -RW(V)
+R +R DL +RW
Approx. 1000 per title
Approx. 1000
Approx. 254
Accessing the Chapter View
OK
RETURN
9
Allows viewing and editing chapters individually.
Press [e, r, w, q] to select a title.
Press [OK] at the point you want to divide.
– For quicker editing (➔ 55, Tips)
– Repeat this step to create additional chapters.
Press [e, r] to select “Finish”, then press [OK].
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive.
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
HDD RAM When “VIDEO” is not selected, press
the “Red” button to select “VIDEO”.
0:43.21
Title View
Notes
A short portion of the title just after the creation point may
be lost.
Press [OPTION] to display the OPTION menu.
Delete Chapter
Delete
Properties
You can delete the chapters for each title.
Edit
Important: Once deleted, recorded contents cannot be
recovered.
Create Group
Release Grouping
Chapter View
Perform steps
Table Display
All Titles
Press [e, r] to select “Chapter View”, then press [OK].
Press [e, r, w, q] to select a chapter.
– Multiple editing (➔ right, Tips)
7a To play
Create Chapter
Refer to “Chapter Operations”
(➔ right).
Title View
56
9
Press [w] to select “Delete”, then press [OK].
Combine Chapters
Perform steps
Press [OPTION] to display the menu list.
Combine Chapters
Press [e, r] to select “Delete Chapter”, then press
[OK].
You can combine the divided chapters.
Press [OK].
7b To edit
Delete Chapter
− 7b of “Accessing the Chapter View” (➔ left).
8
− 7b of “Accessing the Chapter View” (➔ left).
8
Press [e, r] to select “Combine Chapters”, then
press [OK].
9
Press [w] to select “Combine”, then press [OK].
– The selected chapter gets combined with the next
chapter.
You can go back to the Title View.
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 56
2008/04/23 19:00:37
Creating, Editing and Playing Playlists
HDD RAM
-RW(VR) (play only)
You can create playlists by grouping your favourite scenes
(chapters) from the recorded titles and edit the created playlists.
Creating Playlists
HDD RAM
Perform steps
− 4b of “Accessing the Playlist View” (➔ left).
Press [w, q] to select the source title, then press
[r].
– Press [OK] to select all the chapters in the title, then
skip to step .
Tips
HDD RAM
A playlist is a compilation of your favourite chapters as
shown in the chart below.
Press [w, q] to select the source chapter you want
to add to the playlist, then press [OK].
– Press [e] to cancel.
– Press [OPTION] to select “Create Chapter”,
then press [OK] if you want to create a new chapter
in the source title (➔ 56).
Press [w, q] to select the position to insert the
chapter, then press [OK].
– Press [e] repeatedly to return to step , if you want
to add additional source titles.
Chapters are registered to the playlist. Repeat steps
to add other chapters.
Copying (➔ 62) a playlist will create a title.
8
and
Press [RETURN] to finish and exit the screen.
Notes
• Playlists cannot be created while recording or copying.
• You are allowed a maximum of 99 playlists, with
approximately 1000 chapters per playlist.
Preparation:
• Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive containing the
recorded title to be edited.
• RAM Release protection (disc, cartridge ➔ 76, Setting
Protection).
With the unit stopped
FUNCTION MENU
FUNCTION MENU
Remain 30:00 SP
Playback
TV Guide
Recording
Recording
Advanced Copy
Delete
Delete
Copy
Copy
Playlists
Flexible Rec
To Others
DV Auto Rec
To Others
OK
Setup
OK
RETURN
RETURN
HDD Management
Press [e, r] to select “Playlists”, then press [OK].
To play
Press [e, r, w, q] to select the playlist to play,
then press [OK].
4b
To create
Press [e, r, w, q] to select “Create”, then press
[OK]. (➔ right, Creating Playlists)
4c
To edit
Press [e, r, w, q] to select the playlist, then press
[OPTION].
– Multiple editing (➔ 58, left column, Tips)
Create
Copy
Properties
Enter Name
Change Thumbnail
Edit
Chapter View
If you select “Chapter View” (➔ 58)
− 4c of “Accessing the Playlist View” (➔ left).
Press [e, r] to select “Properties”, then press
[OK].
Remain 30:00 SP
HDD
Playback
Delete
HDD RAM -RW(VR)
Perform steps
Press [e, r] to select “To Others”, then press [OK].
4a
Properties
Playlist information (e.g., length and date) is shown.
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
HDD
Editing Playlists/Chapters
Advanced Editing
Accessing the Playlist View
Refer to
“Editing
Playlists/
Chapters”
(➔ right).
Tips
To exit the screen
Press [OK].
Delete
HDD RAM
Use to delete unneeded playlists.
Once deleted, playlists contents cannot be recovered
(titles are not affected).
Perform steps
− 4c of “Accessing the Playlist View” (➔ left).
Press [e, r] to select “Delete”, then press [OK].
Press [w] to select “Delete”, then press [OK] to
confirm.
Tips
To delete during play
1. Press [ DELETE]. A confirmation message displays.
2. Press [w] to select “Delete”, then press [OK] to confirm.
57
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 57
2008/04/23 19:00:40
Creating, Editing and Playing Playlists
Chapter Operations
Edit
HDD RAM
You can create and copy playlists, and change thumbnail.
Perform steps − 4c of “Accessing the Playlist View” (➔ 57).
Press [e, r] to select “Edit”, then press [OK].
Press [e, r] to select desired operation from
the menu displayed location then press [OK]
(➔ below).
1
Create
1
Copy
Enter
Name
Change
Thumbnail
Add
Chapter
1
Press [e, r] to select “Add Chapter”, then
press [OK].
(➔ 57, Creating Playlists)
Move
Chapter
1
Press [e, r] to select “Move Chapter”, then
press [OK].
2
Press [e, r, w, q] to select the position
to insert the chapter and press [OK].
Playlists
HDD
Press [e, r] to select “Create”, then press
[OK].
(➔ 57, Creating Playlists)
001
Press [w] to select “Copy”, then press [OK].
2
Enter a name for the playlist.
(➔ 53, Entering Text)
1
Press [e, r] to select “Change Thumbnail”,
then press [OK].
2
Press [q PLAY], Time Slip (➔ 42), Slowmotion (➔ 41), or Search (➔ 41) to find the
desired point.
Press [e, r] to select “Enter Name”, then
press [OK].
3
Press [OK] at the image you wish you use
for your thumbnail.
4
Press [e, r] to select “Finish”, then press
[OK].
– The thumbnail picture is now changed.
(Only Delete, Copy)
Select with [e, r, w, q] and press [h PAUSE]. (Repeat.)
– A check mark appears. Press [h PAUSE] again to cancel.
Chapter View
HDD RAM
You can add, move, divide, combine or delete chapters in the
playlist.
Perform steps − 4c of “Accessing the Playlist View” (➔ 57).
Press [e, r] to select “Chapter View”, then press
[OK].
Press [e, r, w, q] to select a chapter.
– Multiple editing (➔ Tips)
7a To play
Press [OK].
7b To edit
Press [OPTION] to display the menu list.
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
0:19.36
Page 01/01
Next
OK
Create
Chapter
Combine
Chapters
1
Press [e, r] to select “Create Chapter”,
then press [OK].
2
Press [q PLAY], Time Slip (➔ 42), Slowmotion (➔ 41), or Search (➔ 41) to find the
desired point.
3
4
Press [OK] at the point you want to divide.
1
Press [e, r] to select “Combine Chapters”,
then press [OK].
2
Press [w] to select “Combine”, then press
[OK].
Press [e, r] to select “Finish”, then press
[OK].
– The selected chapter gets combined with
the next chapter.
To exit the menu screens
Press [EXIT].
Multiple editing
---
---
Previous
Delete
Chapter
Tips
002
---
0:10.24
Press [e, r] to select “Copy”, then press
[OK].
2
1
Move Chapter
01 12/10 SUN 0:11
1
Press [e, r] to select “Delete Chapter”,
then press [OK].
2
Press [w] to select “Delete”, then press [OK].
Tips
To exit the menu screens
Press [EXIT].
To view other pages
Press [e, r, w, q] to select “Previous” or “Next” and
press [OK].
– You can also press [u, i] to view other pages.
Multiple editing
(Only Delete Chapter)
Select with [e, r, w, q] and press [h PAUSE]. (Repeat.)
– A check mark appears. Press [h PAUSE] again to cancel.
For quicker editing
– To skip to the start or end of a playlist/chapter, press
[u] (start) or [i] (end).
Add Chapter
Move Chapter
Create Chapter
Combine Chapters
Refer to “Chapter Operations”
(➔ right).
Delete Chapter
Playlist View
58
You can go back to the Playlist View.
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 58
2008/04/23 19:00:42
Still Pictures and Music—Editing
Preparation:
• RAM SD Release protection (disc, cartridge, card
➔ 76, Setting Protection)
Show Album View screen.
-R -R DL CD USB SD
(➔ 42, Showing the menu screen)
HDD RAM
While stopped
1. Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive.
2. Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
When “PICTURE” is not selected, press the “Green”
button to select “PICTURE”.
Album (still picture)/Picture Operations
Notes
• Timer recordings do not start when performing “Change
Date”, “Copy to DVD-RAM”, “Copy to HDD”, “Add Pictures”
or “Create Album”.
Add Pictures/Create Album
HDD RAM SD
Perform steps − of “Accessing the Album (still picture)/
Picture View” (➔ left).
Press [e, r] to select “Add Pictures” or “Create Album”, then press [OK].
Press [w] to select “Start” or “Yes”, then press
[OK].
Editing an album:
2a
Press [e, r, w, q] to select the album containing
picture to add, then press [OK].
Press [e, r, w, q] to select the album.
– Multiple editing (➔ below, Tips)
– When you want to create an album using “Create
Album”, press [OPTION] without selecting album.
Press [e, r] to select “Select pictures to copy” or
“Copy all pictures”, then press [OK].
• If “Select pictures to copy” is selected
Press [e, r, w, q] to select the picture, then press
[OK].
• If “Copy all pictures” is selected
All the still pictures in the album will be copied.
Editing a still picture:
2b
1. Press [e, r, w, q] to select the album which
contains the still picture to edit, then press [OK].
2. Press [e, r, w, q] to select the still picture.
– Multiple editing (➔ below, Tips)
Press [OPTION] to display the menu list.
To view more options
Press [e, r] to select “Edit Album”, then press [OK].
• Items that cannot be selected are grey.
e.g., HDD Editing an album
Start Slide Show
Refer to “Slide Show” (➔ 45).
Delete Album
Create Album
Change Date
Edit Album
Set up Protection
Copy to DVD-RAM
Cancel Protection
Refer to “Album
(still picture)/
Picture Operations”
(➔ right).
e.g., HDD Editing a still picture
Properties
Change Date
Refer to “Album (still picture)/
Picture Operations” (➔ right).
Set up Protection
Cancel Protection
Album View
Press [w, q] to select “Yes” or “No”, then press
[OK].
• If “Yes” is selected
You can give a name for the album (➔ 53, Entering
Text).
• If “No” is selected
The album name is automatically given.
Delete Album/Delete Picture
VIDEO/MUSIC
Delete Picture
Press [q] to select “No” to finish copying, then
press [OK].
– If you want to continue copying, select “Yes” and
repeat steps – .
Only when you select “Create Album”
9
Slide Show Setting
Add Pictures
8
Advanced Editing
Accessing the Album (still picture)/
Picture View
You can go back to the Album View.
Tips
To view other pages
Press [e, r, w, q] to select “Previous” or “Next”, then
press [OK].
– You can also press [u, i] to view other pages.
Multiple editing
Select with [e, r, w, q], then press [h PAUSE].
(Repeat.)
– A check mark appears. Press [h PAUSE] again to
cancel.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the menu screens
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
HDD RAM SD
Important: Once deleted, contents cannot be recovered.
• When deleting an album, non-picture files in the album will
also be deleted. (This does not apply to subordinate folders
in the album.)
Perform steps − of “Accessing the Album (still picture)/
Picture View” (➔ left).
Press [e, r] to select “Delete Album” or “Delete
Picture”, then press [OK].
Press [w] to select “Delete”, then press [OK].
59
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 59
2008/04/23 19:00:43
Still Pictures and Music—Editing
Set up Protection/Cancel Protection
HDD RAM SD
Set protection to prevent pictures from being accidentally
deleted.
Perform steps − of “Accessing the Album (still picture)/
Picture View” (➔ 59).
Press [e, r] to select “Set up Protection” or
“Cancel Protection”, then press [OK].
Press [w] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].
– The lock symbol “ ” appears when the still picture
or album is protected.
Notes
• Even if you set protection using this unit, album may be
deleted by other equipment.
Copy to DVD-RAM/Copy to HDD
HDD RAM
Perform steps − of “Accessing the Album (still picture)/
Picture View” (➔ 59).
Press [e, r] to select “Copy to DVD-RAM” or
“Copy to HDD”, then press [OK].
Press [w, q] to select “Start”, then press [OK].
Notes
• You cannot copy if multiple albums are selected.
• Timer recordings do not start when performing “Copy to
DVD-RAM” or “Copy to HDD”.
Properties
Enter Album Name
HDD RAM SD
Perform steps − of “Accessing the Album (still picture)/
Picture View” (➔ 59).
Press [e, r] to select “Enter Album Name”, then
press [OK].
– You can give a name for the album (➔ 53, Entering
Text).
HDD RAM -R -R DL CD USB SD
Information (e.g., image size and file size) is shown.
Perform steps − of “Accessing the Album (still picture)/
Picture View” (➔ 59).
Press [e, r] to select “Properties”, then press
[OK].
• To exit the Properties screen, press [OK].
Notes
• Album names entered using this unit may not display on
other equipment.
Change Date
HDD RAM
You can change the date of this picture.
Perform steps − of “Accessing the Album (still picture)/
Picture View” (➔ 59).
Press [e, r] to select “Change Date”, then press
[OK].
Press [w, q] to select the item and press [e, r] to
change.
Press [OK].
60
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 60
2008/04/23 19:00:45
Accessing the Album (CD)/Group (CD)/Track View
HDD
Preparation:
• Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD drive.
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
– When “MUSIC” is not selected, press the “Yellow”
button to select “MUSIC”.
Press [e, r] to select “Play CD on HDD” or “Play
MP3 on HDD” and press [OK].
Editing an album/group
Press [e, r] to select the album/group and press [OPTION].
Editing a track
1. Press [e, r] to select the album/group and press [OK].
2. Press [e, r] to select the track and press [OPTION].
Deleting still pictures and music using
Delete Navigator
Preparation:
• RAM SD Release protection (disc, cartridge, card
➔ 76, Setting Protection).
HDD RAM SD
Important: Once deleted, contents cannot be recovered.
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD, DVD or
SD drive.
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
Press [e, r] to select “Delete”, then press [OK].
FUNCTION MENU
Remain 30:00 SP
HDD
DELETE Navigator
HDD
Playback
Press [e, r] to select the operation and press [OK].
To edit the album (CD)/group (MP3)
e.g., Album View (CD)
001
1/ 1/ 06 Total 5
Date: 1. 1.2006
Delete
Sort
OK
Properties
Enter Track Name
Previous
OK
Page 01/01
OPTION
RETURN
Select
Next
Press OK to show
pictures.
HDD RAM
Press the colour button to select “PICTURE” or
“MUSIC”.
HDD If you pressed the “Yellow” button, press
[e, r] to select “Delete CD on HDD” or “Delete MP3
on HDD” and press [OK].
Useful functions during music play
(➔ 48)
➔ below
Delete Track
---
To Others
Album (CD)/Group (MP3)/Track (CD/
MP3) Operation (➔ below)
To edit the track (CD/MP3)
e.g., Track View (MP3)
MUSIC
2/ 1/ 06 Total 3
Date: 2. 1.2006
---
---
Copy
Repeat Play Setting
Track View
PICTURE
Deleting an album (still picture), album (CD) or group
(MP3):
Album (CD)/Group (MP3)/Track (CD/
MP3) Operation (➔ below)
Enter Artist Name
5a
Press [e, r, w, q] to select the album, then press
[ DELETE].
Deleting a still picture or track (MP3):
Repeat Play Setting
You can go back to Album View (CD)/
Group View (MP3)
Useful functions during music play (➔ 48)
Group View
Tips
5b
1. Press [e, r, w, q] to select the album or group
which contains the still picture or track to
delete and press [OK].
2. Press [e, r, w, q] to select the still picture or
track and press [OK].
Advanced Editing
Enter Album Name
VIDEO
---
002
Recording
RETURN
Delete Album
Album View
Press [w, q] to select “Delete”, then press [OK].
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
Notes
• You cannot delete while recording or copying.
• You cannot delete a track (CD) individually.
Album (CD)/Group (MP3)/Track (CD/MP3) Operation
After performing steps
Delete Album (CD)
Delete Group (MP3)
Delete Track (MP3)
Enter Album Name (CD)
Enter Group Name (MP3)
Enter Track Name (CD/MP3)
Enter Artist Name
(CD/MP3)
−
(➔ above)
Press [w, q] to select “Delete” and
press [OK].
• Once deleted, the recorded contents
are lost and cannot be restored.
Make certain before proceeding.
You can give names to albums/
groups and tracks.
(➔ 53, Entering Text)
You can edit the artist name of the track.
(➔ 53, Entering Text)
Notes
• Timer recordings do not start while editing music.
Tips
To view other pages
Press [e, r, w, q] to select “Previous” or “Next”, then
press [OK].
– You can also press [u, i] to view other pages.
Multiple editing
Select with [e, r, w, q], then press [h PAUSE].
(Repeat.)
– A check mark appears. Press [h PAUSE] again to cancel.
– Deleting an item increases the available space by the
amount of space taken by the item deleted.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
61
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 61
2008/04/23 19:00:47
Copying titles or playlists
With this unit, you can select a copy method from the three types listed below. (About copying still pictures ➔ 70)
Copy
Copy
One
One Touch
Touch Copy
Copy
Easy copying from HDD to DVD
with no difficult settings ( 65).
Make a copying list and then copy.
You can set the unit to copy titles or
playlists in the way you want ( 66).
You can copy directly between
HDD, DVD and VHS ( 23).
VHS
HDD
HDD
Advanced
Advanced Copy
Copy
DVD
DVD
HDD
DVD
VHS
SD
Features
Copy
One Touch Copy
Advanced Copy
HDD ➔ DVD
Copy direction
DVD ➔ HDD
–
HDD ➔ VHS
–
DVD ➔ VHS
–
VHS ➔ HDD
–
VHS ➔ DVD
–
RAM -RW(VR) +RW
RAM -RW(VR) +RW
DVD-V (Only from a finalised disc)
RAM -R -R DL -RW(V)
-RW(VR) +R +R DL +RW
RAM -RW(VR) +RW
DVD-V (Only from a finalised disc)
RAM -R -RW(V) +R +RW
RAM -R -RW(V) +R +RW
DVD-V You cannnot perform
High speed mode copy
(➔ 63, Important)
+RW You cannot perform
high-speed copy from
+RW to HDD.
VHS You cannot perform
high-speed copy.
1
Changing recording mode
Finalise
–
2
-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL
3
Automatically finalised
2
-R -RW(V) +R
-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL
Can be selected
Can be selected
High speed
mode
Normal
speed mode
High speed
mode
Normal
speed mode
Copying SD Video from an
SD card
–
–
–
–
Copying playlists
–
–
4
Are chapters maintained?
–
5
Are thumbnails maintained?
–
6
Recording and Playing while
Copying
–
high-speed copy with
finalised discs.
+RW You cannot perform
high-speed copy from
+RW to HDD.
VHS You cannot perform
high-speed copy.
–
7
8
HDD RAM
only
–
5
–
6
–
High speed
mode
7
8
Normal
speed mode
–
–
5
–
6
–
: Can do, –: Cannot do
62
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 62
2008/04/23 19:00:49
Important
1 To high speed copy titles (or playlists created from those titles), set “Recording Format” to “Video format” before recording to
the HDD (The default setting is “Video format”. ➔ 80).
However in the following cases, copying to DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW using the
high speed mode does not work.
Playlists created from titles using a variety of recording modes or multiple titles using FR recording mode
Playlists mixed with a variety of audio types (Dolby Digital and LPCM, etc.)
Titles that contain many deleted segments
Titles that have been copied to the HDD from an SD card or a Panasonic digital video camera with HDD (SD Video)
When making a copy of multiple titles that were recorded with “Recording Format” set to “Video format” and “VR format”
+R +R DL +RW Titles recorded in “EP” mode and “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode (Displayed
➔ 64)
+R +R DL +RW Titles recorded in 16:9 aspect
-R -R DL -RW(V) Titles recorded in 16:9 aspect using “EP” mode or “FR” (recordings 5 hours or longer) mode
2 If you select a recording mode with better picture quality than the original, the picture quality does not improve. (However it
does prevent against degradation of picture quality.)
+R DL You cannot copy in “EP” or “FR” (recordings 5 hours or longer) mode.
3 You cannot select “Top Menu” or “Auto-Play Select”.
If you want to set auto-play select or the background colour, select “Top Menu” or “Auto-Play Select” in “DVD Management”
before copying (➔ 77).
4 You cannot copy playlists with a play time more than 8 hours.
When you copy a playlist, it will become a title in the destination drive.
5 RAM -R DL +R DL +RW : One title becomes one chapter.
-R -RW(V) +R : Chapters are created automatically ( -R -RW(V) about 5-minutes +R about 8-minutes) when finalising after
copying the disc.
6 Thumbnails return to the default position.
7 When copying playlists, the thumbnails may not reflect changes made to them.
8 Possible only with titles on the HDD
(However it is not possible when copying with automatic finalisation or when copying SD Video.)
– You cannot perform chasing play or edit, etc. while copying.
– You cannot play a playlist while copying titles with “One time only recording” restriction (➔ 27).
– Still pictures or music cannot be played.
Approximate copying times (Max. speed)
(excludes time required to write data management information)
EP (6H)
2 min.
30x
58 s.
EP (8H)
1 min.
30 s.
40x
48 s.
4X Speed
4X Speed
+RW
+R DL 2
Required
Required
Speed
Speed
time
time
15 min.
7 min.
30 s.
3 min.
45 s.
4x
8x
16x
15 min.
7 min.
30 s.
3 min.
45 s.
Advanced Editing
4X Speed
4X Speed
8X Speed
DVD-R DL 2
DVD-RW 3
+R 4
Required
Required
Required
Speed
Speed
Speed
time
time
time
8 min.
7x
15 min. 4x 15 min. 4x
20 s.
3 min.
7 min.
7 min.
16x
8x
8x
45 s.
30 s.
30 s.
1 min.
3 min.
3 min.
32x
16x
16x
53 s.
45 s.
45 s.
2 min.
2 min.
24x
24x
62x
30 s.
30 s.
1 min.
1 min.
75x
32x
31x
53 s.
57 s.
12X Speed
5X Speed
DVD-RAM
DVD-R 1
Recording
Required
Required
Recorded
Speed
Speed
Mode
time
time
5 min.
10x
XP
12 min. 5x
46 s.
2 min.
24x
SP
q 6 min. 10x
30 s.
1 min.
44x
LP
3 min. 20x
1 hour
21 s.
HDD
4x
8x
16x
• The above values indicate the quickest possible times and speeds to high speed copy a one hour title recorded on the HDD to
a high speed recording compatible disc. Depending on what part of the disc is being written to, the features of the disc, etc., the
times and speeds will vary.
1 In this unit, copying with a 16X Speed DVD-R disc will be performed at the same speed as with a 12X Speed DVD-R disc.
2 In this unit, copying with a 8X Speed discs, DVD-R DL and +R DL, will be performed at the same speed as with a 4X Speed
discs, DVD-R DL and +R DL.
3 In this unit, copying with a 6X Speed DVD-RW disc will be performed at the same speed as with a 4X Speed DVD-RW disc.
4 In this unit, copying with a 16X Speed +R disc will be performed at the same speed as with a 8X Speed +R disc.
Notes
• When recording or playing while copying, the unit may not use the maximum recording speed.
• Depending on the condition of the disc, the unit may not copy using the maximum speed.
• When copying titles in high speed mode to high speed recording compatible DVD-RAM 5X, DVD-R 8X, +R 8X or +RW
4X, the sound of the disc rotating becomes louder than normal. If you want copy to perform more quietly, select “Normal
(Silent)” in “DVD Speed for High Speed Copy” in the Setup menu (➔ 80).
63
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 63
2008/04/23 19:00:49
Copying titles or playlists
Copy restrictions
Titles and playlists recorded using a different encoding
system (PAL or NTSC) from the TV system currently
selected on the unit cannot be copied.
Regarding copying to DVD-R DL (Dual Layer, singlesided) and +R DL (Double Layer, single-sided)
When not copying in high speed mode, titles are temporarily
copied at normal speed to the HDD and then copied at high
speed to DVD-R DL and +R DL. The titles that were
temporarily copied to the HDD are then deleted.
You cannot copy to DVD-R DL and +R DL in the following
cases.
– When there is not enough free space on the HDD (When
copying to a new blank disc, if you intend to fill a new disc
when copying to it, the equivalent of up to 4 hours of free
space in SP mode is needed on the HDD.)
– When the number of titles recorded to the HDD and the
number of titles to be copied to the DVD-R DL and +R DL
is greater than 500 in total
When playing a title recorded on both layers, video and audio
may momentarily cut out when the unit is switching layers
(➔ 15).
Regarding copying of the broadcasts that allow “One
time only recording”
You can copy a recorded title to a CPRM (➔ 104) compatible
DVD-RAM, however, the title is deleted from the HDD.
• Titles or playlists cannot be copied from DVD-RAM to the
HDD.
• Titles will not be copied if they are protected (➔ 55).
• You cannot copy playlists created from “One time only
recording” titles.
• Titles with recording limitations and playlists cannot be
registered on the same copying list.
Regarding copying from VHS
• It is not possible to copy a copied “One time only recording” title.
• If you want to copy to the HDD and then to -R -R DL -RW(V)
+R +R DL +RW in high speed mode, set “Recording
Format” to “Video format” before recording to the HDD.
• If a part of a tape recorded in AUTO mode is copied to the
HDD or a disc, noise may appear on that part.
Regarding copying to VHS
• When copying “One time only recording” titles to VHS, the
copy guard signal is also copied.
– Even when copying to tape the title may not be copied
correctly because of the copy guard. When copying it to
HDD or a disc again, the area where the copy guard signal
was recorded is not copied.
COPY Navigator/Copying list icons and functions
Depending on the icon, you may be informed about the on-screen display.
Titles and playlists that can be copied in high
speed mode to DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW
(DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL, +RW
Titles deleted from the HDD by “One time only
recording” restriction after copying (➔ 27, Copyonce recording)
Titles and playlists that can be copied in high
speed mode to DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW
(DVD-Video format) (However, titles and playlists
cannot be copied in high speed mode to +R or
+RW)
+R DL
is displayed, but copy cannot be
performed, even in normal speed mode.
Title with “One time only recording” restriction
(➔ 27, Copy-once recording)
Title or playlist contains still picture(s).
• Still picture(s) cannot be copied.
(NTSC) Title or playlist recorded using a different
encoding system from that of the TV system
(PAL)
currently selected on the unit
• Titles and playlists displaying these marks
cannot be selected.
64
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 64
2008/04/23 19:00:50
Copy
DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and +R
DL are automatically finalised (➔ 104). After finalising, the
discs become play-only and you can also play them on other
DVD equipment. However, you can no longer record or edit.
HDD → RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW
(You cannot copy to finalised discs.)
Check the properties of a title and sort
COPY Navigator
Perform steps
−
Press [e, r] to select the title, then press
[OPTION].
COPY Navigator
HDD
Preparation:
• Insert a disc that you can use for copying (➔ 15, 89).
• Confirm that there is enough remaining disc space.
All Titles
No.
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
---
Name
BBC
BBC1
AV2
BBC
AV2
BBC2
BBC
BBC
Properties
OK
RETURN
Properties
Disc Space: 4310MB
Total Size:
0MB( 0%)
Total : 0
Rec time
0:52(SP)
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
Press [e, r] to select “Copy”, then press [OK].
of “Copy” (➔ left).
Date
26/9
27/9
3/10
3/10
4/10
10/10
10/10
11/10
Day Time Name of title
FRI 13:30
SAT 12:15
FRI 20:00
FRI 22:05
SAT 16:10
FRI 9:25
FRI 13:30
SAT 21:00
Page 01/01
Sort
Grouped Titles
Press [e, r] to select “Properties”, then press [OK].
FUNCTION MENU
Remain 30:00 SP
Playback
Recording
COPY Navigator
HDD
Delete
Copy
To Others
OK
Rec time
0:52(SP)
RETURN
All Titles
Total : 0
No.
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
---
Name
BBC
BBC1
AV2
BBC
AV2
BBC2
BBC
BBC
Date
26/9
27/9
3/10
3/10
4/10
10/10
10/10
11/10
Disc Space: 4310MB
Total Size:
0MB( 0%)
Day Time Name of title
FRI 13:30
SAT 12:15
FRI 20:00
FRI 22:05
SAT 16:10
FRI 9:25
FRI 13:30
SAT 21:00
Page 01/01
OK
RETURN
OPTION
Select
Press [e, r] to select the title you want to copy,
then press [h PAUSE].
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select
all necessary items.
• Press [h PAUSE] again to cancel.
Press [OK].
Press [w] to select “Start”, then press [OK].
The name, recording date, channel etc. of the selected
title are shown.
Sort
(All Titles
screen only)
Press [e, r] to select “Sort”, then press [OK].
Press [e, r] to select the item, then press [OK].
This changes the way that titles are displayed. You can
select to display titles by No., recording date, day,
channel, recording start time and title name. (You
cannot select a title if it has a check mark.) If you
close the COPY Navigator screen, the display order is
cancelled.
Notes
• If you register multiple titles, they are copied in order
from the title at the top of the screen and not in the order
you registered them. To change the order that titles are
copied, create a copying list and then copy the contents of
the list (➔ 66).
Advanced Editing
HDD
Tips
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To stop copying (➔ 67)
COPY Navigator/Copying list icons and functions (➔ 64)
65
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 65
2008/04/23 19:00:51
Copying titles or playlists
Press [e, r, w, q] to select the title or playlist, then
press [h PAUSE].
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you
select all necessary items.
– Press [h PAUSE] again to cancel.
– The items will be copied in the order of the copying list.
If you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one
item at a time.
– When you switch between the “VIDEO” and “Playlists”
tab, the check mark is cancelled.
– When copying to a disc using high speed mode,
-R -R DL -RW(V) : only items indicated with
“
” or “
” can be registered.
+R +R DL +RW : only items indicated with
“
” can be registered.
– To view other pages (➔ 67)
Press [OK] to confirm.
– To edit the copying list (➔ below)
You cannot start copying when the value of the “Size”
exceeds 100% (“Destination Capacity” is not sufficient)
(➔ 67, About the data size for copying).
Press [w] to confirm.
Copying using the copying list
—Advanced Copy
HDD ↔ RAM +RW
-RW(VR) → HDD
HDD → -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL
HDD RAM -RW(VR) +RW → VHS
SD → HDD RAM
You can order titles and playlists as desired for copy to disc or
tape.
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
Press [e, r] to select “To Others”, then press
[OK].
Press [e, r] to select “Advanced Copy”, then
press [OK].
FUNCTION MENU
Remain 30:00 SP
HDD
Playback
TV Guide
Recording
Advanced Copy
Delete
Playlists
Flexible Rec
Copy
DV Auto Rec
Copy
To Others
Cancel All
1 Copy Direction
2 Copy Mode
Setup
HDD Management
OK
Source
HDD
Destination
DVD
HDD DVD
VIDEO
RETURN
High Speed
3 Create List
0
Start Copying
Select the copy direction.
OK
RETURN
– If you are not going to change the registered list, press [r]
several times (➔ step ).
Press [e, r] to select “Start Copying”, then press
[OK].
8 Press [w] to select “Yes” and press [OK] to start
copying.
HDD → -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL
Set the copy direction.
– If you are not going to change the copying direction, press
[r] (➔ step ).
Press [e, r] to select “Copy Direction”, then press [q].
Press [e, r] to select “Source”, then press [OK].
Press [e, r] to select the drive, then press [OK].
Press [e, r] to select “Destination”, then press [OK].
Press [e, r] to select the drive, then press [OK].
The same drive as the copy source cannot be selected.
Press [w] to confirm.
Set the recording mode.
– If you are not going to change the recording mode, press
[r] (➔ step ).
Press [e, r] to select “Copy Mode”, then press [q].
Press [e, r] to select “Format”, then press [OK].
Press [e, r] to select “VIDEO”, then press [OK].
Press [e, r] to select “Recording Mode”, then press
[OK].
Press [e, r] to select the mode, then press [OK].
Press [w] to confirm.
Register titles and playlists for copy.
– If you are going to copy a registered list without making
any changes to it (➔ step ).
Press [e, r] to select “Create List”, then press [q].
Press [w, q] to select “Copy & Finalise” or “Copy
Only”, then press [OK].
– If “Copy & Finalise” is selected
After finalising, the discs become play-only and you can
also play them on other DVD equipment. However, you can
no longer record or edit.
Edit the copying list
Select the item after step
– Press [OPTION].
Cancel All
No.
Move
Delete All
Add
Name of item
Size
New item (Total=0)
2 Copy Mode
VIDEO
High Speed
3 Create List
Delete
Page 01/01
Create copy list.
Start Copying
OK
RETURN
OPTION
Press [e, r] to select “New item”, then press [OK].
Press the “Red” button to select “VIDEO” or press the
“Green” button to select “Playlists”.
Create List
HDD
All Titles
007
008
VIDEO
0:30(XP)
BBC 1 10/10 FRI
BBC 1 11/10 SAT
---
---
Previous
OK
RETURN
OPTION
Playlists
---
---
Page 02/02
Delete All
Delete
Destination Capacity: 4343MB
Size:
0MB ( 0%)
HDD ψ DVD
(➔ above).
Add
Copy
1 Copy Direction
–
Move
Delete all items registered on the copying list.
1. Press [e, r] to select “Delete All” , then
press [OK].
2. Press [w, q] to select “Yes”, then press
[OK].
Add new items to the copying list.
1. Press [e, r] to select “Add” , then press
[OK].
2. Press [e, r, w, q] to select the title or
playlist and press [h PAUSE].
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this
step until you select all necessary items.
• Press [h PAUSE] again to cancel.
3. Press [OK].
Delete the selected items.
1. Press [e, r] to select “Delete” , then press
[OK].
2. Press [w, q] to select “Yes”, then press
[OK].
Move selected items or change the order of
items on the copying list.
1. Press [e, r] to select “Move” , then press
[OK].
2. Press [e, r] to select the destination, then
press [OK].
Next
Select Previous
Next
66
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 66
2008/04/23 19:00:53
After performing steps
−
(➔ 66)
Press [e, r] to select “Cancel All”, then press
[OK].
Press [w] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].
• The settings and lists may be cancelled in the following
situations.
– When a title, still picture, etc. has been recorded or deleted
at the copy source
– When steps have been taken, for instance, to turn off the
unit, open the tray, change the copy direction, etc.
About the data size for copying
Data size of each registered item
Destination Capacity: 4343MB
Size:
0MB (0%)
No.
Name of item
Size
New item (Total=0)
Page 01/01
Create copy list.
Data size recorded to the copy destination
• When copying at normal speed, the
total data size will change according to
the recording mode.
• The total data size shown may be
larger than the sum of the data sizes
for each registered item, because of
data management information being
written to the copy destination, etc.
Tips
To view other pages
Press [e, r, w, q] to select “Previous” or “Next”, then
press [OK].
– You can also press [u, i] to show other pages.
Multiple editing
Select with [e, r, w, q] and press [h PAUSE]. (Repeat.)
Press [OK] to register to the list.
– A check mark appears. Press [h PAUSE] again to
cancel.
To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN] for 3 seconds.
(You cannot stop while finalising.)
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
Recording and playing while copying
You can record or play using the HDD while high
speed copying. (Only when high speed copying without
finalising)
– Still pictures and music recorded on the HDD cannot be
played.
Press [OK] to cancel the screen display.
Notes
When you stop High-speed copying
All titles that have completely copied at the point
cancelled are copied.
When you stop Normal Speed copying
Copies until the point cancelled. However titles with
“One time only recording” restriction, only titles that have
completely copied at the point cancelled are copied to the
disc. Titles that are cancelled before the copy is complete
are not copied and remain on the HDD.
– -R DL +R DL If copy is cancelled during the step while
temporarily copying to the HDD, then nothing will be
copied. However, if copy is cancelled during the step
while copying to disc from the HDD, then only titles
completely copied at the point cancelled are copied.
Even if the title was not copied to the DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL or +RW, the
amount of remaining writable disc space becomes less.
• Timer recordings executed while copying are recorded
to the HDD regardless of the recording drive settings.
(Only when high speed copying without finalising)
• To play DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video
format), +R and +R DL on other players, it is necessary
to finalise them after copy.
Copying a finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and +R
DL
DVD-V → HDD VHS
You can copy the content of finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, and +R DL to the HDD or
VHS and re-edit the content copied to the HDD.
While playing a disc, the content being played is copied to the
HDD or VHS according to the set time.
• HDD If you perform search, frame-by-frame or pause while
copying, that portion of title is not recorded.
• Operations and on screen displays during copy are
also recorded.
• Almost all DVD-Video on sale have been treated to prevent
illegal copying, and cannot be copied.
• The following cannot be copied:, Video CD, Audio CD and
so on.
Advanced Editing
Cancel all registered copying setting and lists
(Continued on the next page)
– To confirm the current progress
Press [STATUS ].
67
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 67
2008/04/23 19:00:56
Copying titles or playlists
Preparation:
• Insert the finalised disc (➔ 89).
• VHS Insert a video cassette that you can use for
copying (➔ 89).
After performing steps − (“Format” is automatically
set to “DVD-Video”) (➔ 66, Copying using the copying list–
Advanced Copy)
Set “Copy Time”.
– If you are not going to change the setting
(➔ step ).
Setting the unit to copy according to the set time
Press [e, r] to select “Copy Time”, then press [q].
Press [e, r] to select “Time Setting”, then press [OK].
– Setting the unit to copy all the content on the disc
Press [e, r] to select “Off”, then press [OK].
Press [w] to confirm.
Copy will continue until there is not enough available
recording space on the HDD or VHS.
– Setting the copying time
Press [e, r] to select “On”, then press [OK].
Press [e, r] to select “Copy Time”, then press [OK].
Copy
Cancel All
1 Copy Direction
DVD → HDD
2
2 Copy Mode
DVD-Video
Hour
00 Min.
XP
3 Copy Time
Set the time a few minutes
longer.
Press [w, q] to select “Hour” and “Min.”, then press [e,
r] to set the recording time.
Press [OK].
Press [w] to confirm.
Copying to the HDD or VHS continues for the set time
even after the content being played finishes.
– Set a few minutes longer than the source title, in order to
include the operation time before play begins.
– You can also set the recording time with the numbered
buttons.
Notes
•
HDD If you perform search, frame-by-frame or pause
while copying, that portion of title is not recorded.
• The screen on the right is recorded at the
beginning.
• The content is recorded as 1 title from the
start of copy to the end.
• If play does not begin automatically
or if the top menu does not display
automatically, press [q PLAY] to start.
• Even if you copy a high quality video/audio DVD, the original
picture and audio quality cannot be exactly replicated.
• If you want to copy a title from a finalised DVD-RW (DVD
Video Recording format), create a copying list and then copy
(➔ 66, Copying using the copying list–Advanced Copy).
Copying a video cassette
VHS ➔ HDD RAM -R -RW(V) +R +RW
Preparation:
• Insert a disc and video cassette that you can use for
copying (➔ 89).
• Confirm that there is enough remaining disc space.
• When copying an NTSC tape, change the “TV System” to
“NTSC” in the Setup menu (➔ 82).
This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that
already have PAL signal recordings. (However, both types
of programmes can be recorded onto the HDD.)
After performing steps − (“Format” is automatically set to “VHSVideo”) (➔ 66, Copying using the copying list−Advanced Copy)
Set “Copy Time”.
– If you are not going to change the setting (➔ step ).
Setting the unit to copy according to the set time
1 Press [e, r] to select “Copy Time”, then press [q].
2 Press [e, r] to select “Time Setting”, then press [OK].
– Setting the unit to copy all the content on the video cassette
3 Press [e, r] to select “Off”, then press [OK].
4 Press [w] to confirm.
– Setting the copying time
3 Press [e, r] to select “On”, then press [OK].
4 Press [e, r] to select “Copy Time”, then press [OK].
Press [e, r] to select “Start Copying”, then press
[OK].
Press [w] to select “Yes”, then press [OK] to start
copying. The disc top menu is displayed.
– Disc play automatically begins from title 1 when “Title 1” is
selected from the “Auto-Play Select” menu when finalising
the disc (➔ 77).
8
Copy
When the top menu is displayed
Press [e, r, w, q] to select the title you want to
start copying, and press [OK].
Cancel All
1 Copy Direction
VHS
DVD
VHS-Video
3 Copy Time
My favourite
01/02
01
Chapter 1
02
Chapter 2
03
Chapter 3
04
Chapter 4
05
06
00 Min.
Set the time a few minutes
longer.
press [e, r] to set the recording time.
6 Press [OK].
7 Press [w] to confirm.
– You can also set the recording time with the
numbered buttons.
– You cannot set a recording period longer than 25 hours.
VHS ➔ -R -RW(V) +R
Press [w, q] to select “Copy & Finalise” or “Copy
Only”, then press [OK].
– If “Copy & Finalise” is selected
After finalising, the discs become play-only and
you can also play them on other DVD equipment.
However, you can no longer record or edit.
Tips
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
68
Hour
SP
5 Press [w, q] to select “Hour” and “Min.”, then
While playing in order, all the titles after the selected
title are recorded until the set time. (After the last
title on the disc has finished playing the top menu is
recorded until the set time is reached.)
To stop copying
Press [g STOP].
You can also press and hold [RETURN] for 3 seconds to
stop copying.
• If stopped partway, copying will be up to that point.
2
2 Copy Mode
Press [e, r] to select “Start Copying”, then press [OK].
8
Press [w] to select “Yes”, then press [OK] to start copying.
– Copying continues until the set time even if the
playback of the programme you wish to copy
finishes. Note that copying is automatically stopped
when the tape reaches the end or the remaining
capacity of the copy destination is filled.
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 68
2008/04/23 19:00:57
How to copy
Refer to “Copying using the copying list–Advanced Copy”
(➔ 66).
and
as shown below.
Please set the items in steps
Tips
To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN] for 3 seconds.
(You cannot stop while finalising.)
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
Copy Direction:
Source: SD CARD
Copy Mode:
Format: VIDEO
• To play DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) and +R on
other players, it is necessary to finalise them after copy.
About FR mode
When “Time Setting” is set to “Off” in step
(➔ 68,
right column):
• The recording mode is automatically selected by
estimating the remaining capacity of the disc for
copying of only the recorded parts in the video cassette
(unrecorded parts will not be recorded).
• When you press [OK] to start copy, the tape is
automatically fast-forwarded to the end and then
fast-rewound to the beginning before the copying is
actually started. It may take time to start copy. If the
remaining capacity of the disc is insufficient, the copying
will be stopped in the middle.
• The recording is divided into titles every time the tape
index signals are detected.
When “Time Setting” is set to “On” in step
(➔ 68,
right column):
• The recording mode is automatically determined by
estimating the remaining capacity of the disc for copying
of the contents equivalent to the recording time set
from the start point of the copying on the video cassette
(unrecorded parts will also be recorded).
• The recording is not divided into titles.
Copying SD Video from an SD card
Motion pictures encoded in the MPEG2 format, which have
been taken by a Panasonic SD Video Camera, digital video
camera etc, can be stored on HDD or DVD-RAM.
(All the recordings on the same date become a title.)
• You cannot playback SD Video on an SD card with this unit.
You must copy the files to the HDD or a DVD-RAM.
• You cannot playback or record while copying SD Video.
• This unit cannot copy AVCHD format motion pictures from
an SD card.
SD Video
VIDEO
Copying SD Video from a video equipment
Motion pictures encoded in the MPEG2 format, which have
been taken by a Panasonic digital video camera with HDD
etc, can be copied from the camera’s HDD to this unit’s HDD
or DVD-RAM.
(All the recordings on the same date become a title.)
• You cannot playback SD Video in the camera’s HDD with
this unit.
You must copy the files to the HDD or a DVD-RAM.
• You cannot playback or record while copying SD Video.
SD Video
VIDEO
HDD
DVD
SD
VHS
HDD
DVD-RAM
DVD Video Recording
format
Preparation
1 Turn on both this unit and the camera.
2 Connect the camera to this unit.
3 Select the appropriate mode that makes the camera ready
for data transfer (such as “PC CONNECT”) on the camera.
• Refer to the camera’s operating instructions for detail.
Advanced Editing
Notes
• SD Video on an SD card is automatically registered on the
copying list.
• If there is no SD Video on an SD card, “Copy Video
(MPEG2)” is not displayed.
The display below automatically appears when you connect
the camera to this unit.
Press [e, r] to select “Copy Video (MPEG2)” and press
on page 66.
[OK]. Then go to step
USB device
Play Video (DivX)
Copy Video (MPEG2)
Play Pictures (JPEG)
Copy Pictures (JPEG)
Play Music (MP3)
Copy Music (MP3)
Update CD database on HDD
SELECT
OK
HDD
DVD-RAM
DVD Video Recording format
The display below automatically appears when you insert a
card into the SD card slot while stopped.
Press [e, r] to select “Copy Video (MPEG2)”, then press [OK].
Then go to step
RETURN
• SD Video on the camera is automatically registered on the
copying list.
• If there is no SD Video on the camera, “Copy Video
(MPEG2)” is not displayed.
on page 66.
SD Card
Copy Video (MPEG2)
Play Pictures (JPEG)
Copy Pictures (JPEG)
SELECT
OK
RETURN
69
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 69
2008/04/23 19:01:01
Copying Still Pictures
HDD RAM USB SD
• SDHC Memory Cards used for recording with this unit can
only be used with other SDHC Memory Card-compatible
equipment. SDHC Memory Cards cannot be used with
equipment that is only compatible with SD Memory Cards.
• You cannot copy pictures recorded to DVD-R, DVD-R DL or
CD-R/CD-RW.
• Still pictures copied from USB memories or SD cards are
grouped by the shooting date in the HDD or DVD-RAM.
Copying all the still pictures on the USB
memory—Copy All Pictures
Press [e, r] to select “Copy Pictures (JPEG)” and
press [OK].
Press [e, r] to select “Copy to”, then press [w, q]
to select the drive.
Press [e, r, w, q] to select “Copy”, then press [OK].
Tips
To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN] for 3 seconds.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
USB J HDD or RAM
While stopped
Insert the USB memory (➔ 89).
The menu is automatically displayed.
USB device
Notes
Copy All Pictures
Play Video (DivX)
Play Pictures (JPEG)
Copy Pictures (JPEG)
Play Music (MP3)
Copy Music (MP3)
Update CD database on HDD
Copy from
USB
Copy to
HDD
Copy all pictures (JPEG) in the card.
SELECT
SELECT
Copy
RETURN
OK
Cancel
• This unit saves the information on up to 12,000 still
pictures and 30 SD cards. If additional still pictures are
imported, then the older information will be deleted.
• If the space on the destination drive runs out or the
number of files/folders to be copied exceeds the
maximum (➔ 18), copying will stop partway through.
• You cannot copy the information about the picture rotation.
RETURN
Press [e, r] to select “Copy Pictures (JPEG)” and
press [OK].
Press [e, r] to select “Copy to”, then press [w, q]
to select the drive.
Press [e, r, w, q] to select “Copy”, then press [OK].
Copying using the copying list
HDD RAM SD
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
Press [e, r] to select “To Others”, then press [OK].
Press [e, r] to select “Advanced Copy”, then
press [OK].
Tips
To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN] for 3 seconds.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
FUNCTION MENU
Write Protection Off
SD CARD
Playback
Recording
TV Guide
Advanced Copy
Copy New Pictures
Delete
Copy
Cancel All
1 Copy Direction
SD CARD
2 Copy Mode
Copy
To Others
OK
Setup
Card Management
RETURN
Source
SD CARD
Destination
HDD
HDD
PICTURE High Speed
3 Create List
0
– If you are not going to change the registered list
press [r] several times (➔ step ).
Notes
• The structure of folders on the USB memory may not be
the same at the copy destination.
• If the space on the destination drive runs out or the
number of files/folders to be copied exceeds the
maximum (➔ 18), copying will stop partway through.
• You cannot copy the information about the picture rotation.
Copying new still pictures on the SD card—
Copy New Pictures
SD J HDD or RAM
This unit saves information about imported still pictures.
Therefore, if still pictures are imported from the same SD
card, then only new still pictures will be imported.
While stopped
Insert the SD card (➔ 89).
The menu is automatically displayed.
SD Card
Set the copy direction.
– If you are not going to change the copying direction, press
[r] (➔ step ).
Press [e, r] to select “Copy Direction”, then press [q].
Press [e, r] to select “Source”, then press [OK].
Press [e, r] to select the drive, then press [OK].
Press [e, r] to select “Destination”, then press [OK].
Press [e, r] to select the drive, then press [OK].
The same drive as the copy source can be selected.
Press [w] to confirm.
Set the copy mode.
– If you are not going to change the recording mode, press
[r] (➔ step ).
Press [e, r] to select “Copy Mode”, then press [q].
Press [e, r] to select “Format”, then press [OK].
Press [e, r] to select “PICTURE”, then press [OK].
“Recording Mode” is automatically set to “High Speed”.
Press [w] to confirm.
Copy New Pictures
Play Pictures (JPEG)
Copy from
SD CARD
Copy Pictures (JPEG)
Copy to
SELECT
OK
HDD
Copy added pictures (JPEG) by date.
You can copy favorite pictures (JPEG) using Advanced copy.
RETURN
SELECT
Copy
OK
Cancel
RETURN
70
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 70
2008/04/23 19:01:03
Register still pictures for copy.
– If you are going to copy a registered list without
making any changes to it (➔ step ).
You can register still pictures or still picture folders.
– Still pictures and folders cannot be registered on the
same list.
Delete
Delete the selected items.
1. Press [e, r] to select “Delete”, then press
[OK].
2. Press [w] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].
Cancel all registered copying setting and lists
Copy
After performing steps
copying list)
Destination Capacity: 4343MB
Picture
Picture/Folder
Cancel All
1 Copy Direction
No.
SD CARD HDD
Name of item
Size
New item (Total=0)
(➔ 70, Copying using the
Press [e, r] to select “Cancel All”, then press [OK].
PICTURE High Speed
t Li t
To register individual still pictures
Press [e, r] to select “Create List”, then press [q].
Press [e, r] to select “New item”, then press [OK].
Press [e, r, w, q] to select the still picture, then press
[h PAUSE].
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select
all necessary items.
• Press [h PAUSE] again to cancel.
• The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If you
want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at a time.
– To show other pages (➔ right)
– To select another folder (➔ right)
Press [OK] to confirm.
– To edit the copying list (➔ below)
Press [w] to confirm.
To register on a folder by folder basis
Press [e, r] to select “Create List”, then press [q].
Press [e, r] to select “Picture/Folder”, then press [OK].
Copy
Destination Capacity: 4343MB
Picture
Picture/Folder
Cancel All
1 Copy Direction
No.
SD CARD HDD
Name of item
Size
New item (Total=0)
2 Copy Mode
Press [e, r] to select “Folder”, then press [OK].
Press [e, r] to select “New item”, then press [OK].
Press [e, r] to select the folder, then press [h PAUSE].
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you
select all necessary items.
• Press [h PAUSE] again to cancel.
• The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If you
want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at a time.
– To show other pages (➔ right)
Press [OK] to confirm.
– To edit the copying list (➔ below)
Press [w] to confirm.
Press [w, q] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].
• The settings and lists may be cancelled in the
following situations.
– When a title, still picture, etc. has been recorded or
deleted at the copy source
– When steps have been taken, for instance, to turn
off the unit, remove the card, open the tray, change
the copy direction, etc.
Tips
To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN] for 3 seconds.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To show other pages
Press [e, r, w, q] to select “Previous” or “Next”, then
press [OK].
– You can also press [u, i] to show other pages.
To select another folder
After performing steps − (➔ left, To register individual
still pictures)
Press [e, r, w, q] to select “Folder”, then press
[OK].
Press [e, r] to select the folder, then press [OK].
Create List
Create List
Picture (JPEG)
SD CARD
Folder
Advanced Editing
2 Copy Mode
3C
–
Folder
SD CARD
103__DVD
0001
0002
0003
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
\DCIM\100__DVD
001 100__DVD
002 101__DVD
003 102__DVD
004 103__DVD
---------
0004
Page 01/01
Previous
Page 001/001
Picture 0012
Next
File 0012
OK
OK
Press [e, r] to select “Start Copying”, then press [OK].
– Only when copying individual still pictures
from HDD RAM to SD
When specifying another folder as the copying
destination, select “Folder”.
Folder
New folder
Make a new folder and dub ?
8
001 100__DVD
002 101__DVD
003 102__DVD
--- New folder
---
Press [w] to select “Yes”, then press [OK] to start copying.
Edit the copying list
Select the item after step − (for a still picture)
or − (for a folder) (➔ above).
− Press [OPTION].
or
− Press [OPTION].
Delete All
Add
Delete All
Add
Delete
Delete all items registered on the copying list.
1. Press [e, r] to select “Delete All”, then
press [OK].
2. Press [w] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].
Add new items to the copying list.
1. Press [e, r] to select “Add”, then press
[OK].
2. Press [e, r, w, q] to select the still picture
or folder to be added, then press [h PAUSE].
3. Press [OK].
RETURN
RETURN
You can also select folders with the numbered buttons.
e.g., 5:
[0] [0] [5]
15:
[0] [1] [5]
115:
[1] [1] [5]
• The still pictures of different folders cannot be registered
on the same list.
Notes
• The sequence in which the still pictures are registered
on the copying list may not be the same at the copy
destination.
• If still pictures are already contained inside the copy
destination folder, the new still pictures are recorded
following the existing still pictures.
• If the space on the destination drive runs out or the
number of files/folders to be copied exceeds the
maximum (➔ 18), copying will stop partway through.
• You cannot copy the information about the picture
rotation.
71
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 71
2008/04/23 19:01:05
Copying music to HDD
You can store the two formats of music data in this unit’s HDD.
Music CD (CD-DA)
When copying music CDs, this unit makes access to the
internal Gracenote® Database to obtain title information.
The album name, track name and artist name are assigned
automatically allowing you find the track easily when playing back.
MP3
You can copy MP3 files from the USB memory or CD.
About the Gracenote® Database
The Gracenote® Database is a database used to search and
retrieve CD title information.
When a CD is inserted or copying from a CD begins, the unit
will automatically search for and obtain information about the
inserted CD.
The Gracenote Database comes pre-installed on this unit,
so titles and artist information can be obtained. Please note
however that the newest CD titles, etc. may not be registered
yet to the internal database. This unit has an internal
database containing information for approximately 350,000
album titles. You can update the internal database (➔ 73).
If there are CDs with very similar title information, then the
incorrect title information may be obtained. If no title suggestions
are found, then track name, and artist name will be blank.
In these cases, enter the CD title information manually, after
copying to the HDD has completed.
Copying music from a music CD
CD J HDD
All tracks on the music CD (CD-DA) are copied on the HDD.
(Cannot copy track-by-track.)
• One CD is recorded on the HDD as one album.
• Audio quality: LPCM
• The maximum number of albums on HDD: 300
(Depends on the remaining capacity.)
If titles or pictures are recorded, then the number of albums
that can be recorded will be reduced.
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
Insert a music CD.
The menu is automatically displayed.
e, r to select “Copy Music”, then
The unit starts accessing the Gracenote®
Database and searches for the title information.
If search results indicate that multiple titles were found
Press [e, r] to select the appropriate title and press [OK].
w, q to select “Copy”, then
Copying starts.
72
Tips
To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN] for 3 seconds.
• The copying is cancelled, then no tracks on the CD will be copied.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
Notes
• While copying, no other operations can be performed.
Timer recordings will not proceed.
• Tracks copied on the HDD cannot be transferred to a
disc, USB memory or SD card.
• CDs which have SCMS (Serial Copy Management
System) restrictions cannot be copied to the HDD.
Copying music (MP3) from a USB
memory or CD-R/CD-RW
USB CD J HDD
You can copy MP3 files recorded on USB memory or CD-R/
CD-RW to the HDD by file or folder.
• One folder is recorded on the HDD as one group.
• The maximum number of groups on HDD: 300
The maximum number of tracks on HDD: 3000
(Depends on the remaining capacity.)
If titles or pictures are recorded, then the number of groups
that can be recorded will be reduced.
While stopped
Insert the USB memory or CD-R/
CD-RW (➔ 89).
The menu is automatically displayed.
e, r to select “Copy Music”, then
“Copy Direction” and “Copy Mode” are
automatically set to “USBJHDD” or “CDJHDD”
and “MUSIC, High Speed”, respectively.
Register MP3 files for copy.
• If you are going to copy a registered list
without making any changes to it (➔ step ).
You can register MP3 files or MP3 file folders.
• MP3 files and folders cannot be registered on
the same list.
To register individual MP3 files
Press [e, r] to select “Create List” and press [q].
Press [e, r] to select “New item” and press [OK].
Press [e, r] to select the folder and press [OK].
Press [e, r] to select the MP3 file and press [h PAUSE].
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all
necessary items.
• Press [h PAUSE] again to cancel.
• The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If you
want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at a time.
Press [OK].
• To edit the copying list (➔ 73)
Press [w] to confirm.
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 72
2008/04/23 19:01:08
To register on a folder by folder basis
Press [e, r] to select “Create List” and press [q].
Press [e, r] to select “Track/Folder” and press [OK].
Press [e, r] to select “Folder” and press [OK].
Press [e, r] to select “New item” and press [OK].
Press [e, r] to select the folder and press [h PAUSE].
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all
necessary items.
• Press [h PAUSE] again to cancel.
• The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If you
want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at a time.
Press [OK].
• To edit the copying list (➔ below)
Press [w] to confirm.
e, r to select “Start Copying”,
• If the space on the destination drive runs out or the
number of files/folders to be copied exceeds the
maximum (➔ 18), copying will stop partway through.
To update the database with information on CDs that were
recently released, follow the instructions below.
• For individual files only
When specifying an existing folder as the copying destination
Press [e, r] to select “Folder” and press [OK].
Press [e, r] to select the folder and press [OK].
When creating a new folder as the copying destination
Press [w, q] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
Enter the folder name (➔ 53, Entering Text).
w, q to select “Yes”, then
start copying.
to
Preparing the update data
Visit the following website.
http://panasonic.net/pavc/support/gn/
Download the data to your USB memory.
• USB memory 1 GB or larger is required.
• Refer to the instruction on the website for more
information.
Updating the database on this unit
Turn on this unit.
Tips
Insert the USB memory (➔ 89).
The menu is automatically displayed.
To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN] for 3 seconds.
Press [w, q] to select “Update” and press [OK].
• Updating takes up to 20 minutes.
• Do not disconnect the USB memory and the AC
mains lead while updating.
• Once started, you cannot cancel updating. A
message appears when updating is finished.
Notes
• The sequence in which the MP3 files are registered
on the copying list may not be the same at the copy
destination.
• If MP3 files are already contained inside the copy
destination folder, the new MP3 files are recorded
following the existing MP3 files.
Press [OK].
Notes
To edit the copying list
-
Advanced Editing
Press [e, r] to select “Update CD database on
HDD” and press [OK].
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
(for
Delete All:
Delete all items registered on the copying list.
Press [w, q] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
Add:
Add new items to the copying list.
Press [e, r] to select the MP3 file or folder and press [h PAUSE].
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all
necessary items.
• Press [h PAUSE] again to cancel.
Press [OK].
Delete:
Delete the selected items.
Press [w, q] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
Notes
To update Gracenote® Database
then
Select the item after step - (for an MP3 file) (➔ 72) or
a folder) (➔ above).
Press [OPTION].
Press [e, r] to select the operation and press [OK].
To cancel all registered copying settings and lists
After performing steps − (➔ 72, Copying music (MP3) from a
USB memory or CD-R/CD-RW)
Press [e, r] to select “Cancel All” and press [OK].
Press [w, q] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
• The settings and lists may be cancelled in the following situations.
– When a file has been recorded or deleted at the copy source
– When steps have been taken, for instance, to turn off the unit,
remove the USB memory, open the tray, change the copy
direction, etc.
• Timer recordings do not start while updating.
• Updating overwrites the internal database forcibly
regardless of whether the data in the USB memory is
the latest or not. Make sure you download the latest
version from the website.
• Some of the CD title information in the database may be
deleted after updating the database.
• No name will be assigned after copying a CD to HDD if
the CD title information of the CD is not registered in the
database. Even if the CD title information of that CD is
added to the database by updating later, the information
will not be assigned to the track/album already copied
on the HDD. (The names will be still blank.)
• Depending on the situation of Panasonic or Gracenote,
upgrading the Gracenote® Database and providing it
through the Web may be discontinued without notice.
73
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 73
2008/04/23 19:01:09
Setting On-Screen Display
Accessing the On-Screen Display
Disc Menu
When playing discs (except for JPEG discs), you can display
and set the options including disc audio, subtitle, image
quality, sound effect, Repeat Play, etc. In addition, when
receiving the multi-channel broadcast, you can change the
audio settings.
Menu options will differ based on disc type and contents.
Press [DISPLAY].
Disc
Play
Picture
Sound
Other
Menu
Soundtrack
Digital 2/0 ch
Subtitle
Off
LR
Item
Setting
Press [e, r] to select a menu, then press [q].
Press [e, r] to select an item, then press [q].
Press [e, r] to select a setting.
Follow the on-screen prompts to change
individual settings.
Notes
• Some settings may not be changeable, based on the
unit’s current activity (playing, stopped, etc.) and disc
contents.
• When the VHS drive is selected, you can only set “DVB
Multi Audio” and “Position”.
To exit the on-screen display
Press [DISPLAY].
HDD RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW -RW(VR)
The disc’s audio attributes appear. (➔ below, Audio attributes)
DVD-V
1
Audio channel
Tips
HDD RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW DVD-V
-RW(VR) VCD and DivX
You can change the settings of disc audio, subtitle, etc.
Soundtrack
Select the audio and language.
(➔ below, Audio attributes, Sound track/Subtitle language)
VCD (SVCD) and DivX
Select the soundtrack number.
• Soundtrack numbers are displayed even when there is only
one audio type.
Subtitle
HDD RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW -RW(VR)
(Only discs that contain subtitle on/off information)
Turn the subtitle on/off.
• Subtitle on/off information cannot be recorded using this unit.
DVD-V
Turn the subtitle on/off and select the language (➔ below,
Sound track/Subtitle language).
VCD (SVCD) and DivX
Turn the subtitle on/off and select the subtitle number.
• Subtitle numbers are displayed even if there are not multiple
subtitles.
Audio channel HDD RAM -RW(VR)
Change audio during playback.
LR / L / R
VCD
and DivX
Source Select (DivX)
• Automatic: The constructing method of the DivX contents
is automatically distinguished and output.
Select when the disc contents were recorded
• Interlace:
using interlace.
• Progressive: Select when the disc contents were recorded
using progressive.
Angle DVD-V
Change the number to select an angle.
PBC (Playback control ➔ 104) VCD
Indicates whether menu play (playback control) is on or off.
Sound track/Subtitle language
ENG: English
DAN: Danish
FRA: French
POR: Portuguese
DEU: German
RUS: Russian
ITA: Italian
JPN: Japanese
ESP: Spanish
CHI: Chinese
NLD: Dutch
KOR: Korean
SVE: Swedish
MAL: Malay
NOR: Norwegian VIE: Vietnamese
THA:
POL:
CES:
SLK:
HUN:
FIN:
:
Thai
Polish
Czech
Slovak
Hungarian
Finnish
Others
Audio attributes
LPCM/% Digital/DTS/MPEG: Signal type
k (kHz):
b (bit):
ch (channel):
Sampling frequency
Number of bits
Number of channels
Notes
• You cannot make a change when there is no recording.
• Some discs allow changes to soundtracks, subtitles, and
angles only by using the disc’s menus (➔ 40).
74
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 74
2008/04/23 19:01:11
Play Menu
Sound Menu
HDD RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW DVD-V
-RW(VR) CD VCD
Repeat Play
You can change the settings of audio when receiving the
multi-channel broadcast, and also change the settings of
sound effect when playing discs.
This function works only when the elapsed play time is
displayed.
Select the item for repeat play. Depending on the disc, the
items that can be selected will differ.
Select “Off” to cancel.
DVB Multi Audio
HDD RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW DVD-V
-RW(VR)
You can change the progressive output setting and the noise
reduction setting when playing discs or of images from the
connected device.
Playback NR
“On” reduces noise and picture degradation.
Progressive [Only when you have set “Progressive” to “On”
in the Setup menu (➔ 82)]
Select “On” to enable progressive output.
• Select “Off” if the picture is stretched horizontally.
Transfer [Only when you have selected “On” in “Progressive”
(➔ above)]
Select the method of conversion for progressive output to suit
the type of material being played.
When the output signal is PAL
(When the tray is opened, the setting will return to “Auto”.)
Auto:
Video:
Film:
Automatically detects the film and video
content, and appropriately converts it.
Select when using “Auto”, and the content is
distorted.
Select this if the edges of the
film content appear jagged or
rough when “Auto” is selected.
However, if the video content is distorted as
shown in the illustration to the above, then
select “Auto”.
English 1/ English 2
V.S.S.
HDD RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW DVD-V
-RW(VR)
(Dolby Digital, MPEG Audio with 2.0 or over channels only)
• This function does not work for bilingual recordings.
• Enjoy a surround-sound effect if you are using 2 front
speakers (L/R) only.
• Turn off if it causes distortion.
Natural / Emphasis / Off
Dialogue Enhancer
HDD RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW DVD-V
-RW(VR) and DivX
(Dolby Digital, 3-channel or over only, including a centre
channel)
When “On”, the volume of the centre channel is raised to
make dialogue easier to hear.
Other Menu
Position
Change where this menu screen appears on your TV.
Setting Menus
Picture Menu
(MPEG Audio only)
If more than one audio channels are output, you can set the
desired channel before recording.
• DVB Multi Audio cannot be selected during playback or
recording.
• Depending on the broadcast, the items that can be selected
will differ.
When the output signal is NTSC
Auto1 (normal): Automatically detects the film and video
content, and appropriately converts it.
Auto2:
In addition to “Auto1”, automatically detects
film contents with different frame rates and
appropriately converts it.
Video:
Select when using “Auto1” and “Auto2”, and
the content is distorted.
Copy NR
(Only when AV1, AV2, AV3 or DV is selected)
Reduces video tape noise during recording. Depending on
the video signal, jittering may occur.
Automatic: Noise reduction only works on picture input from
a video tape.
On:
Noise reduction works for any video input.
Off:
Noise reduction is off. Select when you want to
record input as is.
75
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 75
2008/04/23 19:01:13
HDD, DVD and Card Management
You can manage discs through formatting, finalising
and other operations.
Accessing the Management Menus
Preparation:
• RAM SD Release protection (disc, cartridge, card ➔ below).
• Insert a disc and card.
With the unit stopped
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD, DVD or
SD drive.
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
Press [e, r] to select “To Others”, then press
[OK].
Tips
• The disc name is displayed in the DVD Management
window.
• With a finalised discs and +RW created Top Menu, the
name is displayed on the Top Menu.
Deleting All Titles
You can delete all titles on the single-sided DVD-RAM at once.
Important: Once deleted, contents cannot be recovered.
HDD RAM
−
Perform preparation steps
Management Menus” (➔ left).
Press [e, r] to select “Delete all titles”, then press
[OK].
FUNCTION MENU
Remain 30:00 SP
HDD
Playback
Recording
Press [w] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].
FUNCTION MENU
Remain 30:00 SP
HDD
Delete
Playback
TV Guide
Copy
Recording
Advanced Copy
Delete
Playlists
Flexible Rec
To Others
OK
DV Auto Rec
Copy
of “Accessing the
Press [w] to select “Start”, then press [OK].
– A message appears when deleting is finished.
8
Press [OK] to complete.
RETURN
To Others
OK
Setup
HDD Management
Notes
RETURN
Press [e, r] to select “HDD Management”, “DVD
Management” or “Card Management”, then press
[OK].
• Deleting does not work if one or more titles are protected.
• Still picture data (JPEG), music data or computer data
cannot be deleted.
Formatting Discs or Cards
Tips
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
HDD RAM -RW(V) +RW -RW(VR)
+R +R DL (New disc only)
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
SD
Formatting is the process of making media such as DVDRAM recordable on recording equipment.
Setting Protection
RAM
Use to prevent accidental erasure of disc.
−
of “Accessing the
Perform preparation steps
Management Menus” (➔ above).
You can record or edit after formatting the finalised DVD-RW.
Important: Once formatted, contents cannot be recovered.
Perform preparation steps
−
of “Accessing the
Management Menus” (➔ left).
Press [e, r] to select “Format HDD”, “Format
Disc” or “Format Card”, then press [OK].
Press [e, r] to select “Disc Protection”, then
press [OK].
Press [w] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].
Press [w] to select “Start”, then press [OK].
– Formatting starts ( RAM may take up
to a maximum of 70 minutes).
– A message appears when formatting is finished.
Press [w] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].
Protection of cartridge disc
RAM (With a cartridge)
With the write-protect tab in the protect
position, you cannot record to, edit, format
or erase from the disc.
Naming Discs
RAM -R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW
You can give a name for the disc.
−
of “Accessing the
Perform preparation steps
Management Menus” (➔ above).
76
Press [OK] to complete.
Notes
LO C K
SD
Switch the write-protect switch to the “LOCK”
position.
8
Press [e, r] to select “Disc Name”, then press
[OK].
– Entering Text (➔ 53).
• Do not disconnect the AC mains lead while formatting.
This can render the disc unusable.
• When a disc has been formatted using this unit, it may
not be possible to use it on any other equipment.
• -R -R DL CD Formatting cannot be performed.
• -RW(V) -RW(VR) You can format only as DVD-Video format
on this unit.
• RAM Pressing [RETURN] during format will cancel the
process. The disc must be reformatted if you do this.
• RAM SD The disc cannot be formatted if the write-protect
tab or switch (➔ left) is switched to “PROTECT” or
“LOCK”. Release the protection to continue.
• The message “Unable to format” appears when trying to
format discs the unit cannot use.
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 76
2008/04/23 19:01:14
-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW
You can select the background that will be displayed as the
DVD-Video top menu after finalising or Create Top Menu
( +RW ).
Perform preparation steps
−
Management Menus” (➔ 76).
of “Accessing the
Press [e, r] to select “Top Menu”, then press
[OK].
Press [e, r, w, q] to select the background, then
press [OK].
Top Menu List
1
2
Display after finalising
Thumbnail
(Still picture)
Title Name
4
5
3
6
01
7
8
9
• You can change thumbnails displayed in the top menu.
(➔ 55, Change Thumbnail)
Selecting Whether to Show the Top Menu
First—Auto-Play Select
-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW
Before finalising a disc, select whether the top menu shows
after finalising.
Perform preparation steps
−
Management Menus” (➔ 76).
of “Accessing the
Press [e, r] to select “Auto-Play Select”, then
press [OK].
Press [e, r] to select “Top Menu” or “Title 1”, then
press [OK].
• Top Menu:
The Top Menu appears first.
• Title 1:
The disc content is played without
displaying the Top Menu.
Finalising
-R -R DL -RW(V) +R +R DL
You can play these discs on compatible DVD players by
finalising it on the unit, effectively making it into DVD-Video
that complies with DVD-Video standards. The menu you
create with the unit can also be used on most DVD players.
−
Perform preparation steps
Management Menus” (➔ 76).
of “Accessing the
Press [e, r] to select “Finalise”, then press [OK].
Press [w] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].
Press [w] to select “Start”, then press [OK].
– Finalising starts and cannot be cancelled. (may take
up to 15 minutes) ( -R DL +R DL up to 60 minutes)
– A message appears when finalising is finished.
8
Notes
• Do not disconnect the AC mains lead while finalising.
This can render the disc unusable.
• When finalising a high-speed recording compatible disc,
it may take longer than displayed on the confirmation
screen (approximately 4 times longer).
• After finalising
– -R -R DL +R +R DL The disc becomes play-only
and you can no longer record or edit it.
– -RW(V) You can record and edit the disc after formatting
although it becomes play-only after finalising.
– When copying in high speed, chapters will be
replicated.
– The disc finalised on the unit may not
be playable on other players depending
on the condition of the recording.
– There is a pause of several seconds between
titles and chapters during playback.
– -R -RW(V) Titles are divided into about 5-minute
( +R 8-minute) chapters, if
– the titles were directly recorded to the disc.
– the titles were copied using the normal
speed mode (excluding -R DL +R DL ).
This time varies greatly depending on the condition
and mode of recording.
Tips
After you have finished recording and try to eject the disc,
a screen asking if you want to finalise the disc appears
(➔ 29).
Create Top Menu
+RW
+RW discs contain no Top Menu data. Top Menu is a
convenient function. We recommend you create the menu
before playing a +RW disc on other equipment.
−
of “Accessing the
Perform preparation steps
Management Menus” (➔ 76).
Press [e, r] to select “Create Top Menu”, then
press [OK].
Press [w] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].
Press [w] to select “Start”, then press [OK].
– “Create Top Menu” cannot be cancelled once
started.
– “Create Top Menu” takes a few minutes.
8 Press [OK] to complete.
Setting Menus
Selecting the background style—Top Menu
Notes
• Recording or editing on the disc may delete the top
menu. In that case, create the top menu again.
• You cannot use the top menu for playing on this unit.
Press [OK] to complete.
77
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 77
2008/04/23 19:01:17
Setup Menu
Channel Settings
You can change the unit’s settings using Setup menu.
Accessing the Setup Menu
To Others
Setup
With the unit stopped
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
Press [e, r] to select “To Others”, then press
[OK].
Tuning
FUNCTION MENU
Remain 30:00 SP
HDD
(➔ left, Accessing the Setup Menu)
All factory default settings are indicated with “Underlined” text.
Playback
FUNCTION MENU
Remain 30:00 SP
HDD
Recording
Delete
Playback
TV Guide
Copy
Recording
Advanced Copy
Delete
Playlists
Flexible Rec
Copy
DV Auto Rec
To Others
OK
e, r select “Tuning” ➔ q ➔ e, rselect item ➔
Setup
RETURN
To Others
OK
Setup
HDD Management
RETURN
Press [e, r] to select “Setup”, then press [OK].
Press [e, r] to select a menu, then press [q] to go
to the item list.
Menus
Items
Options
Setup
Tuning
Disc
Picture
Sound
Display
Connection
VHS
Others
Remote Control
Clock
Owner ID
Power Save
DivX Registration
System Update
Initialize
DVD 1
On
Tuning
Disc
Picture
Sound
Display
Connection
VHS
Others
Edit Profiles
Auto-Setup Restart
DVB Manual Tuning
Add New DVB Services
Signal Condition
RETURN
Edit Profiles
You can create four profiles of channels for making viewing and
recording easier. Editing these profiles does not affect the channel
setting itself.
• Timer recording may not work correctly if you edit the profiles
during timer recording standby.
• Channel numbers cannot be changed, due to broadcast
restrictions.
Setup
TAB
SELECT
RETURN
Press [e, r] to select an item to change, then
press [OK].
Press [e, r] to select an option, then press [OK].
For Setting details, refer to pages 78-84.
SELECT
TAB
Tuning
Disc
Picture
Sound
Display
Connection
VHS
Others
Edit Profiles
Auto-Setup Restart
DVB Manual Tuning
Add New DVB Services
Signal Condition
Edit Profiles
All Services
1 BBC ONE Wales
2 BBC 2W
3 BBC THREE
4 BBC FOUR
5 CBeebies
6 BBC PARLMNT
7 Community
8 CBBC Channel
9 1Xtra BBC
TAB
SELECT
OK
RETURN
Profile Select
SELECT
RETURN
Notes
Changed settings remain intact even when switching the
unit to standby mode.
Tips
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN]. Even if you have changed an option,
the change is not activated until you press [OK].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
Profile 1
Add
Add All
Page +
Page –
To select the profile
Press the “Green” button .
To add channels to a profile
1 Press [e, r] to select the channel in the “All
Services” column then press the “Yellow” button.
• Repeat this step to add other channels.
• Press the “Blue” button to add all the available
channels to the profile. (Only when no
channels have been added to the profile.)
2 Press [OK] to save the profile.
To change the order of channels of a profile
1 Press [q] .
2 Press [e, r] to select the channel in the “Profile”
column to move, then press the “Green” button.
3 Press [e, r] to select the new position of the
channel, then press the “Green” button.
• Repeat the steps 2–3 to move other channels.
4 Press [OK] to save the profile.
To delete channels on a profile
1 Press [q] .
2 Press [e, r] to select the channel in the “Profile”
column, then press the “Yellow” button.
• Repeat this step to delete other channels.
• Press the “Blue” button to delete all
the channels from the profile.
3 Press [OK] to save the profile.
Deleting a channel from a profile does not affect the
channel itself.
You can still select the channel from the “All Services”
profile.
To change the name of a profile in the “Profile” column
1 Press [q] .
2 Press the “Red” button.
(➔ 53, Entering Text)
When the station name of the “All Services” column is
highlighted
78
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 78
2008/04/23 19:01:18
Add New DVB Services
Tips
You can search for newly added digital terrestrial channels to
receive.
To browse through the list
Press [1 2 CH].
Setup
Auto-Setup Restart
You can restart auto channel setting for digital terrestrial channels
if set up (➔ 13) fails for some reason.
However, if you perform “Auto-Setup Restart”, all channel settings
and all created profiles are deleted.
Tuning
Disc
Picture
Sound
Display
Connection
VHS
Others
Edit Profiles
Auto-Setup Restart
DVB Manual Tuning
Add New DVB Services
Signal Condition
• You can also use the following method to restart Auto-Setup.
(All the settings except for the ratings level, ratings password,
Owner ID and Clock return to the factory preset. The timer
recording programmes are also cancelled.)
When the unit is turned on and stopped, press and hold
[CH 1] and [CH 2] on the main unit simultaneously for about
5 seconds.
– Auto-Setup screen appears.
DVB Manual Tuning
You can set channels manually if the DVB Auto Setup could not
complete successfully.
TAB
RETURN
OK
RETURN: to cancel
RETURN
TAB
Tips
To cancel in middle
Press [RETURN].
The channels found before stopping are not saved.
You can check the quality and strength of digital broadcast signals.
Realign the aerial if you are receiving a poor signal.
When “Signal Condition” is displayed in grey and cannot be
selected:
1 Press [EXIT] to exit the screen.
RETURN
CHANNEL
START SCAN
OFFSET
RETURN
2. Press [OK] to start scan.
The set channel is displayed in the table.
DVB Manual Tuning
Channel System
Frequency
Signal Quality
Signal Strength
Prog. Channel
1
22
2
22
3
22
Press [OK] to save the newly found channels.
Signal Condition
DVB Manual Tuning
Channel System
United Kingdom
Frequency
474,0 MHz
DVB CH21
0
10
Signal Quality
0
10
Signal Strength
Prog. Channel Service Name
Net ID TS ID Quality
SELECT
OK
– The bar over the table shows you the search progress.
At the end of the search, the number of found new digital
stations appears.
– “No new services found.”, is displayed when
no new services can be found.
United Kingdom
DVB CH21
474,0 MHz
0
10
10
0
Service Name
Net ID TS ID Quality
BBC ONE Wales 12290 514
7
12290 514
BBC 2W
7
BBC THREE 12290 514
7
3 services found.
START SCAN
RETURN
3. Press [EXIT] and press [1 2 CH], check that applicable
channels have been selected.
2 Press [1 2 CH] to select a digital channel. “D” appears on the
unit’s display.
3 Display the Setup menu again.
Setup
Tuning
Disc
Picture
Sound
Display
Connection
VHS
Others
Edit Profiles
Auto-Setup Restart
DVB Manual Tuning
Add New DVB Services
Signal Condition
2 BBC 2W DVB CH30
TAB
SELECT
OK
RETURN
Signal Quality
0
Signal Strength
0
RETURN
10
10
CH +
CH –
Setting Menus
Edit Profiles
Auto-Setup Restart
DVB Manual Tuning
Add New DVB Services
Signal Condition
1. Press [e, r] to select the channel you want to set.
– Select the channel by checking the signal strength and
signal quality displays.
[Refer to “Signal Condition” (➔ right) for signal strength and
signal quality.]
CHANNEL
68
Net ID TS ID Quality
– The unit starts searching for newly available digital terrestrial
channels. This takes about 5 minutes.
Tips
Tuning
Disc
Picture
Sound
Display
Connection
VHS
Others
Please wait!
Ch 21
Prog. Channel Service Name
SELECT
Press [w] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].
Setup
Add New DVB Services
The quality and strength of the signal are shown.
Press [1 2 CH] to select the other channel.
Signal Quality
Below 2 (display red):
The signal quality is so poor that there may
be interference in the pictures and sound.
2–5 (display orange):
The signal quality is basically adequate,
but brief interference in the pictures and
sound is possible in isolated case.
Over 5 (display green): Optimum picture and sound quality.
Signal Strength
The display for signal strength is grey. “0” means signal strength
0%, “10” means signal strength 100%.
If the signal is too strong, the display will change from grey to red.
Reduce the signal amplification at your aerial.
• When the signal is weak:
– check that the aerial is correctly positioned.
– adjust the aerial reception with “DVB Manual Tuning” in the
Setup menu (➔ left).
– check that the current digital broadcast channel is correctly
broadcasting.
79
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 79
2008/04/23 19:01:20
Playback/Recording Settings
Settings for Recording
Press [OK] to show the following settings.
To Others
Setup
Recording time in EP mode
(➔ 78, Accessing the Setup Menu)
All factory default settings are indicated with “Underlined” text.
Select the maximum number of hours for recording in EP mode.
[EP (6Hours)]:
You can record for 6 hours on an unused 4.7 GB disc.
[EP (8Hours)]:
You can record for 8 hours on an unused 4.7 GB disc.
Recording Format
Disc
Titles recorded to the HDD with “Recording Format” set to “Video
format” can be copied to DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW
(DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW using high speed
mode.
We recommend turning the setting “VR format” if high speed
copy to DVD-R, etc. is not necessary when recording a
programme. This setting is effective when recording from a
television programme or external equipment (including DV
equipment), or when copying from a finalised DVD-Video disc.
[VR format] High speed copy from HDD is possible only to
DVD-RAM.
[Video format] You can high-speed copy to DVD-R, etc. Press
[w, q] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
• In some cases, copying to DVD-R, etc. using
the high speed mode does not work (➔ 63,
“Important”).
e, r select “Disc” ➔ q ➔ e, rselect item ➔
Setup
Settings for Playback
Settings for Recording
Tuning
Disc
Picture
Sound
Display
Connection
VHS
Others
TAB
SELECT
RETURN
Settings for Playback
Press [OK] to show the following settings.
DVD Speed for High Speed Copy
Ratings
Set a ratings level to limit DVD-Video play.
Follow the on-screen instructions. Enter a 4-digit password with
the numbered buttons when the password screen is shown.
Do not forget your password.
• Setting ratings (When level 8 is selected)
[8 No Limit]: All DVD-Video can be played.
[1] to [7]:
Prohibits play of DVD-Video with corresponding
ratings recorded on them.
[0 Lock All]: Prohibits play of all DVD-Video.
Select the speed of high-speed copying (When using high-speed
copy compatible DVD-RAM 5X, DVD-R, +R 8X or +RW 4X
discs).
[Maximum]
[Normal (Silent)] Selecting “Normal (Silent)” means the noise
generated by this unit is less than “Maximum”,
however the time required for copying will
double (approximately).
• Changing ratings (When level 0 to 7 is selected)
[Unlock Recorder] [Change Password] [Change Level]
[Temporary Unlock]
Soundtrack
[English] [German] [French] [Italian] [Spanish] [Original]
[Other
]
Subtitle
[Automatic] [English] [German] [French] [Italian] [Spanish]
[Other
]
Menus
[English] [German] [French] [Italian] [Spanish] [Other
]
Notes
DVD-V Choose the language for audio, subtitles and disc menus.
If a language which is not recorded is selected, or if languages
are already fixed on the disc, the language set as the default on
the disc will be played instead.
[Original]
The original language of each disc will be
selected.
] This is the language code setting. Input a code
[Other
number with the numbered buttons (➔ 103,
“Language code list”).
[Automatic]
If the language selected for “Soundtrack” is
not available, subtitles of that language will
automatically appear if available on the disc.
80
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 80
2008/04/23 19:01:21
Picture and Sound Settings
Digital Audio Output
To Others
Setup
Change the settings when you have connected equipment through
the unit’s DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal (➔ 88).
Press [OK] to show the following settings.
PCM Down Conversion
(➔ 78, Accessing the Setup Menu)
All factory default settings are indicated with “Underlined” text.
Picture
e, r select “Picture” ➔ q ➔ e, rselect item ➔
Tuning
Disc
Picture
Sound
Display
Connection
VHS
Others
Comb Filter
Still Mode
Seamless Play
Off
Automatic
On
Dolby Digital
TAB
SELECT
RETURN
Comb Filter
Select the picture sharpness when recording.
The setting is fixed with “On” if you set “TV System” to “NTSC”
(➔ 82).
[On]
Select it to record clear picture.
[Off]
Normally, use this setting.
Still Mode
Select the type of picture shown when you pause play. (➔ 104,
“Frame and Field”)
[Automatic]
[Field]
Select if jittering occurs when “Automatic” is selected.
[Frame]
Select if you cannot see small text or fine patterns
clearly when “Automatic” is selected.
Select the play mode between playlist chapter segments and
partially deleted titles.
[On]
The chapters in playlists are played seamlessly. This does
not work when there are several audio types included
on the playlist and when using Quick View (Play x1.3).
Additionally, the positioning of chapter segments may
change slightly.
[Off]
The points where chapters in playlists change are played
accurately, but the picture may freeze for a moment.
Sound
Choose whether to output by “Bitstream”
which processes DTS signals on other
connected equipment or to convert the signals
to “PCM (2ch)” on the unit before output.
[Bitstream]
When you have connected the
unit to a piece of equipment
having DTS logo.
When you have connected the
unit to a piece of equipment that
doesn’t have DTS logo.
MPEG
Choose whether to output by “Bitstream” which processes MPEG
audio signals on other connected equipment or to convert the
signals to “PCM (2ch)” on the unit before output.
[Bitstream] When you have connected the unit to a piece of
equipment with a built-in MPEG decoder.
[PCM]
When you have connected the unit to a piece of
equipment without a built-in MPEG decoder.
Audio Mode for XP Recording
e, r select “Sound” ➔ q ➔ e, rselect item ➔
Tuning
Disc
Picture
Sound
Display
Connection
VHS
Others
DTS
[PCM]
Seamless Play
Setup
Choose whether to output by “Bitstream”
which processes Dolby Digital signals on other
connected equipment or to convert the signals to
“PCM (2ch)” on the unit before output.
[Bitstream] When you have connected the unit
to a piece of equipment having
Dolby Digital logo.
[PCM]
When you have connected the unit
to a piece of equipment that doesn’t
have Dolby Digital logo.
Setting Menus
Setup
Select how to output audio with a sampling frequency of 96 kHz
or 88.2 kHz.
Signals are converted to 48 kHz or 44.1 kHz despite the above
settings if the signals have a sampling frequency of over 96 kHz
or 88.2 kHz, or the disc has copy protection.
[On]
Signals are converted to 48 kHz or 44.1 kHz. (Choose
when the connected equipment cannot process signals
with sampling frequency of 96 kHz or 88.2 kHz.)
[Off]
Signals are output as 96 kHz or 88.2 kHz. (Choose
when the connected equipment can process signals with
sampling frequency of 96 kHz or 88.2 kHz.)
Dynamic Range Compression
Off
M1
Bilingual Audio Selection
Digital Audio Output
Audio Mode for XP Recording Dolby Digital
Audio Mode for DV Input Stereo 1
Choose the audio type when recording or copying with XP mode.
[Dolby Digital] (➔ 104)
[LPCM] (➔ 104)
• The picture quality of LPCM recordings may be lower than that of
normal XP mode recordings.
• The audio recording becomes Dolby Digital even if you selected
LPCM when using a recording mode other than XP.
Audio Mode for DV Input
TAB
SELECT
RETURN
Dynamic Range Compression
DVD-V (Dolby Digital only)
Change the dynamic range (➔ 104) for easier listening in low
volume.
[On] [Off]
Bilingual Audio Selection
When recording bilingual programmes from equipment connected
to the DV IN terminal of this unit, select whether to record the main
or secondary audio type.
[M 1] [M 2]
You can select the kind of audio when recording from the unit’s DV
IN terminal (➔ 33).
[Stereo 1]
Records audio (L1, R1)
[Stereo 2]
Records added audio such as narration (L2, R2)
subsequent to original recording.
[Mix]
Records both Stereo 1 and Stereo 2.
When recording bilingual broadcast, select the type of audio in
advance from “Bilingual Audio Selection” (➔ left).
Incorrect settings can cause noise to be output which can be
harmful to your ears and speakers, and audio will not be recorded
properly on media such as mini discs.
81
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 81
2008/04/23 19:01:22
Display, Connection and VHS Settings
TV Aspect
To Others
Setup
This setting needs to be changed when connected to a 4:3
standard aspect TV.
Press [e, r] to select the TV Aspect, then press [OK].
[16:9] [4:3] [Letterbox]
TV Aspect
Setup
(➔ 78, Accessing the Setup Menu)
All factory default settings are indicated with “Underlined” text.
4:3 TV
4:3
Letterbox
Display
e, r select “Display” ➔ q ➔ e, rselect item ➔
Tuning
Disc
Picture
Sound
Display
Connection
VHS
Others
Tuning
Disc
Picture
Sound
Display
Setup
16:9 WIDE TV
16:9
DVB Preferred Subtitles English
On-Screen Messages 5 sec.
FL Display
Bright
New Service Message Automatic
Screen Saver
On
SELECT
TAB
Connection
VHS
Others
SELECT
OK
RETURN
Notes
• Aspect 4:3/16:9
4:3
16:9
4:3 standard aspect television
16:9 widescreen television
RETURN
DVB Preferred Subtitles
Choose the subtitle language for digital broadcast.
If the selected subtitle is not available, then the available subtitle
will be shown.
[English] [Welsh] [Gaelic] [English for hearing impaired]
[Welsh for hearing impaired] [Gaelic for hearing impaired]
• 16:9: When connected to a 16:9 widescreen television. However,
the 4:3 aspect ratio picture expands left and right.
• 4:3: When connected to a 4:3 aspect
television, side picture is trimmed for
16:9 picture (➔ 104, Pan & Scan).
• Letterbox: When connected to a 4:3 aspect
television, widescreen picture is
shown in the letterbox style (➔ 104).
On-Screen Messages
Choose the approximate time until the digital channel information
screen (➔ 52) disappears automatically.
The length of time the control panel (➔ 51) is displayed can also
be changed, but “Off” does not work.
[Off]
The digital channel information is not displayed.
[3 sec.] [5 sec.] [7 sec.] [10 sec.]
FL Display
Changes the brightness of the unit’s display.
Regardless of the setting, when “Power Save” (➔ 84) is “On” and
this unit is turned off, the unit’s display is turned off.
[Bright]
[Dim]
New Service Message
When a new DVB channel is added this unit will be informed automatically.
Then the confirmation message appears. If you select “Yes” on the display,
Auto-Setup starts (All channel settings and all created profiles are deleted.
The timer recording programmes are also cancelled.).
[Automatic]
[Off]
The Service Messages are not shown.
Screen Saver
[On]
When this unit is not operated for approximately
5 minutes, the screen saver is displayed. To return to
the previous screen, press [OK].
[Off]
Connection
e, r select “Connection” ➔ q ➔ e, rselect item ➔
Setup
Tuning
Disc
Picture
Sound
Display
Connection
VHS
Others
TV Aspect
Progressive
TV System
HDMI Settings
AV 1 Output
AV 2 Settings
TAB
82
16:9
Off
PAL
RGB 2
SELECT
RETURN
Progressive
You can enjoy progressive video by connecting this unit’s
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminals to an LCD/plasma television
or LCD projector compatible with progressive scan (➔ 105).
Before this setting, set “AV1 Output” to “Video (with component)” or
“S Video (with component)” (➔ 83).
Press [e, r] to select “On”, then press [OK].
[On] Output becomes progressive.
[Off]
This setting is fixed with “Off” and there is no output from the
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminals if you set “AV1 Output” to “RGB
1 (without component)” or “RGB 2 (without component)” (➔ 83).
Notes
• When connected to a regular television (CRT: cathode ray
tube) or a multi-system television using PAL mode, even if it is
progressive compatible, progressive output can cause some
flickering. Turn off “Progressive” if this occurs (➔ 75).
• Picture will not be displayed correctly if connected to an
incompatible television.
TV System
Change this setting if you connect an NTSC television or to record
NTSC video from another source.
1. Press [e, r] to select the TV System, then press [OK].
[PAL]
– Select when connecting to a PAL or Multi-system
television. Programmes recorded using NTSC are
played as PAL 60.
– Select to record television programmes and PAL
input from other equipment.
– HDD Select when playing a PAL input title
recorded on the HDD.
[NTSC] – Select when connecting to an NTSC television.
Television programmes cannot be recorded properly.
– Select to record NTSC input from other equipment.
– HDD Select when playing an NTSC input title
recorded on the HDD.
The confirmation screen appears.
2. Press [w] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].
Tips
To change the setting all at once (PAL ↔ NTSC)
While stopped, press and hold [g] and [; OPEN/CLOSE] on
the main unit simultaneously for about 5 seconds.
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 82
2008/04/23 19:01:23
AV2 Settings
1
HDMI Video Format
2
You can only select items compatible with the connected
equipment. If you are concerned about output picture quality, it
may be improved by changing the setting.
[576i/480i] [576p/480p] [720p] [1080i]
[1080p]
When outputting 1080p signal, we recommend using
High Speed HDMI Cables that have the HDMI logo
(as shown on the cover) and are less than 5 meters
to prevent video distortion etc.
[Automatic] Automatically selects the output resolution best suited
to the connected television (1080p, 1080i, 720p,
576p/480p or 576i/480i).
Aspect for 4:3 Video
To play a 4:3 title when connected with an HDMI cable, set how
to show pictures on a 16:9 widescreen television. 4:3 picture from
HDMI output will be slightly smaller than that from the other outputs,
e.g. Scart and component, this is not a malfunction of the unit.
[4:3]
Picture output expands left or right.
[16:9]
Picture is output as original aspect with side panels.
Digital Audio Output
[HDMI and Optical]
[Optical Only]
Select when this unit is connected to an
amplifier with an optical digital audio cable
(➔ 88) and connected to a TV with an HDMI
cable (➔ 12) and you want to enjoy the
highest quality of audio from discs.
Set to match the connected equipment.
• Press [OK] to show the following settings.
AV2 Input
Set to “RGB/Video” or “RGB” when receiving or recording RGB
output from external equipment.
[RGB/Video] The unit automatically detects whether the input signal
from the AV2 terminal is an RGB signal or other signals
and makes settings.
[RGB]
[Video]
[S Video]
Ext Link
This setting cannot be made when the “TV System” is set to
“NTSC” (➔ 82).
[Ext Link 1] When this unit is connected to a satellite receiver with
a 21-pin Scart cable and this unit receives a control
signal.
Start and stop timings of recording are controlled by
the control signal.
[Ext Link 2] When external equipment with a timer function is
connected.
Recording is continued while the image signal is being
sent to the unit from the external equipment.
Recording is stopped when the image signal is halted
by turning the external equipment off.
1 Depending on the connected equipment, some items may be
shaded in grey on the display and cannot be selected, or you may
not be able to change the settings.
2 Choose the setting to suit your TV and preference.
VHS
e, r select “VHS” ➔ q ➔ e, rselect item ➔
Setup
VIERA Link
[On]
[Off]
Select when you do not want to use “HDAVI
Control”.
AV1 Output
Set according to the terminal of the connected TV.
Select “Video (with component)” or “S Video (with component)”
for component output (progressive output).
Set according to the signal and terminal of the connected TV.
[Video (with component)]
Select when a TV is connected that can receive a composite signal.
[S Video (with component)]
Select when a TV is connected that can receive an S Video signal.
[RGB 1 (without component)]
Select when a TV is connected that can receive an RGB signal.
If you always would like to view the picture from the unit in RGB
signal, select this mode. The TV screen will automatically switch to
display the picture from the unit when the unit is turned on.
[RGB 2 (without component)]
Select when a TV is connected that can receive an RGB signal.
If you would like to switch to display the picture from the unit only
when playback or viewing menus, select this mode.
• If this unit is connected with an HDMI cable, you cannot select
“RGB 1 (without component)” or “RGB 2 (without component)”.
Tuning
Disc
Picture
Sound
Display
Connection
VHS
Others
Tape Length
SQPB
Auto (E-240)
Automatic
SELECT
TAB
RETURN
Tape Length
Set the length of the tape you are using so the unit can show the
correct remaining time.
[Auto (E-240)] The unit automatically distinguishes E30, -60, -90,
-120, -180, and -240 tapes.
[E-195]
For E195 tape
[E-260]
For E260 tape
[E-300]
For E300 tape
Setting Menus
HDMI Settings
• Press [OK] to show the following settings.
SQPB
To play back video cassettes recorded in S-VHS format (SQPB;
S-VHS Quasi Playback)
[Automatic]
This unit automatically detects the format in which
the recording was made and selects the same format
for playback. However, picture distortion may appear.
Therefore, set to [On] or [Off].
[On]
Use this setting when playing back a cassette tape
recorded in the S-VHS format.
[Off]
Use this setting when playing back a cassette tape
recorded in the VHS format only.
83
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 83
2008/04/23 19:01:25
System Settings
System Update
To Others
Setup
(➔ 78, Accessing the Setup Menu)
All factory default settings are indicated with “Underlined” text.
Others
e, r select “Others” ➔ q ➔ e, rselect item ➔
Setup
Tuning
Disc
Picture
Sound
Display
Connection
VHS
Others
Remote Control
Clock
Owner ID
Power Save
DivX Registration
System Update
Initialize
DVD 1
On
SELECT
TAB
RETURN
Remote Control (➔ 94)
[DVD 1] [DVD 2] [DVD 3]
Clock (➔ 14)
Owner ID (➔ 13)
In order to prevent another person from using this unit if it is
stolen, you can set a PIN number and input your personal
information.
Once the PIN number has been set, you cannot return to the
factory preset. Make sure not to forget this.
• PIN number
• Name
• House No.
• Postcode
Power Save
[On] [Off]
Refer to the following when “Power Save” is set to “On”.
• Power consumption is minimized when the unit is turned off
(➔ 106).
• Startup of the unit becomes slower compared to when “Power
Save” is “Off”.
• When the unit is off, satellite programmes cannot be watched on
the TV because the signal from the satellite receiver connected
to AV2 input terminal of this unit is not looped through. To watch
them, turn on the unit.
DivX Registration
You need this registration code to purchase and play DivX
Video-on-Demand (VOD) content (➔ 43).
In order to update this unit, the TV Guide download, and support
system changes made by broadcasts, this unit periodically
performs software updates.
• Press [OK] to show the following settings.
• Update data and EPG download information are sent by an
unscheduled digital broadcast. In order to receive these updates,
you must be able to receive digital broadcasts.
• An update will take approximately 60 minutes. While the update
is in progress,“SW-DL” appears on the unit’s display.
You cannot operate the unit until the update is complete.
Removing the AC mains lead while the update is in progress
may damage the unit.
• An EPG download will take approximately 30 minutes.
While the EPG download is in progress, “GUIDE” appears on the unit’s
display. The EPG download can be interrupted by switching on the unit.
• To avoid hearing the startup sound of System Update for the
unit, perform the following steps.
– Select the time for Software Update (➔ below, TV Guide/
Software search period).
– Set “TV Guide Download in Standby” and “Software Update in
Standby”(➔ below) to “Off”, and update manually (➔ below,
Software Update Search Now).
TV Guide Download in Standby
[On]
When the unit is turned off, EPG data is downloaded
automatically.
[Off]
Software Update in Standby
[On]
You can perform the unit updates automatically when
the unit is turned off.
[Off]
TV Guide/Software search period
Selects the time to automatically perform EPG download and
updates when the unit is turned off. This can only be set when
“TV Guide Download in Standby” and “Software Update in
Standby” is set to “On”.
• If there is a programmed recording set for the time you have
selected, the programmed recording will be given priority.
When the GUIDE Plus+ system is not available
[Automatic] The unit will give priority to searching for update data
at midnight.
[02:00-06:00] [06:00-10:00] [10:00-14:00]
[14:00-18:00] [18:00-22:00] [22:00-02:00]
When the GUIDE Plus+ system is available
[Automatic]
[Daytime] Updating is executed during daytime (06:00–22:00).
Software Update Search Now
Start the search for new software manually.
A new software version is announced by a message. Do not
switch your unit off during the update. This could result in the loss
of data. A message shows that the update has finished. If a new
software version is not going to be broadcast until the next few
days, a corresponding message also appears.
• If applicable update data is found, press [w, q] to select “Yes”
and press [OK].
GUIDE Plus+ System Information
You can check the condition of GUIDE Plus+ system of this unit.
Post Code
You can input the postal code which is necessary to download
area specific information of GUIDE Plus+ system.
Initialize
Press [OK] to show the following settings.
Shipping Condition
This returns Setup menus to default settings, except for the
ratings level, ratings password, Owner ID and Clock setting.
[Yes] [No]
• The timer recording programmes are also cancelled.
Default Settings
This returns Setup menus to default settings, except for the
programmed channels, time settings, disc language settings,
ratings level, ratings password, Owner ID and remote control code.
[Yes] [No]
84
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 84
2008/04/23 19:01:26
Other Settings
Press and hold [OK] and [RETURN] at the same time
until “X HOLD” appears on the unit’s display.
If you press a button while the Child Lock is on, “X HOLD”
appears on the unit’s display and operation is impossible.
Tips
To cancel the Child Lock
Press and hold [OK] and [RETURN] at the same time
until “X HOLD” disappears.
Using the Unit’s Remote Control to
Operate the TV
You can configure the remote control TV operation buttons to
turn the television on/off, change the television input mode,
select the television channel and change the television
volume.
TV
CH
VOL
AV
TV operation
buttons
1 2 3
Point the remote control at the TV.
While pressing and holding [^ TV],
enter the code from the table below using the
numbered buttons.
e.g., 01: press [0] ➔ [1]
Test the TV functions of the remote control for
operability.
– If the functions do not work, repeat steps
–
using different codes, if available. Some TVs may
not be compatible with the unit’s remote control.
Remote Control Codes for the TV
Manufacturer
Panasonic
AIWA
AKAI
BEJING
BEKO
BENQ
BP
BRANDT
BUSH
CENTREX
CHANGHONG
CURTIS
DAEWOO
DESMET
DUAL
ELEMIS
FERGUSON
FINLUX
Code No.
01 / 02 / 03 / 04
35
27 / 30
33
05 / 71 / 72 / 73 / 74
58 / 59
09
10 / 15
05
66
69
05
64 / 65
05
05
05
10 / 34
61
Code No.
21
53
63 / 67
05 / 50 / 51
05
36
09
52
05 / 22 / 23 / 40 / 41
05
30
25
49
17 / 30 / 39 / 70
52
45
62
05 / 50 / 51
07 / 46
52
05 / 28
05 / 19 / 20 / 47
24
36
33
25 / 26 / 27 / 60 / 61
10
45
30 / 39 / 70
05
49 / 69
41 / 48 / 64
05 / 06 / 46
05
37 / 38
52
05
05
10
26
32 / 42 / 43 / 65 / 68
05
21 / 54 / 55 / 56
05 / 29 / 30
05 / 69 / 75 / 76 / 77 / 78
05 / 25
18
09
05
08
31 / 33 / 66 / 67 / 69
10 / 11 / 12 / 13 / 14
52
52
10 / 15 / 44
16 / 57
05
Setting Menus
The Child Lock deactivates all buttons on the unit and remote
control. Use it to prevent other people from operating the unit.
Manufacturer
FISHER
FUJITSU
FUNAI
GOLDSTAR
GOODMANS
GRADIENTE
GRUNDIG
HIKONA
HITACHI
INNO HIT
IRRADIO
ITT
JINGXING
JVC
KDS
KOLIN
KONKA
LG
LOEWE
MAG
METZ
MITSUBISHI
MIVAR
NEC
NOBLEX
NOKIA
NORDMENDE
OLEVIA
ONWA
ORION
PEONY
PHILCO
PHILIPS
PHONOLA
PIONEER
PROVIEW
PYE
RADIOLA
SABA
SALORA
SAMSUNG
SANSUI
SANYO
SCHNEIDER
SEG
SELECO
SHARP
SIEMENS
SINUDYNE
SONY
TCL
TELEFUNKEN
TEVION
TEX ONDA
THOMSON
TOSHIBA
WHITE
WESTINGHOUSE
YAMAHA
Other Settings
Child Lock
18 / 41
85
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 85
2008/04/23 19:01:27
Additional Connections
Using a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable
– You can use a variety of Q Link functions by connecting the unit to a Q Link compatible television (➔ 50).
– You can enjoy high-quality viewing by connecting the unit to an RGB compatible television.
“AV1 Output” in the Setup menu is set to “RGB 1 (without component)” or “RGB 2 (without component)” (➔ 83)
Make “AV2 Input” settings in the Setup menu (➔ 83).
Use of the supplied RF coaxial cable
To prevent interference patterns from appearing on your TV, use only the supplied RF coaxial cables when you connect this
unit to your Video Cassette Recorder and aerial outlet or aerial cable.
• Keep the RF coaxial cables as far away as possible from other cables.
• Do not roll up the RF coaxial cables.
HDD/DVD output and HDD/DVD/VHS output
The unit has HDD/DVD/VHS common out terminals and HDD/DVD priority out terminals.
HDD/DVD/VHS common out
HDD/DVD/VHS common out
• For HDD/DVD/VHS common out terminals, both HDD/DVD and VHS signals
can be output, e.g. RGB or composite video.
HDD/DVD priority out
AV OUT
• This is the dedicated terminal to enjoy pictures played on HDD/DVD in
higher picture quality, e.g. HDMI or component video.
• The HDD/DVD priority out terminals can also output the VHS signal.
However this is not possible during HDD/DVD recording or HDD/DVD timer
recording.
Y
RF
IN
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
PR
PB
S VIDEO
RF
OUT
OPTICAL
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
OUT
AV 2 (EXT)
AV 1 (TV)
HDD/DVD priority out
• Before connection, turn off the mains for all connected equipment and read the appropriate operating instructions.
Be sure to read the Caution for AC Mains Lead on page 3.
Adding a VCR: Connecting to a Television and a Video Cassette Recorder
To household
mains socket
Rear of TV
AV
RF IN
To the aerial
RF coaxial cable
(supplied)
21-pin Scart cable
(not supplied)
To household
mains socket
Use one of the RF
coaxial cable (black
or grey) to connect
this unit’s RF IN
terminal to your aerial
socket or aerial cable
(➔ 10).
AV OUT
Y
RF
IN
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
PR
PB
S VIDEO
RF
OUT
OPTICAL
AC IN
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
OUT
AV 2 (EXT)
AV 1 (TV)
Rear of this unit
To household
mains socket
21-pin Scart cable
(not supplied)
AC mains lead
(supplied)
AV
Rear of VCR
RF coaxial cable
(supplied, black)
The RF coaxial cable cannot be
used for showing pictures from the
unit. The unit must be connected
using another method, e.g. 21-pin
Scart cable to show pictures from
the unit on the television set.
RF IN RF OUT
After completing the above connections, proceed to the TV Tuning (➔ 13).
To recording from a VCR
Refer to “Recording from an External Device” (➔ 32).
86
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 86
2008/04/23 19:01:28
• You can connect this unit to a TV using the audio/video (AV) cable, S Video cable or component video cables instead of the 21pin Scart cable (➔ 10, 11, 86).
Using an Audio/Video Cable
Using an S Video Cable
The S VIDEO OUT terminal achieves a more vivid picture
than the VIDEO OUT terminal. (Actual results depend on the
television.)
Rear of TV
AUDIO IN VIDEO
IN
R
L
S VIDEO
IN
Rear of TV
S VIDEO
IN
AUDIO IN VIDEO
IN
R
L
Red White Yellow
Audio/video cable
(supplied)
Red White
Audio/video cable
(supplied)
Leave the yellow
cable unconnected.
S Video cable
(not supplied)
T
RedCOMPONENT
White Yellow
VIDEO OUT
Y
PB
RF
IN
PR
S VIDEO
T
Red White
RF
OUT
PTICAL
AC AUDIO
IN OUT
GITAL
CM/BITSTREAM)
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
OUT
AV 2 (EXT)
Y
RF
IN
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
PB
PR
Rear of this unit
S VIDEO
RF
OUT
PTICAL
AC AUDIO
IN OUT
GITAL
CM/BITSTREAM)
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
OUT
AV 2 (EXT)
Rear of this unit
Using Component Video Cables
The COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminals on this unit can be used for either interlace or progressive output (➔ 105) to provide a
purer picture than the S VIDEO OUT terminal.
Rear of TV
COMPONENT
VIDEO IN
PB PR
AUDIO IN VIDEO
IN
R
L
Y
Leave the yellow cable
unconnected.
Red White
Component video cables
(not supplied)
OUT
Y
RF
IN
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
PR
PB
S VIDEO
RF
OUT
OPTICAL
AC
IN AUDIO OUT
DIGITAL
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
OUT
AV 2 (EXT)
AV 1 (TV)
Rear of this unit
Audio/video cable
Leave the yellow cable
(supplied)
unconnected.
• For progressive output (➔ 75)
CRT
Notes
If you have a regular television (CRT : cathode ray tube)
Progressive output may cause some flickering, even
if it is progressive compatible. Turn off “Progressive”
if you are concerned about it (➔ 75). This is the
same for multi-system televisions using PAL mode.
DO NOT
Reference
Red White
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
Progressive output
This unit
COMPONENT
VIDEO IN
87
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 87
2008/04/23 19:01:29
Additional Connections
You can improve sound quality by connecting this unit to an
amplifier or system component using the audio cable or the
optical digital audio cable.
Connecting with an HDMI (High Definition
Multimedia Interface) Terminal
Using an Audio Cable for Better Sound
When connected to an HDMI compatible unit, an
uncompressed digital audio and video signal is transmitted,
enabling you to enjoy high quality, digital video and audio
with just one cable. When connecting to an HDMI-compatible
HDTV (High Definition Television), the output can be switched
to 1080p, 1080i or 720p HD video.
• Please use High Speed HDMI Cables that have the HDMI
logo (as shown on the cover).
• When outputting 1080p signal, please use the HDMI cables
5.0 meters or less.
Use this connection to play sound through speakers
connected to an amplifier or system component.
AUDIO IN
R
L
Rear of Amplifier or
System Component
Red White
Regarding VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM” function
Audio cable
(not supplied)
Red White
Y
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
PB
PR
S VIDEO
TICAL
Rear of this unit
TAL AUDIO OUT
M/BITSTREAM)
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
OUT
AV 2 (EXT)
Using an Optical Digital Audio Cable for
Better Sound
This method allows you to enjoy multi-channel surround
sound on DVD-Video.
When connecting with a Panasonic TV (VIERA) or a
receiver equipped with the “HDAVI Control” function, linked
operations would be possible. [➔ 50, Linked Operations
with the TV (VIERA Link “HDAVI Control™”/Q Link)]
• It is recommended that you use Panasonic’s HDMI cable.
Recommended part number: RP-CDHG10 (1.0 m), RPCDHG15 (1.5 m), RP-CDHG20 (2.0 m), RP-CDHG30
(3.0 m), RP-CDHG50 (5.0 m), etc.
• Non-HDMI-compliant cables cannot be utilized.
Using an HDMI (High Definition Multimedia
Interface) Cable
Rear of TV
Rear of Amplifier or
System Component
Connecting with
a Panasonic TV
(VIERA)
AV
HDMI IN
OPTICAL IN
HDMI cable
(not supplied)
Optical digital
audio cable
(not supplied)
Insert fully
with this
Do not bend
side up.
cable sharply.
AV OUT
Y
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
PR
PB
HDMI OUT
HDMI IN
Rear of receiver
HDMI cable
(not supplied)
AV OUT
S VIDEO
Y
RF
IN
COMPONENT VIDE
PR
PB
OPTICAL
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
OUT
Rear of this unit
• Connect an amplifier or system component with a built-in
decoder displaying these logo marks or MPEG decoder.
• Adjust settings in “Digital Audio Output” (➔ 81).
Notes
• When this unit is connected to an amplifier with an optical digital
audio cable and connected to a television with an HDMI cable,
you can enjoy the highest quality of audio from the disc by setting
“Digital Audio Output” to “Optical Only” in the Setup menu (➔ 83).
In this case audio is only output from the amplifier not the television.
• You cannot use DTS Digital Surround decoders not meant for DVD.
• Before purchasing an optical digital audio cable, check the terminal
shape of the equipment to be connected.
88
If the 21-pin Scart
cable is connected,
the following functions
are available.
• Direct TV Recording
(➔ 29)
• Watching pictures
from satellite receiver
(➔ 19)
(In this case, make
sure to switch the
television input to
“AV”.)
RF
OUT
OPTICAL
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
OUT
AV 1 (TV)
Rear of this unit
• Set “Digital Audio Output” to “HDMI and Optical” (➔ 83).
(The default setting is “HDMI and Optical”.)
Notes
• If connecting to equipment that is only compatible with 2
channel audio output, audio with 3 channels or more will
be down-mixed (➔ 104) and output as 2 channels, even
if connecting with an HDMI cable (some discs cannot be
down-mixed).
• For display units compatible with HDCP (High-Band width
Digital Content Protection) that are equipped with a digital
DVI input terminal (PC monitors, etc.):
Depending on the unit, picture may not display properly or
at all when connecting with a DVI/HDMI switching cable
(audio cannot be output).
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 88
2008/04/23 19:01:31
Media (Disc/SD Card/USB Memory) and Video Cassette Handling
Inserting Discs
Inserting/Removing the USB memory
1 Press [; OPEN/CLOSE] to open the tray.
Inserting the USB memory
– Insert a disc.
Insert label-up.
2 Press [; OPEN/CLOSE] to close the tray.
Notes
• When using 8 cm DVD-RAM or 8 cm DVD-R, remove the
disc from the cartridge.
• It is not possible to record or play continuously from one
side of a double sided disc to the other. You will need to
eject the disc and turn it over.
Automatic drive select function
[Only for discs with the write-protect tab on the cartridge
set to “PROTECT” (➔ 76, Setting Protection)]
• Before inserting any USB memory to this unit, ensure that
the data stored therein has been backed up.
• Check the orientation of the USB connector and insert it
straight in.
• Insert a USB device while the unit is stopped, so the “USB
device” screen is displayed. Select an item and press [OK]
to switch to the USB-related operations (➔ 42, 70).
Removing the USB memory
• Complete all USB-related operations and pull the USB
memory straight out.
• If a USB memory being accessed is pulled out, then the
data may be damaged.
Inserting a video cassette
RAM
DVD-V CD VCD
• If the unit is recording to the HDD or stopped, it automatically
switches to the DVD drive when a disc is inserted.
• If you eject a disc and close the disc tray, the HDD drive is
automatically selected.
Insert a video cassette.
(The surface on which you can see a roll of tape should face up.)
The unit is automatically turned on.
Inserting/Removing the SD Card
When the card indicator (“SD”) on the unit’s display is
flashing, the card is being read from or written to. Do not turn
off the unit or remove the card.
Such action may result in malfunction or loss of the card’s
contents.
• Inserting foreign objects can cause a malfunction.
From main unit
• Press [; EJECT] on the main unit.
From remote control
Inserting the card
• Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select VHS drive and then press
and hold [g STOP] for about 3 or more seconds.
If you are using a
e.g., miniSD
miniSD card,or a
microSD card, insert
it into the adaptor that
comes with the card.
Insert and remove this
adaptor from the unit.
ADAPTER
Insert the card label up with
the cut-off corner on the right.
Removing the card
1 Press on the
centre of the card.
2 Pull it straight out.
Automatic drive select function
• If you insert an SD card while the unit is stopped, the “SD
Card” screen is displayed. Select an item and press [OK] to
switch to the SD drive (➔ 42, 70).
• If you remove an SD card, the HDD drive is automatically
selected.
Video Cassette Information
Video cassettes
• Break off the video cassette’s tab
to prevent accidental erasure.
Cover the hole with a double
layer of adhesive tape when you
Tab
want to use the video cassette for
recording again.
• You can use video cassettes with the VHS and S-VHS
marks, but the unit is unable to make full use of the
characteristics of S-VHS video cassettes.
Video cassette care
• Poor quality or damaged video cassettes can cause the
heads to become dirty and malfunction. Store your video
cassettes carefully and discard them when they become
dirty or damaged.
• Never use video cassettes on which juice has been spilled
or those that are extremely damaged since this will not only
cause the heads to become dirty, but will also make the unit
malfunction.
Reference
Press on the centre of the
card until it clicks into
place.
To eject:
89
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 89
2008/04/23 19:01:33
Frequently Asked Questions
Setup
Page
How can I enjoy High Quality
Video up-converted to 1080p?
• Connect the unit to 1080p compatible HDTV using an HDMI cable.
Set “HDMI Video Format” in the Setup menu to “1080p”.
What equipment is necessary
to play multi-channel surround
sound?
• You cannot playback multi-channel sound on this unit without other equipment.
You must connect this unit with an HDMI cable or an optical digital audio cable
to an amplifier with a built-in (Dolby Digital, DTS or MPEG) decoder.
88
Can the headphones and
speakers be directly connected to
the unit?
• You cannot directly connect to the unit. Connect through the amplifier, TV, etc.
−
The television has a Scart terminal
and component video input
terminal. Which terminal should I
connect with?
• If you have a regular television (CRT: cathode ray tube), we recommend using
the Scart terminal. You can enjoy high-quality RGB video from this unit by
connecting to an RGB compatible television.
If you have an LCD/plasma television or LCD projector compatible with
progressive scan, connect through the component video terminals for high
quality progressive video.
If you have a CRT television or a multi-system television using PAL mode
that is compatible with progressive scan, we cannot recommend progressive
output as some flickering can occur.
10, 11,
86, 87
Is my TV progressive output
compatible?
• All Panasonic televisions that have 625 (576)/50i · 50p, 525 (480)/60i · 60p
input terminals are compatible.
Consult the manufacturer if you have another brand of TV.
−
When are the software updates
broadcast ?
• The unit shows automatically when a software update has been broadcast,
and also automatically updates the software if this function has not been
switched off in the Setup menu.
84
Discs
12, 83,
88
Page
Can I play DVD-Video bought in
another country?
• You cannot play DVD-Video if its region number does not include “2” or “ALL”.
Refer to the disc’s jacket for more information.
Cover
Can a DVD-Video that does not
have a region number be played?
• Discs either without region encoding or region code 2 will not play on this unit.
−
What are the constraints regarding • The unit records and plays DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, and
DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, +R,
+RW, and plays DVD-RW (DVD Video Recording format). However you cannot
directly record to a DVD-R DL or +R DL disc on this unit (playback and copy
+R DL, and +RW compatibility with
the unit?
are possible).
• The unit also records and plays high speed recording compatible discs.
What are the constraints regarding
CD-R and CD-RW compatibility
with the unit?
15, 16
106
• After recording but before finalising these discs:
– You may not be able to play and record discs on this unit after recording
them on other Panasonic products or other manufacturer’s equipment.
– You may not be able to play and record discs on other equipment after
recording them on this unit.
After finalising the disc, however, you will be able to play it on any DVD-Video
compatible player.
−
• This unit plays CD-R/CD-RW discs which have been recorded in one of the
following standards:
CD-DA, Video CD, SVCD (conforming to IEC62107), DivX, MP3 and still
pictures (JPEG). Close the session or finalise the disc after recording. This
unit can recognize up to 300 folders (groups) and 3000 files (tracks) on a disc
with MP3 or still pictures (JPEG).
16, 18
• You cannot write to a CD-R or CD-RW with the unit.
−
90
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 90
2008/04/23 19:01:35
Recording
Page
Can I record from a commercially
• Most commercially sold video cassettes and DVDs are copy protected;
purchased video cassette or DVD?
therefore, recording is usually not possible.
−
Can DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format),
+R, +R DL, and +RW recorded
on the unit be played on other
equipment?
• You can play these discs on compatible equipment such as DVD players after
finalising the disc on this unit.
+RW It is not necessary to finalise +RW. To enable play on other DVD players,
please use “Create Top Menu” in the DVD Management menu.
77
• In any case, ability to play a disc depends on the condition of the recording, the
quality of the disc, and the capability and format constraints of the DVD player.
−
• If you play a DVD-R DL, +R DL or +RW, use compatible equipment.
−
• You can record if using the PCM signal. When recording DVD, change the
“Digital Audio Output” settings to the following via the Setup menu:
– PCM Down Conversion: “On”
– Dolby Digital: “PCM”
– DTS: “PCM”
– MPEG: “PCM”
However, only
– As long as digital recording from the disc is permitted.
– As long as the recording equipment is compatible with 48 kHz sampling
frequency.
81
• You cannot record MP3 signals.
−
GUIDE Plus+
Page
Is it possible to programme a
recording, with a start and end
time that are different from the
GUIDE Plus+ system?
• You can manually change the start and end time of programmes in the Timer
Recording menu. (Modification for start time or stop time is allowed up to
10 min.)
34
Can I receive GUIDE Plus+
system data via a connected
satellite receiver or a Set Top Box?
• No, only via the built-in tuner. To perform timer recordings with satellite
receivers or Set Top Boxes, please use the External Link feature or your unit’s
manual timer programming.
31, 34
What happens when I unplug my
unit from the household mains
socket?
• The GUIDE Plus+ system data will not be updated. If the unit is disconnected
from the AC mains for a longer period of time, then the GUIDE Plus+ data is
lost. And if the unit is left unplugged for approximately 60 minutes, the clock
and timer recordings that have been set are lost.
−
DVB-T
Page
Which aerial is suitable for
receiving digital terrestrial
broadcasts?
• Any (terrestrial) roof aerial can be used. However, depending on the area
where you live, a new aerial may be necessary. Consult your local TV aerial
installer.
−
Can this unit receive or record
High Definition (HD) broadcasts?
• No, this unit cannot receive or record High Definition (HD) broadcasts.
−
USB
What can or cannot be done using
the USB port on this unit?
Page
• You can play DivX, MP3 or still picture (JPEG) files on a USB memory.
• You can copy still pictures (JPEG) files on a USB memory to the HDD or DVD-RAM.
• You can copy MP3 files on a USB memory to the HDD.
• You can connect a video equipment and copy SD Video to the HDD or DVD-RAM.
• Data on the HDD or a disc cannot be transferred to a USB memory.
• Data on a USB memory cannot be edited or a USB memory cannot be
formatted on this unit.
• Some USB memories cannot be used with this unit.
Music
What will happen if I try to record
the same CD multiple times?
42
70
72
69
−
−
17
Page
• New album will be made following the existing album.
Can I transfer the music tracks from • No, you cannot.
HDD to the disc or USB memory?
−
Reference
Can a digital audio signal from
the unit be recorded to other
equipment?
−
91
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 91
2008/04/23 19:01:35
Messages
On the Unit’s Display
H
,F
(“ ” stands for a service number.)
DVD
(“ ” stands for a number.)
GUIDE
HARD ERR
NoCASSETTE
NoERAS
NoREAD
NoWRIT
FINAL
PLEASE WAIT
PROG FULL
PROTECT
REMOVE
SP 35:50, LP 151h
(“SP”, ”LP” and the numbers are
examples.)
SW-DL
UNSUPPORT
UNFORMAT
F74
F75
U59
U61
U76
U80
U81
U99
U88
X HOLD
Page
• An error has occurred. The number following “H” or “F” depends on the
status of the unit. Check the items below and in the Troubleshooting Guide.
If the service number still does not disappear after the check, reset the unit
(➔ 94, “To restore the unit if it freezes” ).
• If the service numbers fail to clear, note the service numbers and contact a
qualified service person.
• The remote control and the main unit are using different codes. Change the
code on the remote control.
• GUIDE Plus+ data is being downloaded.
• If there is no change after turning the unit on and off, consult the dealer where
the unit was purchased.
• You have not inserted a video cassette for the recording.
• You cannot delete items on this disc.
The disc may be damaged. Use a new disc.
• The disc is dirty or badly scratched. The unit cannot record, play, or edit.
• The disc may be incompatible or of poor quality.
• You have used a lens cleaner and it has finished operation. Press
[; OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit to eject the disc.
• You cannot write to this disc.
The disc may be damaged. Use a new disc.
• When the screen asking if you want to finalise the disc appears, the message
is displayed.
• Displayed when the unit is started. This is not a malfunction.
• The unit is carrying out its recovery process. You cannot operate the unit while
• There are already 32 timer recording programmes. Delete unnecessary timer
recording programmes.
• You have inserted a video cassette without the accidental erasure prevention
tab. Use a video cassette with an accidental erasure prevention tab.
• The USB device is drawing too much power. Remove the USB device.
• Available space on the HDD or disc.
The example “SP 35:50” is displayed when less than 100 hours are available
and the example “LP 151h” is displayed when over 100 hours are available.
“SP” and “LP” are recording modes, “35:50” means “35 hours 50 minutes” and
“151h” means “151 hours”.
• The unit is performing a software update.
• You have inserted a disc the unit cannot play or record onto.
• You tried to operate with a non-compatible USB memory.
• You inserted an unformatted DVD-RAM, DVD-RW, +RW, an unused +R, +R DL
or DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) that has been recorded on other equipment.
Format the disc to use it.
However all the recorded contents on the disc are deleted.
• The HDMI connection could not be authenticated due to a transfer malfunction.
Consult the dealer where the unit was purchased.
• The HDMI connection could not be authenticated due to an internal data malfunction.
Consult the dealer where the unit was purchased.
• The unit is hot.
The unit switches to standby for safety reasons. Wait for about 30 minutes until
the message disappears.
Select a position with good ventilation when installing the unit. Do not block
the cooling fan on the rear of the unit.
• (When a disc is not inserted) Displays when a malfunction has occurred
during recording, playback or copy to VHS etc. This is displayed when the unit
is in the recovery process to return to normal operation; it is not broken. Once
the display disappears you can use the unit again.
• HDMI cannot be output because you are connected to a model that does not
support copyright protection.
• The unit fails to operate properly. Press [^/I] on the main unit to switch the unit
to standby mode. Press [^/I] on the main unit again to turn the unit on.
• There was something unusual detected with the disc while recording, playing or copying;
there was a power failure or the AC mains lead was disconnected while the unit was on.
The unit is carrying out its recovery process. This process restores the unit to normal
operation. The unit is not broken. Wait until the message disappears.
• The Child Lock function is activated.
Press and hold [OK] and [RETURN] at the same time until “X HOLD” disappears.
−
−
94
84
−
89
−
6
15, 16
7
−
29
−
−
35
89
−
−
84
15, 16
17
76
−
−
−
−
−
−
96
85
The message is alternately displayed.
92
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 92
2008/04/23 19:01:35
On the TV
Authorisation Error.
Page
• You are trying to play the DivX VOD content that was purchased with a
different registration code. You cannot play the content on this unit. (DivX)
43
Cannot finish recording completely. • The programme was copy-protected.
• The HDD or disc may be full.
• The maximum number of title has been exceeded.
−
−
28
Cannot play.
• You inserted an incompatible disc.
16
Cannot playback.
TV system is different from the
setting.
To playback, please change the
TV System in Setup.
• You tried to play a title recorded using a different encoding system from that of
the TV system currently selected on the unit.
Alter the “TV System” setting on this unit to suit.
82
Cannot record to the disc.
• The disc may be dirty or scratched.
6
Cannot play on this unit.
• You tried to play a non-compatible image.
• Turn the unit off and re-insert the card.
18
89
Cannot record. Disc is full.
• HDD RAM -RW(V) +RW Create space by erasing unwanted titles. Even if you
Unable to format.
Please check the disc.
26, 54,
76
−
No cassette.
• There is no video cassette in the tape deck when playing or recording TV
programmes. Insert a video cassette.
89
The cassette is write-protected.
• A video cassette without a secure accidental erasure prevention tab is
inserted when recording programmes. Use a video cassette with a secure
accidental erasure prevention tab.
89
No Disc.
• You haven’t inserted a disc. Correctly insert a disc that the unit can play.
• The disc is upside down. If it is a single-sided disc, insert it so the label is facing up.
No folders.
• There is no compatible folder in this unit.
No SD CARD
No valid SD card.
• The card is not inserted. If this message is displayed with a compatible card
already inserted, turn off the unit, remove and then re-insert the card.
• The format of the card inserted is incomplete.
17, 18
Not enough space in the copy
destination.
• Create space by deleting any unnecessary items.
26, 54,
76
66, 71
• Delete one or more items registered on the copying list to ensure that the
“Destination Capacity” is not exceeded.
15, 16, 89
89
17
76
Now recording on DVD/HDD.
• The VHS plays back while recording on HDD or DVD. You can watch the VHS
To watch pictures on VHS, use
playback by connecting 21-pin Scart cable from AV1 on the unit to the television.
VHS cannot be output via “HDD/DVD Priority OUT” while recording to HDD or
AV1 socket, and switch to an
DVD.
appropriate AV channel on your TV.
86
Please set clock.
• Set the clock.
14
This is a non-recordable disc.
• The unit cannot record on the disc you inserted. Insert a DVD-RAM or
unfinalised DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R or +RW disc.
• The disc may be incompatible or of poor quality.
• You inserted an unformatted DVD-RAM, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL or +RW disc.
Format the disc with the unit.
• You cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL and +R DL disc on this unit.
Record to the HDD and then copy to the disc.
15
This disc is not formatted properly.
Format it using DVD Management
in FUNCTION MENU.
15, 16
76
−
26, 54,
76
Not enough space on HDD.
Space of 4 hours (in SP mode) is
necessary.
Maximum number of titles is
recorded on HDD. Please delete
unwanted titles.
• -R DL +R DL It is not possible to copy when there is not enough free space on
Rental Expired.
• The DivX VOD content has zero remaining plays. You cannot play it. (DivX)
43
• The operation is prohibited by the unit or disc.
−
the HDD or when the total number of the recorded titles on the HDD and the
titles to be copied are greater than 500.
Delete unwanted titles from the HDD.
Reference
Cannot record. Maximum number
of titles exceeded.
erase recorded content from the DVD-R, DVD-R DL or +R, +R DL, there is
no increase in disc space. Available recording space on a DVD-RW (DVDVideo format) or +RW disc increases when the last title is deleted (space may
increase slightly when you delete other titles).
• Use a new disc.
93
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 93
2008/04/23 19:01:36
Troubleshooting Guide
When Other Panasonic Products
Respond to this Remote Control
Use this function to synchronize the codes for the remote
control and the main unit when there are other Panasonic
products close to your unit.
With the unit stopped
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
Press [e, r] to select “To Others”, then press [OK].
Press [e, r] to select “Setup”, then press [OK].
Press [e, r] to select “Others”, then press [q].
Press [e, r] to select “Remote Control”, then
press [OK].
Press [e, r] to select the code (“DVD 1”, “DVD 2”
or “DVD 3”), then press [OK] to set.
Remote Control
Setup
Tuning
Disc
Picture
Sound
Press “ ” and “OK” together
for more than 5 seconds on the remote
control.
Display
Connection
VHS
Others
OK
RETURN
While pressing and holding [OK],
press and hold the numbered button [1], [2] or [3]
corresponding to the code set in step
for more
than 5 seconds to set.
8
To reset this unit
To reset the unit’s settings
All the settings except for the ratings level, ratings
password, Owner ID and Clock return to the factory preset.
The timer recording programmes are also cancelled.
On the main unit
Press and hold [2 CH] and [CH 1] for about 5
seconds.
– Refer to Tips of “Auto-Setup Restart”
(➔ 79) for detail information.
To reset the ratings level settings
With the unit stopped
Press [; OPEN/CLOSE] to open the disc tray.
On the main unit
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
Press and hold [* REC] and [q] for about 5
seconds.
To restore the unit if it freezes
On the main unit
Press and hold [8] for more than 10 seconds.
– The unit is turned off.
Press [OK] to complete.
When the following indicator appears on the unit’s display
– Change the code on the remote control to match the code
displayed for the main unit (➔ step ).
Tips
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
Before requesting service, make the following checks. If you are in doubt about some of the check points, or if the solutions
indicated in the chart do not solve the problem, consult your dealer for instructions.
The following does not indicate a problem with the unit:
• Regular disc/video cassette rotating sound.
• Poor reception due to atmospheric conditions.
• Image disturbance during search.
• Periodic interruptions to the reception due to satellite broadcasting breaks.
• Operations are slow to respond in power save mode.
• Operations are not working due to a poor-quality disc. (Try again using a Panasonic disc.)
• The unit freezing due to the activation of one of its safety devices (➔ above, To restore the unit if it freezes).
• When the unit is turned on or off, there may be an unexpected sound.
94
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 94
2008/04/23 19:01:36
General Issues
Power
Page
The unit does not turn on pressing
[^ DVD/VHS].
• Insert the AC mains lead securely into a known active household mains
socket.
• Linked timer recordings with external equipment is in recording standby
(“EXT-L” on the unit’s display blinks when [^ DVD/VHS] is pressed). Press
[EXT LINK] to cancel the recording standby.
10, 11,
86
31
The unit switches to standby
mode.
• One of the unit’s safety devices is activated. Press [8] on the main unit to
turn the unit on.
−
No power.
The unit is turned off automatically. • If you connected this unit to an “HDAVI Control” compatible TV with an HDMI
cable, or connected this unit to a Q Link-compatible TV with a fully wired 21pin Scart cable, this unit will be automatically set to standby mode when the
TV is set to standby mode.
General Issues
Displays
50
Page
The display is dim.
• Change “FL Display” in the Setup menu.
82
“0:00” is flashing on the unit’s
display.
• Set the clock.
14
The clock is not correct.
• Under adverse reception conditions, etc., the automatic time correction
function may not work. In this case, “Automatic” is automatically turned to
“Off”. If re-setting the Auto Clock Setting does not work, set the time manually.
14
The displayed time of this unit is
different from the actual recording
time or MP3 recording time.
• Times shown may disagree with actual times.
• -R -R DL +R +R DL The remaining capacity does not increase even if titles
are deleted.
• Available space on a DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) or +RW disc increases
when you delete the last title (space may increase slightly when you delete
other titles).
• If you record or edit about 200 times or more, the remaining capacity of DVDR, DVD-R DL, +R, and +R DL is reduced and then recording or editing may
be disabled (for the second layer on DVD-R DL and +R DL, this happens after
about 60 times).
• The time during searching may not be displayed accurately.
−
−
• The displayed recording/play time is converted from the number of frames at
29.97 frames (equal to 0.999 seconds) to one second. There will be a slight
difference between the time displayed and the actual elapsed time (e.g.,
actual one-hour elapsed time may display as approximately 59 minutes 56
seconds). This does not affect the recording.
−
• The tape counter does not change while playing unrecorded parts. The
“second” display changes as follows:
(e.g., Blank after 1 h 36 min)
−
• The unit’s display also appears like this if the tape is dirty or damaged.
Consult your dealer if this is the case.
−
• Ensure “Power Save” is set to “Off”.
84
Compared to the actual recorded
time, the elapsed time displayed
is less.
(Only when recording in NTSC)
The tape counter is not changing.
−
−
Reference
The clock does not display on the
unit when switched to standby.
−
95
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 95
2008/04/23 19:01:38
Troubleshooting Guide
General Issues
Operation
Page
Cannot operate the TV with the
unit’s remote control.
• Change the manufacturer code on the remote control.
• It may be necessary to set the code on the remote control again after
changing the batteries.
85
94
Cannot operate the DVD.
• Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive when operating DVDs or CDs.
20
Cannot operate the VHS.
• Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the VHS drive when operating video cassettes.
20
The remote control doesn’t work.
• The remote control code is wrong. Change to the correct code.
• The batteries are depleted. Replace them with new ones.
• Point the remote control at the remote control sensor on the main unit.
• Remove obstacles between the remote control and the main unit.
• Remove dust from the transmission window and the unit’s sensor.
• Coloured glass may obstruct the signal reception/transmission.
• Don’t place the signal sensor in direct sunlight or in areas that may be subject
to sun exposure.
• It may be necessary to set the manufacturer code again after changing the batteries.
• The Child Lock function is activated.
94
7
7
−
−
−
−
• Recording drive or playback drive has not been selected properly.
• Some operations are prohibited by the disc.
• The unit is warm (“U59” appears on the unit’s display). Wait until “U59” disappears.
• One of the unit’s safety devices may have been activated.
Reset the unit as follows:
Press [8] on the main unit to switch to standby mode.
If the unit doesn’t switch to standby mode, reset the unit (➔ 94, “To restore the
unit if it freezes”).
• The unit cannot be operated while performing an update. “SW-DL” appears on
the unit’s display while it is updating. Please wait until the “SW-DL” disappears.
20, 21
−
92
−
“U88” is displayed and the disc
cannot be ejected.
• The unit is carrying out the recovery process. The disc may be defective. Do
the following to eject the disc. Try another disc.
(1) Press [8] on the main unit to switch to standby mode.
If the unit doesn’t switch to standby mode, reset the unit (➔ 94, “To restore
the unit if it freezes”).
(2) While the unit is turned off, press and hold [g] and [CH 1] on the main
unit at the same time for about 5 seconds. (Ejection may take extra time
depending on discs.)
−
Cannot eject a disc.
• The unit is recording.
• The unit may have a problem. Eject the disc as in (2) above.
• Linked timer recordings with external equipment is in recording standby
(“EXT-L” on the unit’s display blinks when [^ DVD/VHS] is pressed). Press
[EXT LINK] to cancel the recording standby.
If the Child Lock function is activated, above operation does not work. Cancel
the Child Lock function.
−
−
31, 85
Startup is slow.
• Startup takes time in the following situations:
– A disc other than a DVD-RAM is inserted.
– The clock is not set.
– Immediately after a power failure or the AC mains lead is connected.
– When the unit is connected with an HDMI cable.
• When “Power Save” is set to “Off”, startup becomes faster than when “Power
Save” is “On”.
−
The unit is on but cannot be
operated.
General Issues
GUIDE Plus+
The GUIDE Plus+ system does
not receive any data.
“No Data” is displayed for some or
all stations.
The GUIDE Plus+ information is
not displayed properly.
The GUIDE Plus+ data is not
updated.
• Check whether the clock is properly set.
• If signal quality is bad (ghost images or limited reception), the GUIDE Plus+
system may not be able to receive any data.
• Perform “Auto-Setup Restart” in the Setup menu.
• Some stations are not supported by the GUIDE Plus+ system.
• Programme the Timer recording manually.
• Perform “Auto-Setup Restart” in the Setup menu.
• There was a programme change or GUIDE Plus+ information from a
broadcast station was possibly not correctly transmitted.
Check the current programme, e.g. on the Web site for the GUIDE Plus+
system provider or station provider.
• The unit must be in standby mode in order to update the data. If the unit is in EXT LINK
mode (“EXT-L” lights up in the unit’s display), then the data update may also not work.
• Make sure that the time is set correctly.
• Check whether “Off” is set under “TV Guide Download in Standby” and change
the setting in System Update in the Setup menu.
85
85
84
84
Page
14
−
79
−
34
79
−
−
14
84
96
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 96
2008/04/23 19:01:39
General Issues
DVB-T
Page
10, 11, 86
• Check the connections.
−
• Digital broadcast may not have started in your region yet or changed.
−
• The aerial may not be pointing in the direction of the TV station, or the
direction of the aerial may have changed due to strong winds or vibration. If
problem persists consult your local TV aerial installer.
79
• Perform “Auto-Setup Restart” in the Setup menu.
TV reception worsens after
• This can occur because the signals are being divided between the unit and
−
connecting the unit.
other equipment. It can be solved by using a signal booster, available from
electronics retailers.
After DVB Auto-Setup only some
• Check to ensure your area is covered by DVB transmissions.
−
or no DVB channels are found.
• Check that the aerial and antenna cable are designed for DVB. Use the
10, 11
supplied RF coaxial cable shown in STEP 2, Basic Connection.
If you live within 5-10 km of DVB transmission towers, a combined VHF/UHF
aerial should be adequate. Outside this area, separate VHF and UHF aerials
provide superior reception performance.
• Perform “Auto-Setup Restart” in the Setup menu.
79
Picture regularly breaks up on
• Check “Signal Condition”. If “Signal Quality” or “Signal Strength” are displayed
79
some channels, “No Signal”
in red or constantly changing, check aerial. If problem persists consult your
message is displayed.
local TV aerial installer.
• Check that the aerial and antenna cable are designed for DVB. Use the
10, 11
supplied RF coaxial cable shown in STEP 2, Basic Connection.
• Interference (known as impulse noise) from household appliances such as
−
light switches, fridges, etc. may cause picture break up and/or audio distortion.
Use a high quality quad shielded coaxial cable fly lead between this unit and
antenna wall socket to minimise impulse noise pickup. If problem persists
consult your local TV aerial installer.
• When “No Signal” message is displayed, check aerial connection.
−
• Adjust the aerial reception with “DVB Manual Tuning”.
79
• Perform “Auto-Setup Restart” in the Setup menu.
79
Picture very infrequently breaks up • Electrical atmospheric interference caused by local or distant lighting storms
−
on some or all channels.
or heavy rain with wind in “leafy” locations may cause pictures to break up and
audio to mute or distort momentarily.
• Impulse noise interference from an infrequently used electrical appliance, or a
−
passing vehicle or lawn mower with a “noisy” ignition system.
Unusual station sorting.
• The station sorting of this unit is pre-defined. Use profiles to sort the stations
78
as you want them.
• Select the length of time (3-10 sec.) in the “On-Screen Messages” in the Setup
82
The digital channel information
does not appear.
menu.
• The digital channel information will not appear during playback or recording.
−
• Perform “Auto-Setup Restart” in the Setup menu.
79
No Digital TEXT
• When subtitle is on or additional information in the digital channel information
−
is displayed, Digital TEXT does not work.
• Perform “Auto-Setup Restart” in the Setup menu.
79
• “Shipping Condition” was performed or the unit was in the delivery status. The
−
After the Auto-setup, there aren’t
any stations in the station list
Auto-setup was then started and interrupted.
although found stations were
Do an Auto-setup again and let it continue right through to the end. The data is
displayed during Auto-setup.
only saved after this has been completed.
The Signal Strength is over 100 % (> 10) • Reduce the signal amplification at your aerial.
79
Digital broadcasts cannot be
received.
VIERA Link doesn’t work.
VIERA Link
• Check the HDMI cable connection. Check that “HDMI” is displayed on the front
display when the power for the main unit is set to On.
• Make sure that “VIERA Link” is set to “On”.
• Check the “HDAVI Control” settings on the connected device.
• Some functions may not work if depending on the version of “HDAVI Control”
of the connected equipment. This unit supports “HDAVI Control 3” functions.
• If the connection for the equipment connected with an HDMI cable was changed, or if
there was a power failure or the plug was removed from the household mains socket,
“HDAVI Control” may not work. In this case, perform the following operations.
1. When the HDMI cable is connected to all equipment with the power on,
turn the TV (VIERA) on again.
2. Change the TV (VIERA) settings for the “HDAVI Control” function to off, and then
set to on again. (For more information, see the VIERA operating instructions.)
3. Switch the VIERA input to HDMI connection with this unit, and after this
unit’s screen is displayed, check that “HDAVI Control” is working.
The control panel does not appear. • The control panel is only displayed when connected to a TV with “HDAVI
Control 2” or “HDAVI Control 3” function.
Page
−
83
−
−
−
Reference
General Issues
51
97
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 97
2008/04/23 19:01:39
Troubleshooting Guide
General Issues
USB
The contents of the USB memory
cannot be read.
Playback Issues
• Remove the USB memory from the USB port and then insert again. If this
does not solve the problem, turn off and turn on the unit again.
• Check that the USB memory is inserted correctly.
• The format of the USB memory or of its contents is not compatible with the
unit. (The contents on the USB memory may be damaged.)
• The USB memory contains a folder structure and/or file extensions that are
not compatible with this unit.
• Turn off and then turn on the unit again.
• USB memories connected using a USB extension cable or a USB hub may
not be recognized by this unit.
• Some USB memories cannot be used with this unit.
• If inserted during playback, recording or copying etc., the USB memory may
not be recognized by this unit.
Page
−
89
17, 18
18
−
−
17
−
Picture
The images from the unit do not
appear on the TV.
Picture is distorted.
• Make sure recorder is connected to an appropriate AV input of the TV.
• Make sure the TV’s input setting (e.g., AV 1) is correct.
• The TV isn’t compatible with progressive signals. Press and hold [g] and [q]
on the main unit for about 5 seconds. The setting will change to interlace.
• The TV isn’t compatible with RGB signals.
Set “AV1 Output” in the Setup menu to “Video”.
• The unit’s “TV System” setting differs from the TV system used by the disc
now playing. While stopped, keep pressing [g] and [; OPEN/CLOSE] on the
main unit for 5 or more seconds.
The system switches from PAL to NTSC or vice versa.
• When this unit is connected with an HDMI cable, use a disc that matches with
this unit’s TV system.
• Picture may not be seen when more than 4 devices are connected with HDMI
cables. Reduce the number of connected devices.
Picture does not appear during
• Timer recordings work regardless of whether the unit is on or off. To confirm
timer recording.
the timer recording is going to work properly, turn the unit on.
The 4:3 aspect ratio picture
• Use the TV to change the aspect. If your TV does not have that function, set
expands left and right.
“Progressive” in the Picture menu to “Off”.
If you connect an HDMI cable, set “Aspect for 4:3 Video” in the Setup menu to “16:9”.
•
Screen size is wrong.
• Check the settings for “TV Aspect” in the Setup menu.
It may be possible to adjust the display mode on the TV. Refer to your
television’s operating instructions.
The screen changes automatically. • The display may turn to the screen saver mode automatically if there is no
operation for 5 minutes or more. Press [OK] to return to the previous screen.
• Set “Screen Saver” in the Setup menu to “Off” to turn off the screen saver function.
Titles recorded with 16:9 aspect
• 16:9 aspect programmes are recorded in 4:3 aspect in the following cases.
are stretched vertically.
– -R -R DL -RW(V) If you recorded or copied using “EP” or “FR”
(recordings 5 hours or longer) recording mode
– If you recorded or copied to a +R, +R DL or +RW
It may be possible to adjust the display mode on the TV. Refer to your
television’s operating instructions.
There is a lot of after-images when • Set “Playback NR” in the Picture menu to “Off”.
playing video.
When playing DVD-Video using
• Set “Progressive” in the Picture menu to “Off”. This problem is caused by the
progressive output, one part of the picture
editing method or material used on DVD-Video, but should be corrected if you
momentarily appears to be doubled up.
use interlaced output.
There is no apparent change in picture
• The effect cannot be seen with certain types of video.
quality when making adjustments in the
Picture menu using the on-screen display.
Cannot see the beginning of the
• (If connecting to a TV that supports VIERA Link with an HDMI cable)
title played.
When [q PLAY] is pressed on this unit’s remote control, you may not be able
to see the beginning of the title played until the picture is displayed on the TV.
Using [u] or [t], return to the beginning of the title.
The picture is distorted during play, • You may be playing a TV programme recorded with poor reception or
or video will not play correctly.
unfavourable weather conditions.
• The picture may be distorted or a black screen may appear briefly between
recorded titles in the following situations:
– between titles recorded with different recording modes.
– between scenes recorded with different aspect ratios.
– between scenes recorded with different resolutions.
– between playlist chapters.
Page
10 to 12,
86 to 88
−
−
83
82
−
−
−
75
83
82
−
82
−
75
75
−
−
−
−
98
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 98
2008/04/23 19:01:39
Sound
• Check the connections and the “Digital Audio Output” settings. Check the input
No sound.
mode on the amplifier if you have connected one.
Low volume.
• Check if TV is muted.
Distorted sound.
Cannot hear the desired audio type. • Check if amplifier is muted.
• Sound is not output while fast-forwarding during chasing playback and
simultaneous record and playback.
• Set “V.S.S.” in the Sound menu to “Off” in the following cases:
– When using discs that do not have surround sound effects, such as Karaoke discs
– When playing bilingual broadcast programmes
• Audio may not be output due to how files were created. (DivX)
• The sound effects will not work when the bitstream signal is output from the
HDMI AV OUT terminal or the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal.
• Audio may not be heard when more than 4 devices are connected with HDMI
cables. Reduce the number of connected devices.
• To output audio from a device connected with an HDMI cable, set “Digital
Audio Output” to “HDMI and Optical” in the Setup menu.
• Depending on the connected equipment, the sound may be distorted if this
unit is connected with an HDMI cable.
Cannot switch audio.
Playback Issues
• You cannot switch the audio in the following cases.
– When a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL or
+RW disc is in the disc tray while DVD drive is selected.
– When the recording mode is XP and “Audio Mode for XP Recording” is set to “LPCM”.
• When recording a digital broadcast with multiple audio channels, this will
record only the audio channel selected in “DVB Multi Audio” in the on-screen
display. The audio channel cannot be switched during playback.
• You have used a digital connection. Set “Dolby Digital” to “PCM” or connect
using audio cables (analogue connection).
• There are discs whose audio cannot be changed due to how the disc was created.
Operation
Page
81, 88
−
−
−
75
−
−
−
83
−
−
81
75
81, 88
−
Page
The image from this unit does not
appear on the TV.
• TV is not compatible with RGB signal. Set “AV1 Output” in the Setup menu to
“Video (with component)”.
Play fails to start even when
[q PLAY] is pressed.
Play starts but then stops
immediately.
• Insert the disc correctly with the label facing up.
• The disc is dirty.
• You tried to play a blank disc or a disc that is unplayable on the unit.
• You tried to play a +RW that needs to be finalised on the equipment used for recording.
• You may be able to copy a “One time only recording” title that was recorded to
DVD-RAM using a different Panasonic DVD Recorder to this unit’s HDD, but
play is not possible due to copyright protection.
• When recording to DVD-RAM using EP (8Hours) mode, play may not be possible on
DVD players that are compatible with DVD-RAM. In this case use EP (6Hours) mode.
• You cannot play discs during DV automatic recording.
• If playing DivX VOD content, refer to the homepage where you purchased it. (DivX)
• Make sure that the TV is turned on. If the menu or messages are displayed,
follow the on-screen instructions.
89
6
15, 16, 18
−
−
• This occurs between playlist chapters.
• This occurs between chapters and with partially deleted titles on finalised
DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW that
have been copied using the high speed mode.
• This occurs as scenes change during Quick View (Play x1.3).
• -R DL +R DL When playing a title recorded on both layers, the unit automatically
switches between layers and plays the title in the same way as a normal
programme. However, video and audio may momentarily cut out when the unit
is switching layers.
−
−
Audio and video momentarily
pause.
83
80
−
43
−
−
15
DVD-Video is not played.
• Ensure the DVD-Video region number for the disc is correct, and the disc is
not defective.
• You have set a ratings level to limit DVD-Video play. Change this setting.
Cover,
16
80
Alternative soundtrack and
subtitles cannot be selected.
• The languages are not recorded on the disc.
• You may have to use the disc’s own menus to select languages and audio tracks.
−
40
No subtitles.
• Subtitles are not recorded on the disc.
• Set “Subtitle” in the Disc menu to “On”.
−
74
Angle cannot be changed.
• This function depends on software availability. Angles can only be changed
during scenes where different angles are recorded.
−
Reference
Playback Issues
99
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 99
2008/04/23 19:01:39
Troubleshooting Guide
Playback Issues
Operation (Continued)
Page
You have forgotten your ratings
password.
• With the tray open, press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive, press and
hold [* REC] and [q] on the main unit simultaneously for about 5 or more
seconds.
94
Quick View (Play x1.3) does not
work.
• This does not work when audio is other than Dolby Digital.
• This does not work while recording in XP or FR mode.
−
−
The resume play function does not
work.
• Memorized positions are cancelled when
– press [g STOP] several times.
– open the disc tray.
– SD CD VCD USB turn off the power.
– a recording or timer recording was executed.
−
The Video CD picture does not
display properly.
• When connecting to Multi-system TV, select “NTSC” in “TV System” in the
Setup menu.
• When connecting to PAL TV, the lower part of the picture cannot be displayed
correctly during search.
82
Time Slip, Manual Skip, etc. do not
work.
• These functions do not work with finalised discs.
• Time Slip does not work when the unit’s “TV System” settings are different
from the title recorded on the disc.
−
82
It takes time before play starts.
• This is normal on DivX video. (DivX)
−
Picture stops.
• Picture may stop if the DivX files are greater than 2 GB. (DivX)
−
Cannot see the beginning of the
title played.
• (If connecting to a TV that supports VIERA Link with an HDMI cable)
When [q PLAY] is pressed on this unit’s remote control, you may not be able
to see the beginning of the title played until the picture is displayed on the TV.
Using [u] or [t], return to the beginning of the title.
−
Playback Issues
VHS Picture
On-screen display indicators do
not appear.
The grey background appears
during playback.
Playback Issues
Page
47, 82
−
−
• Press and hold [STTL
] for about 5 or more seconds to select the audio.
• Adjust the tracking.
• The tape is old or damaged.
Page
47
47
−
VHS Play
The playback screen flickers.
Recording Issues
• Select a setting other than “Off” in “On-Screen Messages” in the Setup menu.
– Press [STATUS ] to show the on-screen display indicators.
• You are playing a blank or poor quality portion of the tape.
• You can damage the unit if you play dirty or damaged tapes and this can
cause the grey background to appear.
VHS Sound
Cannot hear the desired audio
type.
There is noise when playing a
video tape.
Playback Issues
−
• The video head is dirty.
• The tape is old or damaged.
• Check the “SQPB” setting.
Page
7
−
83
Recording/Timer Recording/Copying/External input
Timer recording does not work
properly.
• The timer programme is incorrect or different timer programme times overlap.
Correct the programme.
• The programme is not in timer recording standby. (“z” in the timer recording
list is not on.)
1 Press [PROG/CHECK].
2 Press [e, r] to select the programme and press the “Red” button.
• The clock is not correct. Set the clock.
• The programme information in the GUIDE Plus+ system may not be correct. It
is recommended to modify the start and end times to allow a margin of a few
minutes.
Page
35
35
14
22
100
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 100
2008/04/23 19:01:40
Recording/Timer Recording/Copying/External input (Continued)
The recording lacks the beginning
or ending part of the programme
although the timer recording was
set on TV Guide.
Timer recording does not stop
even when [g STOP] is pressed.
The timer programme remains
even after recording finishes.
Cannot record.
Cannot copy.
Digital broadcasts cannot be
recorded or copied.
Part or all of a recorded title has
been lost.
Cannot copy VHS to HDD/DVD.
Cannot copy HDD/DVD to VHS.
• This occurs when the broadcast signals are not correct. We recommend you
set the timer again, allowing enough time for the start and end time. (Guide
Link function allows you to change the time by adding or subtracting up to a
maximum of 10 minutes.)
• Make sure that the recording drive is selected. Press [DRIVE SELECT] to
select the recording drive.
• When using the linked timer recording with external equipment, press [EXT
LINK]. (“EXT-L” on the unit’s display disappears.)
• The timer programme remains if set to daily or weekly.
• You haven’t inserted a disc or the disc you inserted cannot be recorded on.
Insert a disc the unit can record onto.
• RAM -RW(V) +R +R DL +RW The disc is unformatted. Format the disc.
• The write-protect tab on the cartridge is set to “PROTECT” or the disc is
protected with the “DVD Management” settings.
• Some programmes have limitations on the number of times they can be
recorded (CPRM).
• The disc is full or nearly full. Delete unneeded titles ( HDD RAM -RW(V) +RW ) or
use another disc.
• You cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL or +R DL disc on this unit.
Record to the HDD and then copy to the disc.
• -R DL +R DL In the following situations, you cannot copy. Delete unnecessary
titles from the HDD and then copy.
– If there is not enough space available on the HDD (If you will copy titles from
the HDD to a blank disc and fill the entire disc, HDD disc space equivalent
to 4 hours of SP mode recording is necessary.)
– If the number of recorded titles and the number of titles to be copied has
exceeded 500
• You cannot record and copy on finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVDVideo format), +R, +R DL discs. However, you can record and copy again if
you format DVD-RW.
• If you repeatedly insert discs or turn the unit on and off about 50 times or
more, the recording or editing of DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video
format), +R, +R DL, and +RW discs may be disabled.
• DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW
discs recorded on this unit may not be recordable on other Panasonic DVD
Recorders.
• The broadcast you are trying to record is copy-protected.
• This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already have PAL signal
recordings.
(However, both types of programmes can be recorded onto the HDD.)
Play of discs recorded with both PAL and NTSC on another unit is not
guaranteed.
• Some digital broadcasts are copyright protected with a “One time only
recording” security feature. This type of programme can only be recorded to a
CPRM compatible DVD-RAM.
• If the power shuts down or the AC mains lead is disconnected from the
household mains socket while recording or editing, the title may be lost or the
HDD/disc may become unusable. We cannot offer any guarantee regarding
lost titles or discs. You will have to format the disc ( HDD RAM -RW(V) +RW ) or
use a new disc.
• The write-protect tab on the cartridge is set to “PROTECT” or the disc is
protected with the “DVD Management” settings.
• Some video tapes on the market (including rental videos) are copy-protected
to prevent illegal reproductions. Copy-protected video tapes cannot be
properly recorded.
• You cannot copy using the One Touch Copying operation button while the
FUNCTION MENU window, the Timer Recording List screen, etc. are displayed.
• A video cassette without the accidental erasure prevention tab is inserted.
Use a video cassette with an accidental erasure prevention tab.
• Some DVDs on the market (including rental DVD) are copy-protected to prevent
illegal reproductions. Copy-protected DVDs cannot be properly recorded.
• You cannot copy using the One Touch Copying operation button while the
FUNCTION MENU window, the Timer Recording List screen, etc. are displayed.
Page
22
21
31
34, 35
15
76
76
15, 27,
104
26, 54,
76
−
26, 54,
76
−
−
−
−
82
15, 27,
104
−
76
−
−
−
−
−
Reference
Recording Issues
101
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 101
2008/04/23 19:01:40
Troubleshooting Guide
Recording Issues
Recording/Timer Recording/Copying/External input (Continued)
The sound level after editing is not
equal on HDD/DVD and on VHS.
• The sound level on HDD/DVD and VHS may not match depending on the disc.
When the sound level in a particular part of the sound source is soft or loud,
the sound may be recorded loudly or softly on a video tape.
Stripe-shaped black noise is
• An external playback device is interfering with the TV because the device is
recorded.
too close to the TV. Move the device away from the TV.
The programme name and the
• There was a programme change after timer recording was set but the
recorded title do not match.
recorded title still has the old programme name.
Cannot copy to a DVD-R, etc, disc • When recording to the HDD, set “Recording Format” to “Video format” in the
using the high speed mode.
Setup menu. (The default setting is “Video format”.)
• In the following cases, high speed mode does not work, even if the titles were
recorded with “Recording Format” set to “Video format”.
– +R +R DL +RW If recorded in “EP” or “FR” (recordings 5 hours or longer)
mode
– +R +R DL +RW If recorded in 16:9 aspect
– -R -R DL -RW(V) If recorded in 16:9 aspect using “EP” mode or “FR”
(recordings 5 hours or longer) mode
• +R +R DL +RW Titles recorded on other Panasonic DVD recorders with
“Recording Format” (“Rec for High Speed Copy”) set to “Video format” (“On”),
and then copied to the HDD on this unit may not copy to +R, +R DL or +RW
discs with high speed mode.
When copying, it takes a long time • Use a disc that is compatible with high speed recording. Even if the disc is
even in high speed mode.
high speed recording compatible, the maximum speed may not be possible
due to the condition of the disc.
• It takes longer than normal to copy many titles.
• You cannot high speed copy to DVD-R titles longer than 6 hours when using
other Panasonic DVD Recorders that are not compatible with EP (8 Hours)
mode recording.
An unusually loud sound is coming • When recording or high speed copying to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW
from the rotating DVD-R, etc.
(DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW the sound of the disc rotating may
be louder than normal, however, this is not a problem.
Cannot record video or sound from • The external device is not correctly connected.
the external device.
• The proper external input channel (AV2, AV3, or DV) is not selected. Press
[INPUT SELECT] to change.
• If images cannot be recorded or if the recording is aborted, check the
The DV auto recording function
does not work.
connections and the DV equipment settings.
• You cannot start recording until the images from the DV equipment appear on
the television.
• Recording may not be performed as desired if the time codes on the tape in
the DV equipment are not successive.
• Depending on the equipment, the DV automatic recording may not operate
properly.
• You can only record audio/video images on a DV tape.
Recording Issues
Cannot record.
−
80
63
−
−
−
−
−
32, 33
−
33
−
−
−
−
• A video cassette is not inserted. Insert a video cassette with an accidental
erasure prevention tab.
• The accidental erasure prevention tab has been removed. Cover the hole with
adhesive tape.
Page
89
89
Music
Tracks could not be copied to the
HDD.
ID3 tag of an MP3 file is not
completely displayed.
−
VHS Recording
“ ” flashes when I try to start
recording.
Recording Issues
Page
−
• If there are copyright protected tracks such as SCMS restrictions, they will not
be copied.
• Recording from CDs that do not conform to CD-DA specifications (copy
control CDs, etc.) cannot be guaranteed.
• Bonus tracks may not be copied.
• Only the track name and artist name can be displayed with this unit.
Page
−
−
−
−
102
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 102
2008/04/23 19:01:40
Editing Issues
HDD, DVD & SD
Cannot edit.
Cannot format.
Cannot create chapters.
Cannot mark the start point or the
end point during “Partial Delete”
operation.
Cannot delete chapters.
The available recording time
doesn’t increase even after
deleting titles on the disc.
Cannot create a playlist.
Editing Issues
• You may not be able to edit on the HDD if there is no available space.
Delete any unwanted titles to create empty space.
• The disc is dirty. Wipe with a damp cloth and then wipe dry.
• Disc may be defective or of poor quality.
• You tried formatting a disc that is not compatible with the unit.
• The unit writes the chapter division information to the disc when you turn it off
or remove the disc.
The information is not written if there is an interruption in the power.
• These operations are not possible with still pictures.
• You cannot set points if they are too close to each other. You cannot set an
end point before a start point.
• HDD RAM When the chapter is too short to delete, use “Combine Chapters” to
make the chapter longer.
• Available space on DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R, or +R DL does not increase even
after deleting previous titles.
• Available space on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) or +RW increases when you
delete the last title.
• You cannot select all the chapters in a title at once as the source of playlist
editing if the title also includes still pictures. Select them individually.
Page
26, 54,
76
6
−
76
−
−
−
56
−
−
−
Still Pictures
Cannot display Direct Navigator
screen.
Cannot edit or format a card.
The contents of the card cannot
be read.
Copying, deleting, and setting
protection takes a long time.
• This screen cannot be displayed during recording or copy or while the unit is
standing by for linked timer recording with external equipment.
• Release the card’s protection setting. (With some cards, the “Write Protection
Off” message sometimes appears on the screen even when protection has
been set.)
• Remove the card from the slot and then insert again. If this does not solve the
problem, turn off and turn on the unit again.
• The card format is not compatible with the unit. (The contents on the card may
be damaged.)
This unit is compatible with SD Memory Cards that meet SD Card
Specifications FAT12 and FAT16 formats, as well as SDHC Memory Cards in
FAT32 format.
• The card contains a folder structure and/or file extensions that are not
compatible with this unit.
• You can use SD Memory Cards with capacities from 8 MB to 2 GB and SDHC
Memory Cards with capacities from 4 GB to 16 GB.
• This unit cannot play AVCHD format motion pictures or MPEG4 on an SD
card.
• When there are a lot of folders and files, it may sometimes take a few hours.
• When repeating copying or deleting, it may sometimes take a long time.
Format the disc or card.
Page
−
76
−
17
17
−
−
−
76
Language code list Enter the code with the numbered buttons.
6566
6565
6570
8381
6577
6582
7289
6583
6589
6590
6665
6985
6678
6890
6672
6682
6671
7789
6669
7577
6765
Chinese:
Corsican:
Croatian:
Czech:
Danish:
Dutch:
English:
Esperanto:
Estonian:
Faroese:
Fiji:
Finnish:
French:
Frisian:
Galician:
Georgian:
German:
Greek:
Greenlandic:
Guarani:
Gujarati:
9072
6779
7282
6783
6865
7876
6978
6979
6984
7079
7074
7073
7082
7089
7176
7565
6869
6976
7576
7178
7185
Hausa:
Hebrew:
Hindi:
Hungarian:
Icelandic:
Indonesian:
Interlingua:
Irish:
Italian:
Japanese:
Javanese:
Kannada:
Kashmiri:
Kazakh:
Kirghiz:
Korean:
Kurdish:
Laotian:
Latin:
Latvian, Lettish:
Lingala:
7265
7387
7273
7285
7383
7378
7365
7165
7384
7465
7487
7578
7583
7575
7589
7579
7585
7679
7665
7686
7678
Lithuanian:
Macedonian:
Malagasy:
Malay:
Malayalam:
Maltese:
Maori:
Marathi:
Moldavian:
Mongolian:
Nauru:
Nepali:
Norwegian:
Oriya:
Pashto,Pushto:
Persian:
Polish:
Portuguese:
Punjabi:
Quechua:
7684
7775
7771
7783
7776
7784
7773
7782
7779
7778
7865
7869
7879
7982
8083
7065
8076
8084
8065
8185
Rhaeto-Romance:
8277
Romanian:
8279
Russian:
8285
Samoan:
8377
Sanskrit:
8365
Scots Gaelic:
7168
Serbian:
8382
Serbo-Croatian: 8372
Shona:
8378
Sindhi:
8368
Singhalese:
8373
Slovak:
8375
Slovenian:
8376
Somali:
8379
Spanish:
6983
Sundanese:
8385
Swahili:
8387
Swedish:
8386
Tagalog:
8476
Tajik:
8471
Tamil:
Tatar:
Telugu:
Thai:
Tibetan:
Tigrinya:
Tonga:
Turkish:
Turkmen:
Twi:
Ukrainian:
Urdu:
Uzbek:
Vietnamese:
Volapük:
Welsh:
Wolof:
Xhosa:
Yiddish:
Yoruba:
Zulu:
8465
8484
8469
8472
6679
8473
8479
8482
8475
8487
8575
8582
8590
8673
8679
6789
8779
8872
7473
8979
9085
Reference
Abkhazian:
Afar:
Afrikaans:
Albanian:
Amharic:
Arabic:
Armenian:
Assamese:
Aymara:
Azerbaijani:
Bashkir:
Basque:
Bengali; Bangla:
Bhutani:
Bihari:
Breton:
Bulgarian:
Burmese:
Byelorussian:
Cambodian:
Catalan:
103
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 103
2008/04/23 19:01:41
Glossary
Bitstream
Folder
CPRM (Content Protection for Recordable Media)
Formatting
This is a signal compressed and converted into digital form. It is
converted back to a multi-channel audio signal, e.g., 5.1-channel, by
a decoder.
CPRM is technology used to protect broadcasts that are allowed to
be recorded only once. Such broadcasts can be recorded only with
CPRM-compatible recorders and discs.
Decoder
A decoder restores the coded audio signals on DVDs to normal. This
is called decoding.
Deep Colour
This unit incorporates HDMITM (V.1.3 with Deep Colour) technology
that can reproduce greater colour gradation (4096 steps) when
connected to a compatible TV.
You can enjoy exceptionally rich, natural-looking colours, with
smooth, detailed gradation and minimal colour banding.
[A lower colour gradation (256 steps), without deep colour, will
be reproduced if connected to a TV which does not support deep
colour. The unit will automatically set appropriate output to suit the
connected TV.]
DivX
DivX is a popular media technology created by DivX, Inc. DivX media
files contain highly compressed video with high visual quality that
maintains a relatively small file size.
Dolby Digital
This is a method of coding digital signals developed by Dolby
Laboratories. Apart from stereo (2 channel) audio, these signals can
also be multi-channel audio. A large amount of audio information can be
recorded on one disc using this method.
When recording on this unit Dolby Digital (2 channel) is the default audio.
Down-mixing
This is the process of remixing the multi-channel audio found on
some discs into two channels. It is useful when you want to listen to
the 5.1-channel audio recorded on DVDs through your TV’s speakers.
Some discs prohibit down-mixing. If this is the case, this unit can only
output the front two channels.
Drive
In the instance of this unit, this refers to the hard disk (HDD), disc
(DVD), video cassette (VHS) and SD card (SD). These perform the
reading and writing of data.
DTS (Digital Theater Systems)
This surround system is used in many movie theaters. There is good
separation between the channels, so realistic sound effects are
possible.
Dynamic range
Dynamic range is the difference between the lowest level of sound
that can be heard above the noise of the equipment and the highest
level of sound before distortion occurs. Dynamic range compression
means reducing the gap between the loudest and softest sounds.
This means you can hear dialogue clearly at low volume.
Film and Video
DVD-Video are recorded using either film or video. The unit can
determine which type has been used, then uses the most suitable
method of progressive output.
Film:
Recorded at 25 frames per second (PAL discs) or 24
frames per second (NTSC discs). (NTSC discs recorded at
30 frames per second as well.)
Generally appropriate for motion picture films.
Video:
Recorded at 25 frames/50 fields per second (PAL discs)
or 30 frames/60 fields per second (NTSC discs). Generally
appropriate for TV drama programmes or animation.
Finalise
A process that makes play of a recorded CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R, etc.
possible on equipment that can play such media. You can finalise
DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, and +R DL on
the unit. After finalising, the disc becomes play-only and you can no
longer record or edit. However, finalised DVD-RW can be formatted
to become recordable.
This is a place on the hard disk, disc or SD card where groups of
data are stored together. In the case of this unit, it refers to the place
where still pictures (JPEG) and MPEG2 are stored.
Formatting is the process of making media such as DVD-RAM
recordable on recording equipment.
You can format DVD-RAM, DVD-RW (only as DVD-Video format),
+RW, SD card and the HDD or unused +R and +R DL on this unit.
Formatting irrevocably erases all contents.
Frame and Field
Frame refers to the single images that constitute the video you see
on your TV. Each frame consists of 2 fields.
=
Frame
+
Field
Field
• A frame still shows 2 fields, so there may be some blurring between
them, but picture quality is generally better.
• A field still shows less picture information so it may be rougher, but
there is no blurring.
HDD (Hard disk drive)
This is a mass data storage device used in computers, etc. A disk
with a surface that has been treated with magnetic fluid is spun and
a magnetic head is brought in close proximity to facilitate the reading
and writing of large amounts of data at high speed.
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface)
Unlike conventional connections, it transmits uncompressed digital
video and audio signals on a single cable. This unit supports highdefinition video output [720p (750p), 1080i (1125i) and 1080p
(1125p)] from HDMI AV OUT terminal. To enjoy high-definition video
a high definition compatible television is required.
JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group)
This is a system used for compressing/decoding colour still pictures.
If you select JPEG as the storage system on digital cameras, etc.,
the data will be compressed to 1/10-1/100 of its original size. The
benefit of JPEG is less deterioration in picture quality considering the
degree of compression.
LPCM (Linear PCM)
These are uncompressed digital signals, similar to those found on CDs.
MPEG2 (Moving Picture Experts Group)
A standard for efficiently compressing and expanding colour video.
MPEG2 is a compression standard used for DVD and satellite based
digital broadcasting. This unit records programmes using MPEG2.
SD Video files shot with a Panasonic SD video camera, etc. can be
copied to the HDD or a DVD-RAM disc.
MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3)
An audio compression method that compresses audio to
approximately one-tenth of its size without any significant loss of
audio quality.
Pan & Scan/Letterbox
In general, DVD-Video are produced with the intention that they will
be viewed on a widescreen TV (16:9 aspect ratio), so images often
don’t fit regular TVs (4:3 aspect ratio). 2 styles of picture, “Pan &
Scan” and “Letterbox”, deal with this problem.
Pan & Scan: The sides are cut off so the picture
fills the screen.
Letterbox:
Black bands appear at the top and
bottom of the picture so the picture
itself appears in an aspect ratio of 16:9.
Playback control (PBC)
If a Video CD has playback control, you can select scenes and
information with menus on the screen.
(This unit is compatible with version 2.0 and 1.1.)
104
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 104
2008/04/23 19:01:41
Progressive/Interlace
The PAL video signal standard has 625 (or 576) interlaced (i) scan
lines, whereas progressive scanning, called 625p (or 576p), uses
twice the number of scan lines. For the NTSC standard, these are
called 525i (or 480i) and 525p (or 480p) respectively.
Using progressive output, you can enjoy the high-resolution video
recorded on media such as DVD-Video.
Your television must be compatible to enjoy progressive video.
Panasonic televisions with 625 (576)/50i · 50p, 525 (480)/60i · 60p
input terminals are progressive compatible.
Protection
You can prevent accidental erasure by setting writing protection or
erasure protection.
RGB
This refers to the three primary colours of light, red (R), green (G),
and blue (B) and also the method of producing video that uses them.
By dividing the video signal into the three colours for transmission,
noise is reduced for even higher quality images.
Gracenote® Corporate Description
Music recognition technology and related data are provided
by Gracenote®. Gracenote is the industry standard in music
recognition technology and related content delivery.
For more information visit www.gracenote.com.
Gracenote® Proprietary Legends
CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc., copyright ©
2000-2008 Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright © 20002008 Gracenote. This product and service may practice one
or more of the following U.S. Patents: #5,987,525; #6,061,680;
#6,154,773, #6,161,132, #6,230,192, #6,230,207, #6,240,459,
#6,330,593, and other patents issued or pending. Some services
supplied under license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S. Patent:
#6,304,523.
Gracenote and CDDB are registered trademarks of Gracenote.
The Gracenote logo and logotype, and the “Powered by
Gracenote” logo are trademarks of Gracenote.
Sampling frequency
Signal Quality
This is the guide for checking the aerial direction. The numbered values
displayed do not indicate the strength of the signal, but the quality of
the signal (the signal to noise ratio, or “S/N”). The channels you can
receive are affected by weather conditions, seasons, time (day/night),
region, length of the cable that is connected to the aerial, etc.
Thumbnail
This refers to a miniature representation of a picture used to display
multiple pictures in the form of a matrix.
1080i
In one high-definition image, 1080 (1125) alternating scan lines pass
every 1/50th of a second to create an interlace image.
Because 1080i (1125i) more than doubles current television
broadcasts of 480i (525i), the detail is much clearer and creates a
more realistic and rich image.
1080p
In one high-definition image, 1080 (1125) scan lines pass at the
same time every 1/50th of a second to create a progressive image.
Since progressive video does not alternate scan lines like interlace,
there is a minimal amount of screen flicker.
720p
In one high-definition image, 720 (750) scan lines pass at the same
time every 1/50th of a second to create a progressive image. Since
progressive video does not alternate scan lines like interlace, there is
a minimal amount of screen flicker.
GUIDE Plus+, SHOWVIEW and VIDEO Plus+ are trademarks of
Gemstar-TV Guide International, Inc. and/or its related affiliates.
GEMSTAR-TV GUIDE INTERNATIONAL, INC. AND/OR
ITS RELATED AFFILIATES ARE NOT IN ANY WAY LIABLE
FOR THE ACCURACY OF THE PROGRAM SCHEDULE
INFORMATION PROVIDED BY THE GUIDE PLUS+ SYSTEM.
IN NO EVENT SHALL GEMSTAR-TV GUIDE INTERNATIONAL,
INC. AND/OR ITS RELATED AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR ANY
AMOUNTS REPRESENTING LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF
BUSINESS, OR INDIRECT, SPECIAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH THE PROVISION OR
USE OF ANY INFORMATION, EQUIPMENT, OR SERVICES
RELATING TO THE GUIDE PLUS+ SYSTEM.
http://www.europe.guideplus.com/
Gracenote® End-User License Agreement
USE OF THIS PRODUCT IMPLIES ACCEPTANCE OF THE TERMS
BELOW.
This application or device contains software from Gracenote, Inc. of
Emeryville, California (“Gracenote”). The software from Gracenote
(the “Gracenote Software”) enables this application to perform
disc and/or file identification and obtain music-related information,
including name, artist, track, and title information (“Gracenote Data”)
from online servers or embedded databases (collectively, “Gracenote
Servers”) and to perform other functions. You may use Gracenote
Data only by means of the intended End-User functions of this
application or device.
You agree that you will use Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software,
and Gracenote Servers for your own personal non-commercial
use only. You agree not to assign, copy, transfer or transmit the
Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data to any third party. YOU
AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA, THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT
AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN.
You agree that your non-exclusive license to use the Gracenote Data,
the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers will terminate if
you violate these restrictions. If your license terminates, you agree
to cease any and all use of the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote
Software, and Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves all rights
in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and the Gracenote
Servers, including all ownership rights. Under no circumstances will
Gracenote become liable for any payment to you for any information
that you provide. You agree that Gracenote, Inc. may enforce its rights
under this Agreement against you directly in its own name.
The Gracenote service uses a unique identifier to track queries for
statistical purposes. The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric
identifier is to allow the Gracenote service to count queries without
knowing anything about who you are. For more information, see the
web page for the Gracenote Privacy Policy for the Gracenote service.
The Gracenote Software and each item of Gracenote Data are
licensed to you “AS IS.”
Gracenote makes no representations or warranties, express or
implied, regarding the accuracy of any Gracenote Data from in the
Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves the right to delete data
from the Gracenote Servers or to change data categories for any
cause that Gracenote deems sufficient. No warranty is made that
the Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers are error-free or that
functioning of Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers will be
uninterrupted. Gracenote is not obligated to provide you with new
enhanced or additional data types or categories that Gracenote may
provide in the future and is free to discontinue its services at any time.
GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT.
GRACENOTE DOES NOT WARRANT THE RESULTS THAT WILL
BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE
OR ANY GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE
BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES.
Reference
Sampling is the process of converting the heights of sound wave
(analogue signal) samples taken at set periods into digits (digital
encoding). Sampling frequency is the number of samples taken per
second, so larger numbers mean more faithful reproduction of the
original sound.
105
RQT9089
08_Reference_RQT9089-B_EB.indd 105
2008/04/28 18:22:51
Specifications
Power supply:
AC 220 V to 240 V, 50 Hz
Power consumption:Approx. 40 W
Standby mode:
(Power Save mode): Approx. 2 W
(Quick Start mode): Approx. 22 W
Recordable discs:
DVD-RAM: 2X SPEED (Ver. 2.0), 2-3X SPEED (Ver. 2.1)
2-5X SPEED (Ver. 2.2)
DVD-R (SL): 1X SPEED (Ver. 2.0), 1-4X SPEED (Ver. 2.0)
1-8X SPEED (Ver. 2.0), 1-16X SPEED (Ver. 2.1)
DVD-R (DL): 2-4X SPEED (Ver. 3.0), 2-8X SPEED (Ver. 3.0)
DVD-RW:
1X SPEED (Ver. 1.1), 1-2X SPEED (Ver. 1.1)
2-4X SPEED (Ver. 1.2), 2-6X SPEED (Ver. 1.2)
+R (SL):
2.4X SPEED (Ver. 1.0), 2.4-4X SPEED (Ver. 1.1)
2.4-8X SPEED (Ver. 1.2)
2.4-16X SPEED (Ver. 1.3)
+R (DL):
2.4X SPEED (Ver. 1.0), 2.4-8X SPEED (Ver. 1.1)
+RW:
2.4X SPEED (Ver. 1.1), 2.4-4X SPEED (Ver. 1.2)
Recording system:
DVD-RAM: DVD Video Recording format
DVD-R:
DVD-Video format
DVD-R DL (Dual Layer):
DVD-Video format
DVD-RW:
DVD-Video format
+R
+R DL (Double Layer)
+RW
Recording time:
Max. 8 hours (using 4.7 GB disc)
XP: Approx. 1 hour
SP: Approx. 2 hours
LP: Approx. 4 hours
EP: Approx. 6 hours or 8 hours
Maximum Approx. 441 hours with 250 GB HDD (EP 8 hours mode)
XP: Approx. 55 hours,
SP: Approx. 110 hours
LP: Approx. 221 hours,
EP: Approx. 331 hours/441 hours
Playable discs:
DVD-RAM: DVD Video Recording format
DVD-R:
DVD-Video format, MP3 1, JPEG 1, DivX 1
DVD-R DL (Dual Layer):
DVD-Video format, MP3 1, JPEG 1, DivX 1
DVD-RW:
DVD Video Recording format, DVD-Video format
+R
+R DL (Double Layer)
+RW
DVD-Video, CD-Audio (CD-DA), Video CD, SVCD 2
CD-R/CD-RW: CD-DA 1, Video CD 1, SVCD 1, 2, MP3 1,
JPEG 1, DivX 1
Internal HDD capacity:
250 GB
Optical pick-up:
System with 1 lens, 2 integration units
(662 nm wavelength for DVDs, 780 nm wavelength for CDs)
106
LASER Specification:
Class 1 LASER Product
Wave Length:
780 nm (CDs)
662 nm (DVDs)
Laser Power:
No hazardous radiation is emitted
with the safety protection
Television system:
Tuner System:
DVB-T
Channel Coverage:
UK
UHF:
21 to 68 ch
RF converter output:
Not provided
Video:
Video system:
PAL colour signal, 625 lines, 50 fields
NTSC colour signal, 525 lines, 60 fields
Recording system:
MPEG2 (Hybrid VBR)
Video In (PAL/NTSC):
AV1/AV2 (21 pin), AV3 (pin jack) 1 Vp-p 75 Ω, termination
S-Video In (PAL/NTSC):
AV2 (21 pin), AV3 (S terminal) 1 Vp-p 75 Ω, termination
RGB In (PAL):
AV2 (21 pin), 0.7 Vp-p (PAL) 75 Ω, termination
Video Out (PAL/NTSC):
AV1/AV2 (21 pin), Video Out (pin jack) 1 Vp-p 75 Ω, termination
S-Video Out (PAL/NTSC):
AV1 (21 pin), S-Video Out (S terminal) 1 Vp-p 75 Ω, termination
RGB Out (PAL/NTSC):
AV1 (21 pin) 0.7 Vp-p (PAL) 75 Ω, termination
Component video output (NTSC 480p/480i, PAL 576p/576i)
Y: 1.0 Vp-p 75 Ω, termination
PB: 0.7 Vp-p 75 Ω, termination
PR: 0.7 Vp-p 75 Ω, termination
VHS:
Recording format:
VHS Video Cassette System Standard with FM audio
Heads: 4 Helical Scan Heads for Video
2 Helical Scan Heads for FM audio
1 Fixed Head for Normal audio
Tape speed/Recording time (with E-240 tape):
PAL:
SP: 23.39 mm/s, 240 min
LP: 11.7 mm/s, 480 min
EP: 7.8 mm/s, 720 min
NTSC: SP: 33.35 mm/s, 168 min
EP: 11.12 mm/s, 505 min
Audio:
Recording system: Dolby Digital (2 ch), Linear PCM (XP mode)
Audio In:
AV1/AV2 (21 pin), AV3 (pin jack)
Input Level:
Standard: 0.5 Vrms, Full scale: 2.0 Vrms at 1 kHz
Input Impedance: More than 10 kΩ
Audio Out:
AV1/AV2 (21 pin), Audio Out (pin jack)
Output Level:
Standard: 0.5 Vrms, Full scale: 2.0 Vrms at 1 kHz
Output Impedance: Less than 1 kΩ
Digital Audio Out: Optical terminal (PCM, Dolby Digital, DTS, MPEG)
DV Input:
USB:
USB port:
USB standard:
Format:
HDMI Output:
IEEE 1394 Standard, 4 Pin: 1 pc
Type A: 1 pc
USB 2.0 High Speed
FAT16, FAT32
19 pin type A: 1 pc
HDMITM (V.1.3 with Deep Colour)
This unit supports “HDAVI Control 3” function.
SD Card:
Slot:
SD Memory Card Slot: 1 pc
Compatible media: SD Memory Card 3, SDHC Memory
Card, MultiMediaCard
Format:
FAT12, FAT16 4 (In case of SD Memory
Card, MultiMediaCard)
FAT32 4 (In case of SDHC Memory Card)
Still Picture (JPEG)
Image File Format: JPEG conforming DCF (Design rule for
Camera File system)
Number of pixels: Between 34 × 34 and 6144 × 4096
Sub sampling: 4:2:2, 4:2:0
Thawing time:
Approx.1.9 sec (6 M pixels, JPEG)
Video (SD-Video) 5
Codec:
MPEG 2 (SD-Video Entertainment
Video Profile)
File Format:
SD-Video format conforming
Quick Start for Recording & EPG Display (Power Save : OFF)
1 Sec. Quick Start for Rcecording & EPG Display
(when connecting to TV using 21-pin Scart, Component Video, Video
or S-Video terminals)
From the power on, recording on DVD-RAM and HDD starts in
about 1 second after the REC button is pressed. If the GUIDE
button is pressed while the unit is off, the Electronic Program
Guide (EPG) displays in less than 1 second. (Quick Start Mode)
Others
Regional Code:
#2
Operating temperature range: 5 °C to 40 °C
Operating humidity range: 10 % to 80 % RH (no condensation)
Dimensions (W×H×D):
430 mm × 84 mm × 341 mm
(excluding the projecting parts)
430 mm × 84 mm × 350 mm
(including the projecting parts)
Mass:
Approx. 6.3 kg
1 Finalising is necessary for compatible playback.
2 Conforming to IEC62107
This unit is not compatible with “Chaoji VCD” available on the
market including CVD, DVCD and SVCD that do not conform to
IEC62107.
3 Includes miniSD cards. (A miniSD adaptor needs to be inserted.)
Includes microSD cards. (A microSD adaptor needs to be inserted.)
4 Long file name is unsupported.
5 Video Recording conversion and transfer is possible from card or
Panasonic digital video camera with HDD etc, to HDD or DVDRAM disc. After Video Recording conversion and transfer to HDD
or DVD-RAM disc, the playback is possible.
Notes
• Specifications are subject to change without notice.
• Usable capacity will be less (SD Card).
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 106
2008/04/23 19:01:42
THIS PRODUCT UTILIZES A LASER.
USE OF CONTROLS OR ADJUSTMENTS OR
PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN THOSE
SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESULT IN HAZARDOUS
RADIATION EXPOSURE.
DO NOT OPEN COVERS AND DO NOT REPAIR YOURSELF.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED PERSONNEL.
CAUTION!
• DO NOT INSTALL OR PLACE THIS UNIT IN A BOOKCASE,
BUILT-IN CABINET OR IN ANOTHER CONFINED SPACE.
ENSURE THE UNIT IS WELL VENTILATED. TO PREVENT
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK OR FIRE HAZARD DUE
TO OVERHEATING, ENSURE THAT CURTAINS AND
ANY OTHER MATERIALS DO NOT OBSTRUCT THE
VENTILATION VENTS.
• DO NOT OBSTRUCT THE UNIT’S VENTILATION OPENINGS
WITH NEWSPAPERS, TABLECLOTHS, CURTAINS, AND
SIMILAR ITEMS.
• DO NOT PLACE SOURCES OF NAKED FLAMES, SUCH AS
LIGHTED CANDLES, ON THE UNIT.
• DISPOSE OF BATTERIES IN AN ENVIRONMENTALLY
FRIENDLY MANNER.
CAUTION
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type
recommended by the manufacturer. Dispose of used
batteries according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
THIS UNIT IS INTENDED FOR USE IN MODERATE CLIMATES.
This product may receive radio interference caused by mobile
telephones during use. If such interference is apparent, please
increase separation between the product and the mobile
telephone.
The socket outlet shall be installed near the equipment and easily
accessible.
The mains plug of the power supply cord shall remain readily
operable. To completely disconnect this apparatus from the AC
Mains, disconnect the power supply cord plug from AC receptacle.
-If you see this symbolInformation for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old
Equipment and used Batteries
WARNING:
These symbols on the products, packaging,
and/or accompanying documents mean that used
electrical and electronic products and batteries
should not be mixed with general household
waste.
For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of
old products and used batteries, please take them
to applicable collection points, in accordance
with your national legislation and the Directives
2002/96/EC and 2006/66/EC.
By disposing of these products and batteries
correctly, you will help to save valuable resources
and prevent any potential negative effects on
human health and the environment which could
otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling.
For more information about collection and
recycling of old products and batteries, please
contact your local municipality, your waste
disposal service or the point of sale where you
purchased the items.
Penalties may be applicable for incorrect disposal
of this waste, in accordance with national
legislation.
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE, ELECTRIC SHOCK OR
PRODUCT DAMAGE,
• DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS TO RAIN, MOISTURE,
DRIPPING OR SPLASHING AND THAT NO OBJECTS
FILLED WITH LIQUIDS, SUCH AS VASES, SHALL BE
PLACED ON THE APPARATUS.
• USE ONLY THE RECOMMENDED ACCESSORIES.
• DO NOT REMOVE THE COVER (OR BACK); THERE
ARE NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER
SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
AV OUT
Y
RF
IN
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
PB
PR
S VIDEO
RF
OUT
OPTICAL
AC IN
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
OUT
AV 2 (EXT)
AV 1 (TV)
(Back of product)
For business users in the European Union
If you wish to discard electrical and electronic
equipment, please contact your dealer or supplier
for further information.
[Information on Disposal in other Countries
outside the European Union]
These symbols are only valid in the European
Union. If you wish to discard these items, please
contact your local authorities or dealer and ask for
the correct method of disposal.
(Inside of product)
• For your safety, be sure not to connect or handle the equipment
with wet hands.
Cd
Note for the battery symbol (bottom two
symbol examples):
This symbol might be used in combination with a
chemical symbol. In this case it complies with the
requirement set by the Directive for the chemical
involved.
Reference
CAUTION!
Your attention is drawn to the fact that recording pre-recorded tapes
or discs or other published or broadcast material may infringe
copyright laws.
107
RQT9089
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 107
2008/04/23 19:01:43
Index
A Adjust the audio quality (Sound menu)......75
Adjust the picture quality (Picture menu)...75
Album (CD)
Edit......................................................61
Play .....................................................48
Album (Still picture)
Edit......................................................59
Play .....................................................44
Angle......................................................74
Aspect....................................................82
Audio
Digital broadcast (DVB Multi Audio) ....75
Playback .............................................74
Auto Renewal Recording .....................36
AV2 settings ..........................................83
C Change Thumbnail ...............................55
Channel
Select ..................................................19
Settings ...............................................78
Chapter ............................................42, 56
Chasing playback .................................30
Child Lock .............................................85
Cleaning
Disc .......................................................6
Lens ......................................................7
Main unit ...............................................7
Video heads ..........................................7
Clock setting .........................................14
Connection
Aerial ......................................10, 11, 86
Amplifier, system component, receiver ....88
DV input terminal ................................33
HDMI.............................................12, 88
Satellite receiver ...........................11, 12
Television ..........................10–12, 86–88
Video cassette recorder ......................32
Copy
Music ..................................................72
SD Video .............................................69
Still picture ..........................................70
Title/Playlist...................................23, 62
Copy (playlist) .......................................58
CPRM ...................................................104
Create Chapter ................................42, 56
Create playlists .....................................57
D Delete
Album (CD) .........................................61
Album (Still picture).......................59, 61
All titles ...............................................76
Chapter .........................................56, 58
Group (MP3) .......................................61
Playlist ................................................57
Still picture ....................................59, 61
Title ...............................................26, 54
Track (MP3) ........................................61
Digital Audio Output settings ........81, 83
Digital broadcast
Digital channel information .................52
DVB Multi Audio ..................................75
DVB Subtitle..................................52, 82
New Service .................................53, 82
Recording ...........................................21
Select the channel ..............................19
Signal Condition..................................79
System Update ...................................84
Timer...................................................22
Direct Navigator .................. 40, 44, 54, 59
Direct TV Recording .............................29
Discs ................................................15–16
Display
Digital channel information .................52
Status messages ................................53
Divide Title .............................................55
DivX................................................18, 104
DV automatic recording .......................33
E Edit
Chapter ...............................................56
Music on HDD.....................................61
Playlists...............................................57
Still picture ..........................................59
Title .....................................................54
Enabling discs to be played on other
equipment – Finalise ........................77
Encrypted ..............................................52
F Finalise ..........................................77, 104
Flexible Recording................................30
Format ...........................................76, 104
FR (Flexible Recording Mode) .............28
Freeview Playback ................................22
FUNCTION MENU Window ...................49
G Gracenote® Database ...........................72
Group (MP3)
Edit......................................................61
GUIDE Plus+ ....................... 19, 22, 38–39
H HDAVI Control ............... 12, 50–51, 83, 88
HDMI .......................................... 12, 83, 88
High Speed Copy ..................................27
I Initialize .................................................84
J JPEG .................................. 18, 44–45, 104
L Language
Code list ............................................103
Disc menu ...........................................80
Soundtrack....................................74, 80
Subtitle ..........................................74, 80
Linked timer recordings with external
equipment (digital satellite receiver)
–Ext Link ......................................31, 83
LPCM .............................................81, 104
M Manual Skip...........................................42
Menu
DivX ..............................................42–43
MP3 ....................................................43
Setup ..................................................78
Mode
Recording ...........................................28
Still Mode ............................................81
MP3 ................................................18, 104
Copy ...................................................72
Edit......................................................61
Play ...............................................43, 48
Music on HDD
Copy ...................................................72
Edit......................................................61
Play .....................................................48
N Name
Album (CD) .........................................61
Album (Still picture).............................60
Disc .....................................................76
Entering text........................................53
Group (MP3) .......................................61
Playlist ................................................58
Title ...............................................34, 54
New Service ....................................53, 82
O Owner ID ................................................13
P Partial Delete .........................................55
Pause Live TV........................................49
VIERA .................................................51
Picture settings...............................75, 81
Playlist ...................................................57
Power Save............................................84
Progressive ............................. 75, 82, 105
Properties
Music on HDD.....................................48
Playlist ................................................57
Still picture ....................................45, 60
Title .....................................................54
Protection
Album (Still picture).............................60
Card ....................................................76
Cartridge .............................................76
Disc .....................................................76
Still picture ..........................................60
Title .....................................................55
Q Q Link ....................................................50
Quick Start ............................................13
Quick View .............................................41
R Ratings level settings...........................80
Recording ..............................................21
Aspect .................................................27
Auto Renewal......................................36
Direct TV Recording............................29
DV automatic recording ......................33
External Link .................................31, 83
Flexible Recording ..............................30
Important notes...................................27
Mode ...................................................28
Relief...................................................36
Satellite ...............................................31
Timer.......................................22, 34–39
Relief Recording ...................................36
Remote control code ............................94
Repeat Play ............................... 46, 48, 75
Resume play function ..........................20
S Satellite receiver
Connection....................................11, 12
Recording ...........................................31
Timer...................................................31
Watching .............................................19
SD card ..................................................17
Select channel ......................................19
Setup menu ...........................................78
Signal Condition ...................................79
Simultaneous rec and play ..................30
Soundtrack ............................................74
Still picture
Copy ...................................................70
Edit......................................................59
Play .....................................................44
Subtitle
Digital broadcast (DVB Subtitle) ...52, 82
Disc .....................................................74
Switch the audio/subtitles on the disc
(Disc menu) .......................................74
System Update......................................84
T Time Slip................................................42
Timer recording ........................22, 34–39
Tuning ..............................................78–79
TV System (PAL/NTSC) ........................82
U USB
Copy (Music).......................................72
Copy (SD Video) .................................69
Copy (Still picture) ..............................70
Insert...................................................89
Play .....................................................42
Supported formats ..............................17
V VHS
Copy .............................................24, 68
Insert...................................................89
Jet Rewind ..........................................46
Play .........................................20, 46–47
S-VHS Quasi Playback (SQPB)....46, 83
VHS Index Search System (VISS) ......46
VIERA Link .................... 12, 50–51, 83, 88
EU
Environment friendly printed on chlorine free bleached paper.
Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.
Web Site: http://panasonic.net
Pursuant to at the directive 2004/108/EC, article 9(2)
Panasonic Testing Centre
Panasonic Marketing Europe GmbH
Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Germany
RQT9089-B_DMR-EX98V_EB.indb 108
En
RQT9089-B
H0408FJ0
2008/04/23 19:01:44
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement